WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU ALS Series Equipmen PDF

WEB LCT
ALCplus2 IDU
ALS series equipment with ALCplus2 IDU
management software application
Release 1.2
User manual
MN.00237.E - 006
Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU
Contents
WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 11

WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION .................................................................................. 14
VERSION........................................................................................................................... 15
LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 16
INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................... 17
START-UP .............................................................................................................................. 18
START-UP FROM BROWSER ................................................................................................. 19
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection) ......................................... 19
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection) ............................................... 20
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection) .............................................. 20
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem) ...................................... 21
Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT ..................................................................... 22
START-UP FROM SCT/LMT ................................................................................................... 25
WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE ............................................................................................... 27

INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA .......................................................................................... 28
To verify the version of the WEB LCT application............................................................... 30
To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT
page ........................................................................................................................... 30
To execute the login of the user ..................................................................................... 30
To execute the logout of the user ................................................................................... 31
CONTEXTUAL AREA............................................................................................................. 32
EVENTS LIST AREA ............................................................................................................. 35
To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of the alarm/status signals.............................. 36
Alarm and status signals (more info) ............................................................................... 36
MAIN MENU ........................................................................................................................... 37

EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES .................................................................................................... 38
To verify the equipment properties ................................................................................. 38
To modify the equipment identifier.................................................................................. 39
To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment............................................ 39
To execute the equipment software reset......................................................................... 39
To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC ............ 40
PORT CONFIGURATION & ACL .............................................................................................. 41
To verify/modify the parameters of the communication ports reserved to the local and remote su-
pervision of the equipment ............................................................................................ 41
Ethernet port ......................................................................................................... 42
LCT PPP port .......................................................................................................... 43
Radio 1A port ......................................................................................................... 44
2Mb/s EOC port ...................................................................................................... 45
WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 1

IP Over OSI port..................................................................................................... 45
To execute the equipment software reset......................................................................... 47
To verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List ........................................................ 47
To add/remove a rule from the IP Access Control List ........................................................ 48
To enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List ...................................................... 48
IP Access Control List (more info) ................................................................................... 49
ROUTING TABLE................................................................................................................. 50
To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway)...................................................... 50
To add an element to the Routing Table........................................................................... 51
To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table................................................... 51
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway ...................................................... 52
To delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway ............................................................ 52
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info) ................................................................ 52
STORED ROUTING TABLE .................................................................................................... 54
To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup mem-
ory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).............. 54
To add an element into the Stored Routing Table .............................................................. 55
To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table ........................................ 56
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table ............ 56
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table................... 56
REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE .................................................................................................... 57
To verify the remote equipment list................................................................................. 57
To add a station to the list ............................................................................................. 58
To rename a station of the list........................................................................................ 58
To remove a station of the list ........................................................................................ 59
To add an equipment to the list ...................................................................................... 59
To remove an equipment from the list ............................................................................. 60
To reset the remote equipment list ................................................................................. 60
Remote equipment list (more info).................................................................................. 60
PERFORMANCE MONITORING ............................................................................................... 62
Measures available for the ALCplus2 equipment ................................................................ 63
Quality parameters description (PM measures) ................................................................. 64
To verify the status of the PM measures .......................................................................... 67
To activate a PM measure .............................................................................................. 68
To activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously ................................................ 68
To deactivate a PM measure........................................................................................... 68
To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously .............................................. 69
To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms ............ 69
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure........................................................... 70
To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) ........................................... 72
To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms ......................................... 72
To activate a measure ....................................................................................... 72
To deactivate a measure .................................................................................... 72
To change the type of the displayed control parameters (G828..., G829...) ............... 72
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the
alarms (G829 RstB1 STM-1) ............................................................................... 73
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure ...................................................... 75
alarms (G829 MstB2M1 STM-1) .......................................................................... 77
G828 Radio <radio branch> measure ........................................................................ 79
alarms (G828 Radio) ......................................................................................... 81
G828 E1 Line Side measure ..................................................................................... 83
alarms (G828 E1...) .......................................................................................... 85
To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure ................................................. 86

G828 E1 Radio Side measure ................................................................................... 87
G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure ......................... 89
alarms (G828 STM-1... - Vc12...) ........................................................................ 91
ACM Radio A measure ............................................................................................. 93
To change the type of the displayed counters ....................................................... 95
To set the thresholds of the alarms (ACM Radio A) ................................................ 95
To modify the modality used to increase the counters ............................................ 98
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure....................................................................... 99
To change the type of the displayed control parameters ........................................101
alarms............................................................................................................101
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure ......................................................................102
To change the type of the displayed control parameters ........................................104
alarms............................................................................................................104
PM measures (more info)..............................................................................................105
REPORTS & LOGGERS MAINTENANCE...................................................................................106
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the
users to file ................................................................................................................106
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller .................................................109
To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller .......................................109
SNTP & WAKE UP CONFIGURATION......................................................................................110
To verify the SNTP functionality .....................................................................................110
To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality ..................................111
To disable the SNTP functionality ...................................................................................111
To verify the Wake Up functionality status ......................................................................112
To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality .............................112
To disable the Wake Up functionality ..............................................................................113
SNTP functionality (more info).......................................................................................113
Wake Up functionality (more info)..................................................................................114
SD MEMORY MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................115
To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory.............................................115
To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit
117
To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory.....................118
To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory......................................119
To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory ............119
To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory ......................................120
To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an
automatic sw update from SD memory .....................................................................120
To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD memory
to the controller.....................................................................................................120
To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) ..............120
SD memory card (more info).........................................................................................120
SOFTWARE INFO & MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................123
To verify the firmware version of the equipment ..............................................................123
To update the firmware of the equipment .......................................................................124
To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller .................125
To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment ................................................125
To update the WEB LCT application ................................................................................126
To verify the communication stack in use........................................................................127
To modify the communication stack in use ......................................................................127
To execute the equipment software reset........................................................................128
To restore Factory Default of the equipment....................................................................128
Update of the equipment firmware (more info) ................................................................128
Factory Default of the equipment (more info) ..................................................................129

BACKUP/RESTORE CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................130
To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ....................................130
To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) .................130
To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last oper-
ation of configuration restore (configuration revert) .........................................................131
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info) ...............................................131
UNIT LIST ........................................................................................................................132
To verify the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration) ..............................132
ACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION ..............................................................................................134
To verify the active manual operations ...........................................................................134
To verify/modify the manual operation timeout................................................................135
ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION .....................................................................................136
To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms .......................136
To enable/disable an alarm ...........................................................................................137
To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm...................................................137
To change the severity level of an alarm .........................................................................138
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info) .......................................................138
VIEW LOGGED USER..........................................................................................................139
To verify the users connected to the equipment ...............................................................139
To force the logout of a user .........................................................................................140
USER MANAGER ................................................................................................................141
To verify the user list ...................................................................................................141
To add a user to the list ...............................................................................................142
To modify a user into the list.........................................................................................142
To delete a user from the list ........................................................................................143
To change the password and the timeout of the System user (System Password) .................143
To change the network password and timeout (Network Password) ....................................143
To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password) .........................144
To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different from
WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment of
remote users ..............................................................................................................144
User list (more info).....................................................................................................145
FEATURES MANAGEMENT ...................................................................................................146
To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment .....................................................146
To enable the new functionalities ...................................................................................147
RMON ..............................................................................................................................148
To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment
Ethernet ports.............................................................................................................148
To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ................................149
To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port.............................149
To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (RMON)..............................149
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT ...................150
EQUIPMENT MENU ............................................................................................................... 152

MAIN MENU ......................................................................................................................153
EQUIPMENT ......................................................................................................................154
Configurator ...............................................................................................................155
To verify/modify the radio configuration....................................................................155
To verify/modify the management of synchronisation .................................................158
To verify/modify the management of STM-1 streams ..................................................159
To verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node .........................................159
To verify/modify the number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with Ethernet
nodal Bus .............................................................................................................159
To verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the ALCplus2 node ..........................160
To verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node .....................160
To verify/modify the number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with TDM nodal
Bus......................................................................................................................161

To verify/modify the protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALCplus2 node...................161
To verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the ALplus node ..............................161
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the ALplus node .....................................162
To verify/modify the protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALplus node ......................162
To verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports of the local Eth-
ernet Switch to/from the ports of the Ethernet switches of the other elements of the ALCplus2
node ....................................................................................................................162
Mod. Cap/Link ID.........................................................................................................164
To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parame-
ters of the adaptive modulation ...............................................................................164
To display the table summarizing the radio transport ..................................................166
To modify the reference band/modulation .................................................................167
To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation ..........................................167
To modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled) .................................167
To modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) 168
To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) ........168
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams) ...168
To verify/modify the link identification number ..........................................................168
To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) ......................169
Adaptive modulation (more info)..............................................................................170
General Preset ............................................................................................................172
To verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ......................................172
To verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol .......................173
To verify/modify the enabling of the switch in transmission .........................................173
To verify/modify the T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control) ......................................174
To reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control) .......................174
To verify/modify the radio branch label .....................................................................174
Local/remote synchronization protocol (more info) .....................................................175
SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................176
To verify the status of the synchronism sources ...............................................................176
To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input ...............................................178
To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input......................................180
To force the use of a synchronism source in input ............................................................180
To set a synchronism source in input as preferential.........................................................180
To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2.........................................181
To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A (T0) or STM-1/NODAL B (T0) ...
181
To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input ................................................181
To force the status of the T0 synchronisation...................................................................182
To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism .................................................................182
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and set the interface (output/input)
of tributary A/B ...........................................................................................................182
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation..........183
Management of synchronisation (more info) ....................................................................184
Synchronism sources in input ..................................................................................185
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................187
Synchronism in output T12 .....................................................................................188
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ....188
BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................190
Ethernet Switch...........................................................................................................191
To verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Address Table .........191
To reset the MAC Address Table...............................................................................193
To restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch.......................................................193
To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet .........................................193
To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field ........................................193
To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue ......193
To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, according to its
Tag 802.1p ...........................................................................................................194

To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality
is activated and deactivated ....................................................................................194
To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ethernet ports,
depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) ...............................................................195
To verify the existing virtual LANs ............................................................................196
To create a virtual Lan............................................................................................197
To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan...............................................................198
To delete a virtual Lan............................................................................................199
MAC Address Table (more info)................................................................................199
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 ..........................................................................................200
To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4).........201
To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port (Lan1, Lan2
and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) ..........................................................................203
To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is in-
active, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)..................................................................................................204
To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) ...................................................................................................................204
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses in the
MAC Address table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) .............................................................205
To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) 205
To verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3,
Lan4 electrical interface).........................................................................................205
To verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line syn-
chronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)...........................................206
To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4) ...........................206
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ......207
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................208
To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4) ..........................................................................................................208
To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ..
209
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)..................................................................................................209
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external
port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4).....................................................210
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external
port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) .............................211
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) ...................................................................................................................211
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4) ..........................................................................................................211
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
213
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (SPT/ELP) .....213
To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (STP/ELP)
214
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Ethernet line protection (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4) ..........................................................................................................214
To enable/disable the Ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
216
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Trunking mode (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) ...................................................................................................................216
To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ......218
To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)........................................................................................218
To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) ....
219
To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ........................220
To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ................................221

To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ............221
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) .......222
To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) ....................222
To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)...................223
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (more info) .................................................................223
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (more info) ................................................................223
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment) ...................................224
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)...................................................225
Trunking mode (more info) .....................................................................................226
Ethernet Trunking mode (LAN ports) ..................................................................227
Radio Trunking mode (internal port - Port A) .......................................................227
Port A ........................................................................................................................228
To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port .............................................228
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses in the
MAC Address Table for the internal port ....................................................................229
To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port ...........................................229
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port ..
231
To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output ..........231
To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value..................................232
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port ..232
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal
port to the output queue.........................................................................................233
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal
port which, in output, the Tag is added to .................................................................234
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port) 234
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol............234
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port................................236
To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (STP) ................................................236
To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (STP) ....................................236
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Trunking mode .......................237
To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port ...........................................237
Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................238
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol .........................................238
To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................239
To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................239
To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................239
To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol .........239
To verify the MAC Address of a Bridge ......................................................................241
To verify/modify the priority of a Bridge....................................................................241
To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the Ethernet line protection .........241
TDM Tributaries...........................................................................................................243
E1 .......................................................................................................................244
To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status ..................................................................244
To verify/modify the label of a tributary ..............................................................245
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use.................................................245
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops ................................................246
STM-1 ..................................................................................................................247
Lim A STM-1 [x] ..............................................................................................248
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream ............................................248
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side) ...........250
To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte .....................250
To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace
Identifier ..................................................................................................250
To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms .......................................................251
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm .......251

To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm ........252
To verify the current status of the laser.........................................................252
To verify the type of laser module ................................................................253
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser ............................................253
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser .......................................254
To enable manually the laser transmission.....................................................254
To execute the test laser functioning status ...................................................255
VC-4 ....................................................................................................................256
Lim A VC-4 [x] ................................................................................................257
To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte .....................257
Identifier ..................................................................................................258
To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms .........................................................258
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm .......258
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm ........259
To verify/modify the Signal Label value .........................................................260
VC-12 ..................................................................................................................261
VC-12 Thresholds ............................................................................................262
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm ...262
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm ....263
Lim A VC-12 [x]...............................................................................................264
To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 .....264
Identifier of a VC-12...................................................................................265
To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 .........................................265
To verify the alarms status of a VC-12 ..........................................................266
Cross Connection.........................................................................................................267
To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format.....................................267
To display the connections of the equipment in table format ........................................273
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection...................................................................274
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection..............................................................274
To delete one or more connections...........................................................................275
To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ..............................................275
To disable an Auto-Loop .........................................................................................276
To verify/modify the connection label .......................................................................276
To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (ALplus node) ...........................................277
Cross connection matrix (more info).........................................................................277
RADIO .............................................................................................................................281
Radio Branch ..............................................................................................................282
To verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment ....282
To verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .............................................284
To verify/modify the operation of the transmitter .......................................................284
To verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply................................................284
To verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) .........................................285
To verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx).....................................285
To verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC ....................................................285
To verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter ..........................287
To verify/modify the intervention threshold (High/Low) of the ATPC device....................287
To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for
every ACM profile ..................................................................................................287
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................289
Lan Statistics ..............................................................................................................290
To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports........290
To reset the counters’ results ..................................................................................292
Lan Stat. Summary......................................................................................................293
To verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports................................293

To reset the counters’ results ..................................................................................294
OAM-FM Domain..........................................................................................................295
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB LCT ...........296
OAM-FM Domain ..............................................................................................296
MA.................................................................................................................297
MEP ...............................................................................................................297
MIP ................................................................................................................298
Remote MEPs ..................................................................................................299
CCM...............................................................................................................300
LBM ...............................................................................................................301
LTM ...............................................................................................................302
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM maintenance Domain for a set of ALCplus2 equip-
ment ..............................................................................................................302
To verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment............................304
To define an OAM-FM Domain for an equipment .........................................................304
To remove the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment .......................................................304
OAM-FM MA/MEP .........................................................................................................305
To verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality .............305
To associate a MA to a VLAN ...................................................................................308
To associate a MEP to a VLAN..................................................................................308
To remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ...........................................................................309
To enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP ...................................310
To verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table) ........................................................310
To insert a remote MEP in the RMep table .................................................................311
To enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ................................................................312
To disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...............................................................312
To remove a remote MEP from RMep table ................................................................312
To send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP ..........................313
To trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the same
VLAN ...................................................................................................................314
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................316
To verify the measure of the S/N ratio ......................................................................316
Fade Margin................................................................................................................317
To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (Fade Margin) 317
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin .......................................319
To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the cal-
culation of the Fade Margin .....................................................................................319
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin) (more info) .............................................320
PRBS .........................................................................................................................321
To verify the PRBS measure status...........................................................................321
To activate/reset the PRBS measure.........................................................................322
To deactivate the PRBS measure..............................................................................322
To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure ..................................322
To enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure .................................................322
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................324
To verify the radio loops status................................................................................324
To activate a radio loop ..........................................................................................325
To deactivate a radio loop .......................................................................................325
To execute the test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN .....................325
Radio loop (more info)............................................................................................326
Test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN (more info) .........................326
Radio Switch A ............................................................................................................328
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches ...................328
To modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch) .................329
To modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch).............329
To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)..........330
To modify the Wait Time parameter .........................................................................330

To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ..
330
Radio switch (more info).........................................................................................330
SWITCH ...........................................................................................................................332
STM-1........................................................................................................................333
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch ....................333
To modify the management of the STM-1 switch ........................................................334
To modify the logic of STM-1 switch .........................................................................335
To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential........................................................335
To force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
335
STM-1 switch (more info)........................................................................................336
Nodal Bus...................................................................................................................337
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch .....................337
To modify the management of the nodal switch .........................................................338
To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time ex-
piration ................................................................................................................338
Nodal switch (more info).........................................................................................339
USER INPUT .....................................................................................................................340
Local User Input ..........................................................................................................341
To verify the local user input status..........................................................................341
To verify/modify the name of a local user input..........................................................342
To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input ..............................................342
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input ............342
Enabling the user input alarms (more info)................................................................343
Remote User Input ......................................................................................................344
To verify the remote user input status ......................................................................344
To change the name of a remote user input ..............................................................345
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input ........345
USER OUTPUT...................................................................................................................346
To verify the user output status.....................................................................................346
To verify/modify the name of an user output ...................................................................347
To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an user output .....................347
To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output ....................................................347
To enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator ....................................348
To force the user output activation.................................................................................348
To remove the forcing of the user output ........................................................................348
ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 349
OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 354
PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 362
ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 368

WEB LCT APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application allows an user connecting to an equipment via his own machine (pc, workstation,
etc.) using the operating system (1) and the Web browser at his disposal.
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC, except for the SCT/LMT program or the WEB Lct Console program, necessary to
WEB LCT for the management of the file transfer between PC and equipment (FTP), of the serial/USB/mo-
dem connection (PPP) and of the help on-line of WEB LCT (Help Web Server).
(1)For operating systems different from MS Windows®, a FTP server, an Help WEB server and a PPP man-
agement module must be installed on one’s PC.
The WEB LCT application can be started:
• From browser (see Fig.1).

In this case, by means of the WEB LCT interface, it is possible to manage 2 machines at most:
local equipment (equipment which you are connected to) and remote equipment (equipment de-
fined as Remote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment).
• From SCT/LMT program (see Fig.2).
In this case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected by the SCT/LMT interface is
opened.
Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:
• The equipment configuration: radio configuration, capacity, modulation, RF channels, tributar-

ies, parameters, etc. (pag.152).
• The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, etc.) and to execute the reset of the
equipment software (pag.38).
• The communication ports reserved to the local and remote supervision of the equipment and the
IP Access Control List (pag.41).
• The stating Routing Table and the Default Gateway address currently used by the equipment
(Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway) (pag.50).
• The static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address stored in the equipment (Stored Rout-
ing Table and Stored Default Gateway) (pag.54).
• The remote equipment list (pag.57).
• The measures of Performance Monitoring (pag.62).
• The saving to file of the equipment configuration, of the status/alarm signals and of the opera-
tions executed by the users (pag.106).
• The automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment from a network element
and the Wake Up trap (pag.110).
• The memory card SD for the backup/restore of the equipment configuration and software
(pag.115).
• The equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software present in the equipment, the communication
stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default equipment settings (pag.123).
• The back-up/restore of the whole equipment configuration (pag.130).
• The hardware constituting the equipment (pag.132).
• The manual operations and the relevant timeout (pag.134).
• The forward status of the alarms and their severity level (pag.136).
• The users connected to the equipment (pag.139).
• The equipment users list (pag.141).
• The functionalities enabled for the equipment (features key) (pag.146).
• The statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment (pag.148).

In order to access the WEB LCT page, a valid SCT/LMT user (username and password) is necessary.
With valid user (username and password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller
(see pag.145).
It is possible to open:
• More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or dif-
ferent users.
• Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.
• More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.
For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the specific paragraph (pag.16).
Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)
Remote equipment Local equipment

(e.g. 172.18.60.25) (e.g. 172.18.60.33) User PC
Controller Controller Browser

Supervision NE
WEB LCT port management
WEB LCT WEB LCT
application
WEB LCT Internet page page
application
Remote equipment list (HTTP) local remote
Equipment
IP: 172.18.60.25 equipment equipment
Type: Remote Link (172.18.60.33) (172.18.60.25)
FTP
Help Web Server
Network
equipment
SCT/LMT
or
Web Lct
Console

(e.g. 172.18.60.25) (e.g. 172.18.60.33) User PC
Controller Controller Browser

Supervision NE
WEB LCT port management
Serial WEB LCT WEB LCT
application
WEB LCT USB or page page
Remote equipment list Modem local remote
application Equipment connection
IP: 172.18.60.25 equipment equipment
Type: Remote Link (172.18.60.33) (172.18.60.25)
FTP
PPP
Network Help Web Server
equipment
SCT/LMT
or
Web Lct
Console

Fig.2 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from SCT/LMT)

(e.g. 172.18.60.25) (e.g. 172.18.60.33) User PC
Controller Controller SCT/LMT

Supervision NE management Local equipment (172.18.60.33)
WEB LCT port FTP
application Help Web Server
WEB LCT Internet
application
Remote equipment list (HTTP)
Equipment
IP: 172.18.60.25
Type: Remote Link
WEB LCT
Network page
equipment local
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

(e.g. 172.18.60.25) (e.g. 172.18.60.33) User PC
Controller Controller NE management SCT/LMT

Supervision PPP Local equipment (172.18.60.33)
WEB LCT port FTP
application Serial Help Web Server
USB or
WEB LCT
Remote equipment list Modem
application Equipment connection
IP: 172.18.60.25
Type: Remote Link
WEB LCT
Network page
equipment local
equipment
(172.18.60.33)

WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU APPLICATION
The WEB LCT application is called WEB LCT <equipment type> depending on the equipment type to man-
age.
This guide describes the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application present in the equipment of series ALS with
ALCplus2 IDU.
In this guide, to make the writing easier, the wording:

• WEB LCT identifies the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application.
• ALCplus2 identifies the equipment of series ALS with ALCplus2 IDU.

VERSION
The version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment controller can be verified opening the
relevant WEB LCT page and executing one of the following operations:
• Select the About tab.

• Select the command Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance > Web LCT tab.

LIMITS
Maximum number of... Limit
Equipment into the remote equipment list 100
Stations into the remote equipment list 30

(1)
Equipment which can be connected contemporarily via a single WEB 2
LCT page
Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to 2

an equipment via the WEB LCT page
Signals into the Events List area 400
(1) If the WEB LCT page is opened from browser (local equipment and remote equipment - see Fig.1). If
the WEB LCT page is opened from SCT application, the user can connect only to the local equipment (see
Fig.2).

INSTALLATION
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any installation on the
user PC.
To install or update the WEB LCT application present in an equipment, see pag.126.
As help to the WEB LCT application for the management of the FTP, PPP and Help Web Server, it is neces-
sary to use the SCT/LMT or WEB Lct Console program.
The instructions for the installation of the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the rel-
evant manuals.

START-UP
WEB LCT can be run:

• From browser (pag.19).
In this case, by means of the WEB LCT interface, it is possible to manage the local equipment
(equipment which you are connected to) and the remote equipment (equipment defined as Re-
mote Link in the remote equipment list of the local equipment).
• From the SCT/LMT program (pag.25).
In this case, the WEB LCT interface of the equipment selected by the SCT/LMT interface is
opened.
For the management of the FTP, PPP and Help Web Server, it is necessary to start even the SCT/LMT or
WEB Lct Console (WLC) program.
The instructions to start the SCT/LMT and Web Lct Console programs are reported in the relevant manuals.

START-UP FROM BROWSER
The following procedure requires that:

• The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
• The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller.
Depending on the type of used physical connection PC-equipment, follow the specific procedure:
• To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection) - pag.19.
• To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection) - pag.20.
• To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection) - pag.20.
• To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem) - pag.21.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection)
If this type of connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more network
cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web Lct
Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to the PC via LAN network, the relevant WEB LCT page can be opened
also selecting the equipment from the address book of Web Lct Console (see relevant documentation).
1. If not already active, run WLC program (see relevant documentation).
2. Run a browser.
3. Type in the address box:

http://<IP address of the local equipment>
With IP address we mean the address of the equipment supervision port from which you wish to reach
the equipment itself.
The WEB LCT login page opens.
4. Type, into the User box, the name of the SCT/LMT user to use to activate the connection.
5. Type, into the Password box, the access code coupled with the set user.
6. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the WEB LCT application of the
considered equipment, the current username and password are automatically displayed. Otherwise un-
check the considered box.
7. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the WEB LCT page of the local equipment and of the remote equipment
is displayed.
Fig.3 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU pages.
The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page of the local equipment and of the remote equip-
ment are the same and are described in Fig.5.
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT go to pag.22.
After the opening of the WEB LCT page depicted in Fig.3, the Login page of the browser remains avail-
able pointing out the characteristics of the connected equipment. In any moment, it is possible to close
the WEB LCT page and re-open it without executing the login but simply selecting the label Click here
in the Login window.

To open the WEB LCT page from browser (USB connection)
If this type of connection is used, before activating the connection, the USB driver must be installed
and configured (see Web Lct Console user manual).
Then, if you think the USB driver does not operate correctly, execute the controls pointed out in the Web
Lct Console user manual.
When the equipment is connected to PC via an USB connection, the connection management is implement-
ed by WLC program.
1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the USB cable.
2. If not already active, run Web Lct Console program and open the relevant graphical interface (see rel-
evant documentation).
The Web Lct Console window opens.
3. Press Options.
The Options window opens.
4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area.
5. Press Ok.
6. Execute one of the following operations:
• In the Web Lct Console window, press Connect.
• Select , press the right mouse button and select Connect in the pop-up menu.
If the connection operation is successful, the default browser is opened with the WEB LCT login page.
10.Press Login.
is displayed.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection)
If this type of connection is used, checks or settings are generally not necessary as, at the installation
of WLC, the Remote Access (LctDirectPPP) is automatically installed and configured.
If you think the Remote Access does not operate correctly, verify its configuration as points out in Web Lct
Console user manual.
When the equipment is connected to PC via the serial connection, the connection management is imple-
mented by WLC program.
1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the serial cable.

3. Press Options.
4. Select the Connect using direct serial cable option in the PPP area.
5. Press Ok.

10.Press Login.
is displayed.
To open the WEB LCT page from browser (connection via modem)
If this type of connection is used, before activating the connection, the default modem must be config-
ured (see Web Lct Console user manual).
When the equipment is connected to PC via modem, the connection management is implemented by WLC
program.
1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the modem.

3. Press Options.
4. Select the Connect using a modem option in the PPP area.
5. Press Ok.


10.Press Login.
is displayed.
Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT
At the start of WEB LCT, the display of the message:
• Welcome in the WebLct Software upload utility.... The WEB LCT program is not present on the
equipment you wish to connect to.
In order to install WEB LCT, follow the procedure To update the WEB LCT application (pag.126)
starting from step 3.
• Warning: in order to view the contents you must install Adobe Flash Player.... It is necessary to
install or to update the version of Adobe Flash Player present on one’s PC for a correct use of
WEB LCT. The program can be installed/updated from the web site:
• www.siaemic.com > Login (to access to the Download area the registration is necessary)
> Download area - Software > WEB LCT (Windows version) > Adobe Flash Player...
• www.adobe.com.
• Login Fail. Problem: Invalid User!. It means that the typed username is wrong and/or not
present in the equipment user list or that the user password is wrong.
• Login Fail. Problem: The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as
Read Only user. It means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX supervisory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/
LMT user, to be able to execute the login of the equipment.
In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the SCT/LMT user for the ex-
ecution of the operation.
• Login Fail. Problem: Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to
the maximum number of allowed users (see par. Limits - pag.16).
• Warning: compatibility issue found. The Equipment software version is greater/lower than We-
bLct version. This may cause unpredictable problems, means that the firmware version present
on the equipment is not compatible with the version of WEB LCT.
In order to update the firmware, follow the procedure To update the firmware of the equipment
(pag.124).

Fig.3 WEB LCT page (local and remote equipment)
WEB LCT page of the WEB LCT page of the

LOCAL equipment (1) REMOTE equipment (2)
Fig.3 notes
(1) The local equipment is the equipment which you are connected to (equipment which the IP address
typed in the command line of the browser corresponds to).
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the local equipment with the
user/profile entered during the login request. In any moment it is possible to execute the logout
(pag.31) and re-execute the login (pag.30) using the same or a different user with respect to that
used for the login.
If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the su-
pervisory system considers the connection of a SCT/LMT user with Read Only profile a LCT connec-
tion in Monitoring mode. While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment
of a SCT/LMT user with Station Operator or System profile a LCT connection in Configuration mode.
(2) For a correct display of the equipment in the WEB LCT page, it is NECESSARY insert in the remote
equipment list of the local equipment:
• The local equipment with type Managed by SCT.
• The remote equipment with type Remote Link.

If an equipment of type Remote Link is present in the remote equipment table but, at the opening
of WEB page, is unreachable, in this area the message Unable to open remote element interface.
Cause: The far element is unreachable is displayed.
Press Click here to display, in the WEB LCT page of the local equipment, the contextual area Re-
mote Element Manager (see Fig.16) where the equipment of type Remote Link can be modified.
In the Auto connection manager area, it is possible to manage the procedure of automatic connec-
tion to the remote equipment. The New connection attempt... parameter points out the period (ex-
pressed in seconds) between a connection attempt and the next one. If you wish to stop the
attempts of connection to the remote equipment, press Stop. In order to re-activate the procedure,
press Start. In any moment, it is possible to execute an immediate connection attempt, pressing
Try Connection.
If an equipment of type Remote Link is not present in the remote equipment list, the message Una-
ble to open remote element interface. Cause: Remote element not defined in local equipment re-
mote element list is displayed in this area. Press Click here to display, in the WEB LCT page of the
local equipment, the Remote Element Manager contextual area (see Fig.16) where the remote
equipment list can be managed.
If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the appli-
cation will automatically acknowledge as remote equipment the FIRST equipment of Remote Link
type present in the list, even if this one is not physically connected, with respect to the local equip-
ment, to the other side of the radio link.
In the remote equipment list, the equipment are sorted in increasing order by their IP address.
Moreover, the bar Remote Element List is displayed on the right side of the WEB LCT page of the
local equipment: selecting the bar, the Available Remote Element List pop-up window is displayed,
where the equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list is listed.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:
• Station. Station name.
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
• IP Address. IP address.
• Radio Direction. Radio direction (radio branch)
• Conn. Status. Connection status between equipment and WEB LCT page (PC). Wording:
• Connected (green). The connection is active.
• Unreacheable (red). The connection is inactive.
Selecting an equipment in the list, the relevant WEB LCT page is displayed. For example, if the fol-
lowing remote equipment list is defined for the local equipment A:
Equipment B - 172.18.10.23 - Remote Link
Equipment C - 172.18.10.25 - Remote Link
At the opening of the WEB LCT page of equipment A from browser, the WEB LCT pages of equipment
A and equipment B (equipment of type Remote Link present in the Remote Element Table with low-
est IP address) will be displayed. In order to display the WEB LCT page of equipment C, instead of
that of equipment B, it is sufficient to open the Available Remote Element List window and select
the area pointing out the characteristics of equipment C.
To close the Available Remote Element List pop-up window, select the bar Remote Element List.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the remote equipment in Monitor
modality. In order to set or modify the parameters of the remote equipment, the user shall execute
the login for the remote equipment. Even for the remote equipment, in any moment it is possible
to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or a different user with respect to
that used for the first login.

START-UP FROM SCT/LMT
The following procedure requires that:

• The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment you are connecting to.
• The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username and
password) we mean an user present in the users list stored in the controller.
• The SCT/LMT is installed on the PC. More information about the SCT/LMT program is reported
in the relevant documentation.
1. If not already active, run SCT/LMT program (see relevant documentation).
2. Activate the connection with the wished equipment (see relevant documentation).
3. Double click on the record representing the equipment in the SCT/LMT window or selecting the record
of the equipment and the Equipment > LCT Interface command.
The WEB LCT page of the equipment opens.
Fig.4 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page.
The items present in the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page are described in Fig.5.
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the opening of WEB LCT page go to pag.22.
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/profile
of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window.
In any moment, it is possible to execute the logout (pag.31) and re-execute the login (pag.30) using
the same or a different user with respect to that used for the login.
If both the LCT module and the WEB LCT module are available for a given equipment type, the se-
lection of the equipment in the SCT/LMT window and the successive selection of the LCT Interface
command automatically open the LCT equipment interface.
Some equipment types have only the WEB LCT program and not the LCT module. In this case, when
the LCT Interface command is selected, a message is displayed warning that, for the considered
equipment type, only the WEB interface is available. The message is displayed even if the selected
equipment type has the LCT module but this has not been installed on one’s PC.
In this case, there is no need to differentiate the opening of the WEB LCT page according to the con-
nection type, as the connection management is executed by the SCT/LMT program itself. For more infor-
mation, refer to the relevant documentation.

Fig.4 WEB LCT page (local equipment)

WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE
Fig.5 shows an example of WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page subdivided in the following areas:
• Info/status equipment area (pag.28)

• Contextual area (pag.32)
• Events List area (pag.35)
Fig.5 WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU page
Info/status
equipment
area
Contextual
area
Events
List
area

INFO/STATUS EQUIPMENT AREA
The info/equipment status area points out the characteristics and the connection status of the equipment
as depicted in Fig.6.
The information displayed in the area are updated at regular intervals depending on the timeout set by the
user.
By means of the items present in the area, it is possible:

• To verify the version of the WEB LCT application (pag.30).
• To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT
page (pag.30).
• To execute the login of the user (pag.30).
• To execute the logout of the user (pag.31).
Fig.6 info/status equipment area (WEB LCT page)
Equipment Equipment User login/ Tabs Equipment

type (1) identifier (2) profile (3) (4) connection status (5)
Functional
status and
configuration
of the
equipment
(6)
Operating status and radio parameters

relevant to the transmitter and the receiver (7)
Fig.6 notes
(1) The wording ALCplus2 IDU points out the ALCplus2 radio equipment.
(2) The field is not present if no identifier is assigned to the equipment.
(3) Label:
• Read & Write, Station Op or System. The equipment is in connected/login status and the user
who has required the login has, respectively, a profile of type Read and Write, Station Op-
erator or System.
• Monitor. The equipment is in connected/monitor status or in connected/login status the user
who has required the login has profile of type Read Only.
(4) Tab:
• About. Displays the version of the WEB LCT application present on the equipment.
• Options. Displays and manages the timeout used for the update of all the information
present in the WEB LCT page.
• Login. Manages the login and the logout of the user.
(5) Label:
• On Line (green). The equipment is in connected status. In this condition, the parameters can
be verified/modified.
• Off Line (red). The equipment is in disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters
cannot be verified/modified. The browser sends the command of reconnection at regular in-
tervals (timeout set by the user) until when the equipment returns in connected status or
the WEB LCT page is closed.

(6) Box:
• Urg. Status of the urgent alarms (alarms with Critical or Major severity). The box, according
to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours:
• Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
• Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
• Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
• Not Urg. Status of the not urgent alarms (alarms with Minor or Warning severity). The box,
according to the severity of the alarms present into the equipment, can get different colours:
• Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
• Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
• Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
• Radio 1A. Status of the radio connection with branch 1A.
Depending on the equipment configuration type, the box can take on different colours. In
detail in configuration:
• 1+0. Color box:
• Green. The radio connection works properly.
• Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A.
• 1+1. Color box:
• Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A works
correctly).
• Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 1A (the branch 2A does not
correctly work).
• Radio 2A. Status of the radio connection with branch 2A.
The parameter is meaningful only for equipment in protected configuration.
If the box is of color:
• Orange. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 1A works correct-
ly).
• Red. There is loss of radio connection on branch 2A (the branch 2A does not correctly
work).
• ManOp. Activation status of the manual operations. If the box is of color:
• Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).
• Grey. No manual forcing is active.
• Dwl. Activation status of the update of the equipment firmware. If the box is of color:
• Light blue. The firmware update is in progress.
• Grey. The firmware update is not in progress.
• x °C. Operating temperature of the equipment. If the box is of color:
• Green. The operating temperature of the equipment is lower than 75°C.
• Orange. The operating temperature of the equipment is between 75°C and 80°C.
• Red. The operating temperature of the equipment is higher than 80°C.
• <radio configuration>. Wording:
• 1+0. Unprotected radio configuration.
• 1+1 FD. Radio configuration with hetero-frequential protection.
• 1+1 HS. Radio configuration with iso-frequential protection.
The absence of alarms, of manual forcing and of download in progress is pointed out by the grey box.
(7) For each branch, a line is foreseen pointing out from left to right in the column:
• Radio. Branch which the data present in the relevant row refer to. Wording:
• Tx.... Operating status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to
transmission.
• Rx... Operating status and radio parameters of the branches (1 and 2) relevant to
reception.
The boxes Tx2A and Rx2A are present and meaningful only for the equipment in protected
configuration.

The operating status of the branch, independently if the switch is automatic or manual, is
represented by the colour of the box:
• Green. Working branch.
• White. Standby branch.
In the equipment in 1+1 hetero-frequential configuration, the branches 1 and 2 transmit at
the same time; in this case both the Tx1A and Tx2A boxes will be green.
• ACM Prof. Current ACM profile.
• TDM Cap. Radio capacity reserved to the TDM tributaries (E1, STM-1).
• ETH Cap. Radio capacity reserved to the Ethernet tributaries.
• Chan - Freq. RF channel expressed as channel number (Chan) and relevant frequency
(Freq).
The wording UNAVAIL. points out that the RF channel is not set.
• Power. Power in input to the receiver (lines Rx…) and in output to the transmitter (lines Tx…).
In the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration, the wording Std-by is present in the
line Tx… relevant to the standby branch.
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
If the radio is not equipped (Radio A: Unequipped - see Fig.44) the parameters present in this area
are not meaningful and then the relevant values are not displayed (---).
To verify the version of the WEB LCT application
1. Select the About tab (see Fig.6).

The Version parameter points out the version of the WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU application present in the
equipment controller.
To verify/modify the timeout used for the update of all the information
present in the WEB LCT page
1. Select the Options tab (see Fig.6).

The Event polling interval parameter points out the time interval (timeout) between two successive up-
dates of the information present in the WEB LCT page.
2. To modify the parameter, set a number between 5 and 30 seconds.
3. Press Ok.
To execute the login of the user
1. Select the Login tab (see Fig.6).
2. Type the name of the user, with which you wish to execute the login, in the User box.
3. Type the access code associated to the set use into the Password box.
4. Press Login.
If the operation is successful, the profile of the user who has executed the operation is pointed out in
the Curr. Profile box (Read and Write, Station Operator or System).
If the system displays the following message:
• Login Fail. Invalid User!, it means that the typed username is wrong and/or not present in the
users list of the local equipment or that the user password is wrong.

• Login Fail. The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only
user, it means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX super-
visory system and the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the SCT/LMT user, to be
able to execute the login of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user
enables again the SCT/LMT user for the execution of the operation.
• Problem: Too many WEB users! it means that the equipment has been connected to the maxi-
mum number of allowed users (see par. Limits - pag.16).
To execute the logout of the user
1. Select the Login tab (see Fig.6).
2. Press Logout.
If the operation is successful, the wording Monitor is displayed in the Curr. Profile box.

CONTEXTUAL AREA
The contextual area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed. Its
content changes accordingly to the selected command.
In WEB LCT the commands allowing to verify/modify the equipment parameters are collected in the fol-
lowing menus:
• Main Menu (pag.37). Commands for the management of the general equipment parameters
as, for example, the configuration of the supervision ports, the Routing Table, the remote equip-
ment list, the measure of Performance Monitoring, etc.
The commands of the Main Menu are displayed in the contextual area at the opening of the
WEB LCT page or each time you select the command Go to Main or Equipment Menu > Main
Menu as depicted in Fig.7.
• Equipment Menu (pag.152). Commands for the management of the configuration parameters
typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
The command of the Equipment Menu are displayed in a pop-up area that opens when the
pointer passes over the Equipment Menu as depicted in Fig.8.
When a command is selected in the Main Menu or in the Equipment Menu, the contextual area displays
all the parameters relevant to the selected command.
Fig.9 displays an example.
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. If all the tabs are not displayed at the same
time, the arrows keys are displayed to scroll the tabs.
In detail, use the keys to scroll the tabs and the key to display the list of the tabs.
The contextual area can moreover display the following messages:

• WARNING. Access enabled only for SYSTEM users. The selected command is available only to
the user with profile System.
• You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish to exe-
cute is a manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations
are automatically deactivated (see pag.134). The wording No Timeout points out that the time-
out is disabled; this means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deacti-
vates it.
• Requesting Data. Please wait!, Sending Data. Please wait!. The request or the sending of data
is respectively in progress between the PC and the equipment.
• Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned! A not allowed value has been set.
• Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The
operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action
or is not logged to the equipment yet.
• Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.

Fig.7 Main Menu commands (WEB LCT page)
Fig.8 Equipment Menu commands (WEB LCT page)
Commands
Select this command list
to display in the
contextual area
the parameters
associated to it
Name of a compressed
group of commands.
The selection of the
option expands the
list of the associated
commands
Name of a expanded
command group: in fact,
under this option there
is a list of commands
The selection of the
option closes the list
of commands

Fig.9 Contextual area (WEB LCT page)
In this bar
pointed out (1)
the name of (2)
the selected
command
The contents
of this area
changes
dynamically
according to
the command
selected
(3)
(4)
Fig.9 notes
(1) Select the Help command to display the help on-line.
(2) Select the Go to Main command to display in the contextual area the commands of the Main Menu
(pag.37).
(3) Press Refresh to force the reading of the data from equipment.
If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.
(4) Press Apply to make the set changes operative.

Generally, on the selection of the push-button, a confirmation window is displayed. Some confirma-
tion windows are timed (for example, the confirmation windows of the manual operations). When
this period (pointed out by the clock) is elapsed, if the operator has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
If the Apply push-button is not available:
• It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or the
equipment is in connected/monitor status.
• No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button be-
comes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
• Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the operation
or the change of the parameters.

EVENTS LIST AREA
The Events List area displays the list of the status and alarm signals stored in the equipment controller as
depicted in Fig.10.
By means of the items present in the area, it is possible:
• To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of alarm/status signals (pag.36).
While, by means of the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command, it is possible:
• To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by
the users to file (pag.106).
• To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller (pag.109).
For more information about the status/alarm signals, refer to pag.36.
Fig.10 Events list area (WEB LCT page)
Activation
status of
filters (2)
Information
Status/ updating
alarms (3)
signals
list (1)
Fig.10 notes
(1) To each signal a record is associated, where the following information is reported:
• <Coloured box>. Box:
• Green. Status signal.
• Light blue. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
• Yellow. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
• Orange. Alarm detected with Major severity.
• Red. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
• Grey. Alarm detected/cleared.
• Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
When the pointer passes over a signal, a window is displayed where the following information is
reported:
• Signal type:
• Status. Status signal.
• Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
• Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
• Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
• Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
• Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
• Logic group which the signal belongs to: LIM, RT, COMMON, etc.
• Date/time of the signal detection (field In:).
• Date/time of the signal clearing (field Out:).
This field is present only for the detected/cleared alarms (signals of type Cleared).

The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The format of date/time
changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.
(2) Wording:
• Filter is Off. No filter is active.
• Filter is On. At least one filter is active.
(3) The information present in the list are updated at regular intervals.
The period between an update and the successive one is pointed out by the clock.
If you want to update the information immediately without waiting for the refresh period select the
Reload command.
To verify/modify the filters applied to the list of the alarm/status signals
1. In the Events list area of the WEB LCT page (see Fig.10) if present the wording:
• Filter is Off. No filter is active for the status/alarm signals displayed in the area.
• Filter is On. At least one filter is active for the status/alarm signals.
2. To verify the status of the filters, select the Filter is... command.
A tab opens where the following filters are displayed:
• Status. Status signal.
• Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
• Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
• Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
• Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
• Cleared. Alarm detected and cleared.
Box:
• . Filter active. For example, if the Status box is active the status signals will not be present in
the list.
• . Filter inactive.
3. To modify the filters, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
4. Select .
Each time a filter is applied, not only the currently displayed records are considered, but even all the
records stored in the equipment controller.
The setting of the filters remains valid until it is not modified by the user or the WEB LCT is closed.
Alarm and status signals (more info)
The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The term status identifies instead the signals referring to any event that does not points out a malfunction
but a status change, an operation in progress or an operating indication.
The term event defines each single signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
A maximum of 400 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.

MAIN MENU
In the Main Menu of the WEB LCT page, the following commands are present:
• Equipment Properties (pag.38). It manages the properties (identifier, addresses, reference

date/time, etc.) and executes the equipment software reset.
• Port Configuration & ACL (pag.41). It manages the communication ports reserved to the local
and remote supervision of the equipment and the IP Access Control List.
• Routing Table (pag.50). It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
• Stored Routing Table (pag.54). It manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway
address stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
• Remote Element Table, (pag.57). It manages the remote equipment list.
• Performance Monitoring (pag.62). It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
• Reports & Loggers Maintenance (pag.106). It saves to file the equipment configuration, the
status/alarm signals and the operations executed by the users.
• SNTP & Wake Up Configuration (pag.110). It manages the automatic acquisition of the ref-
erence date/time of the equipment from a network element and the Wake Up trap.
• SD Memory Management (pag.115). It manages the memory card SD for the backup/restore
of the equipment configuration and software.
• Software info & Maintenance (pag.123). It manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT
software present in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the
restore of the default equipment settings.
• Backup/Restore Configuration (pag.130). It manages the backup/restore from file of the
whole equipment configuration.
• Unit List (pag.132). It manages the hardware constituting the equipment.
• Active Manual Operation (pag.134). It manages the manual operations.
• Alarm Severity Configuration (pag.136). It manages the alarm transmission and their sever-
ity level.
• View Logged User (pag.139). It manages the users connected to the equipment.
• User Manager (pag.141). It manages the list of the equipment users.
• Features Management (pag.146). It manages the functionalities enabled for the equipment.
• RMON (pag.148). It manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
For each command, the relevant description points out the user profile necessary to be able to use it. In
detail, the wording:
• Monitor. Equipment in connected/monitor status.
• Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Equipment in connected/login status
and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively profile Read only, Read and
write, Station operator or System.
Moreover, if the commands allows executing some settings or changes, for each user profile the type of
operation that can be executed is pointed out. The option Reading points out that it is possible to check
the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.

EQUIPMENT PROPERTIES
Curr. Profile Reading Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write

Reading/Writing Station Operator*, System
* The Station Operator user cannot align the reference date/time of the equipment to the date/time of the
PC.
The Equipment Properties command manages the properties and executes the equipment software re-
set.
In detail, it is possible:
• To verify the equipment properties (pag.38).
• To modify the equipment identifier (pag.39)
• To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment (pag.39).
• To execute the equipment software reset (pag.39).
• To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC (pag.40).
To verify the equipment properties
1. Select the Main Menu > Equipment Properties command.

The Equipment Properties contextual area opens, where the equipment properties are displayed (see
Fig.11).
Fig.11 Equipment Properties contextual area
Equipment
properties
(1)
Reference
date/time
of the PC (2)
Reference
date/time of the
equipment (2)
Fig.11 notes
(1) Box:
• Equipment Type. Equipment type and MIB (Management Information Base) version.
Read-only parameter.
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
If the equipment is an element of a node parameter is read-only.

• Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.
If the equipment is an element of a node parameter is read-only.
• Ethernet IP Address. IP Address of the communication port with the LAN network of the
equipment.
Read-only parameter. To change it see par. Ethernet port (pag.42).
• MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.
Read-only parameter.
• Ethernet/OSI Address Relation. IP Address of the inner port for the interfacing with the OSI
router (IP Address) and the NSAP address (Gosip) of the equipment.
Parameters (read-only) are meaningful and available only if the equipment is inserted into
an OSI network. To change it see par. IP Over OSI port (pag.45).
(2) The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
To modify the equipment identifier
If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant identifier can NOT be mod-
ified through this procedure. In order to modify it, if the equipment is element of a node:
• ALCplus2, refer to ALCplus2 Node Manager manual.
• ALplus, refer to SCT manual (ALplus Node Manager option).

The Equipment Properties contextual area opens (see Fig.11).
2. Into the Equipment ID box, type an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

The new value is pointed out into the ID field of the WEB LCT page.
To modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant IP address of the SNMP agent
can NOT be modified through this procedure. In order to modify it, if the equipment is element of a node:

2. Into the Agent IP Address box, type, for each one of the four available spaces (subdivided by a point),
a number comprised between 0 and 255.
To execute the equipment software reset
After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.


2. Press Restart.
The message Are you sure to restart the equipment? is displayed.
3. Press Ok to execute the operation.
To align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time

of the PC
The operation could cause the logout of the user.

2. Press Align. Equip. Date/Time with PC Date/Time and confirm.

The value, present into the Equip. Date/Time box, is updated with the one present into the PC Date/
Time box.

PORT CONFIGURATION & ACL

Reading/Writing Station Operator, System
The Port Configuration & ACL command manages the communication ports reserved to the local and
remote supervision of the equipment and the IP Access Control List.
• To verify/modify the characteristics of the communication ports reserved to the local and remote
supervision of the equipment (pag.41).
• To execute the equipment software reset (pag.47).
• To verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List (pag.47)
• To add/remove a rule from the IP Access Control List (pag.48)
• To enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List (pag.48)
For more information about the IP Access Control List go to pag.49.
To verify/modify the parameters of the communication ports reserved to the

local and remote supervision of the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Port Configuration & ACL command.
The Port Configuration & ACL contextual area opens.
The tabs Ethernet, LCT PPP, Radio 1A, 2Mb/s EOC and IP Over OSI/NSap represent the communication
ports of the equipment.
To verify the parameters relevant to a port, bring at front the specific tab.
Fig.12 shows an example.
2. To modify the parameters of the:
• Ethernet port, see pag.42
• LCT PPP port, see pag.43
• Radio 1A port, see pag.44
• 2Mb/s EOC port, see pag.45
• IP Over OSI port, see pag.45
4. Press Store and confirm.
5. Press Restart and confirm.

Fig.12 Supervision ports (Port Configuration & ACL contextual area)
Each tab
(except ACL)
represents
a different
equipment
port (1)
(2)
Fig.12 notes
(1) For the ALCplus2 equipment are available the following tabs:
• Ethernet. Communication port with the LAN network.
• LCT PPP. Port for the connection to the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program
or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
• Radio 1A. 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.
• 2Mb/s EOC. Communication port represented by the 2Mb EOC signal.
• IP Over OSI. Inner port for the interfacing with the OSI router.
Depending on the type of protocol managed by the selected equipment (IP/OSI), only the tabs rel-
evant to the communication ports managed by this protocol will be available.
(2) Push-button:
• Restart. It executes the software reset of the equipment.
• Store. It stores the values into the equipment controller.
• Retrieve. It reads again the values set into the equipment controller.
Ethernet port
Parameter/area:
• IP Address. IP address, of the communication port with the LAN network.

To change the parameter, type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a
number comprised between 0 and 255. The typed number has to be compatible with the setting of
the relevant IP NetMask field.
If the selected equipment is configured as element of a node, the relevant IP address of the LAN
port can NOT be modified through this procedure. In order to modify it, if the equipment is element
of a node:
• IP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.

number comprised between 0 and 255.

• MNGT/x Alarm Sev. Enabling/severity status of the alarm of missing/fault of the connection cable
(MNGT/x Cable Fail) relevant to the specific LAN port management:
• Disable. Disabled alarm.
• Status. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level: status signal.
• Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. Enabled alarm - Associated severity level respectively:
Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the option from the list.
• MNGT/x Enable. Enabling status of the specific LAN port management:

• mdi. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network
Interface Card modality).
• mdi-x. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch mo-
dality).
• auto. LAN management enable; the inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic
modality.
• disable. LAN management disable.
• In band management. Activation status of the in band supervision (the connection to the super-
vision is achieved by means of the traffic Lan tributaries and/or the internal Ethernet port).
In detail, if the LAN x/Port A box:
• . The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is not active.
• . The in band supervision on the specific Ethernet port is active.
To modify the parameter, activate/deactivate the specific boxes.
A VLan for this management MUST be reserved when the in band supervision is active (at least one
LAN x and/or Port A box active).
In detail, if the value present in the VLan ID box is:
• 0. No VLan is reserved for the in band supervision.
• Value different from 0. For the in band supervision, the VLan with the specific ID is reserved.
To modify the parameter, set a value comprised between 0 and 4095.
If the message Warning! VLAN ID already defined in “Virtual Lan list” or Mac Learning disable is
displayed when the user confirms the parameters (selection of button Apply), this means that at
least one of the following condition is present:
• The identifier set for the in-band supervision corresponds to that already used by a traffic
VLAN (see Fig.63). Change the value in the box VLan ID.
• The Ethernet port selected for the in-band supervision has not the MAC Address automatic
learning enabled in the MAC Address Table. For this port, set the parameter MAC Learning
to the value Enable (see Fig.64).
If the equipment belongs to a ALCplus2 node and is connected to other node elements through
Ethernet nodal Bus, the in-band supervision is not forwarded to the management LAN ports (MNGT/
1 and MNGT/2).
The x value points out the number of the Ethernet LAN port.
LCT PPP port
Parameter/push-button/area:
• IP PPP Address. IP/PPP address of the port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/
LMT management program or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
the relevant IP PPP NetMask field.
• IP PPP NetMask. Mask for the network address definition.

• IP Unnumbered. The selection of this push-button allows using the address/mask of the Ethernet
port (if the equipment is managed by IP protocol) or IP Over OSI (if the equipment is managed by
OSI protocol) as IP PPP Address and IP NetMask of the considered port. As consequence, the IP/PPP
address is reset while the network mask displays the acquired value, which can be modified by the
user.
• PC IP Address. IP address of the remote equipment:
• Port IP Address + 1. The IP address of the considered port increased by 1 is assigned to the
remote equipment.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 is assigned to the port, the address
10.10.10.9 will be automatically assigned to the remote equipment.
• Eth Broadcast Ip Address - 1 or IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1. The last IP address valid
for the IP subnetwork connected to the considered port is assigned to the remote equipment.
For example, if the IP PPP Address 10.10.10.8 with mask 255.255.255.0 is assigned to the
port, the address 10.10.10.254 will be automatically assigned to the remote equipment.
It is suggested to use this setting if you wish to use only one IP address, within the IP sub-
network, for the connection to the PC.
If the equipment is managed with protocol:
• IP, the value Eth Broadcast Ip Address -1 is present.
• OSI, the value IP Over OSI Broadcast Address - 1 is present.
• xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. The address set by the user in the fields xxx is assigned to the remote
equipment.
To modify the parameter, select the wished option and, only for the last option, type the wished IP.
The PPP operating mode is automatic: the port self-configures in Server mode and, when the connection
is set up, assigns the IP address to the remote equipment (see parameter PC IP Address).
Radio 1A port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the IP protocol and if the in band supervision is
disable (see Ethernet port - pag.42) and the radio is equipped (see option Radio A - Fig.44).
Parameter/push-button:
• IP Address. IP/PPP address of the 64Kbit/s communication channel of the EOC radio frame.

user.
• PPP Mode. Operating mode:

• Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and keeps
active the connection to the remote equipment.
• Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote equipment sets up the connection.
• Bridge. Bridge connection (same IP network) between local and remote element.
To change the parameter selects the wished option.

2Mb/s EOC port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the IP protocol.
Parameter/push-button/area:
• IP Address. IP/PPP address of the communication port represented by the 2Mb EOC signal.

user.
• PPP Mode. PPP operating mode:

• Client. PPP operation Client: the port has an active role in the connection, sets up and keeps
active the connection to the remote equipment.
• Server. PPP operation Server: the port has a passive role in the connection, waits for the
remote equipment sets up the connection.
• Signal input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
• Not used. No interface.
• E1. One or more 16Kbit channels of a timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
To change the parameter select the wished option.
• EOC. Setting of the 2Mb tributary/timeslot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal.
In detail, parameter:
• 2Mb Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used points out that the
system does not use any tributary.
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the
T12 synchronism (see Fig.53).
• Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.
To change the parameter, type the number of the timeslot (value between 1 and 31).
• 16 Kbit PPP Map. Used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of white
color are not used.
To change the parameter, select the wished boxes. At each selection, the box change its sta-
tus, it switches from active (green color) to deactivated (white color) and vice-versa.
The EOC area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area.
IP Over OSI port
Port available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.
IP Over OSI tab
Parameter/area:
• IP Address. IP address of the inner port of the equipment, for the interfacing with the OSI router.
the relevant IP NetMask field.

• IP NetMask. Mask for the inner network address definition.
• EOC Radio Side 1A. Usage modality of the Radio channel:

• Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.
• User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.
• Bridge. The radio channel is used in Bridge Mode.
To change the parameter selects the box and then the value from the list.
• Signal input. Interface type to be used for the port under examination:
• Not used. No interface.
• E1. One or more 16Kbit channels of a timeslot relevant to A or B tributary (2Mbit/s).
• EOC. Setting of the 2Mb tributary/timeslot/16Kbit used for the connection with the remote terminal.
In detail, parameter:
• 2Mbit/s Selector. Used tributary (Trib A or Trib B). The wording No 2Mb Used points out that
the system does not use any tributary.
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the
T12 synchronism (see Fig.53).
• Slot Selector. Number of the used timeslot.
• 16 Kbit PPP Map. Used 16Kbit (boxes with green color). The 16Kbit with the boxes of grey
color are not used.
To change the parameter, select the wished boxes. At each selection, the box change its status, it
switches from active (green color) to deactivated (grey color) and vice-versa.
The EOC area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal input area.
• EOC 2Mbit Side. Usage modality of the EOC E1 channel:
• Network. The LAP D protocol is configured as Network side.
• User. The LAP D protocol is configured as User side.
The EOC 2Mbit Side area is available only if it has been selected the E1 value into the Signal
input area.
NSap tab
Area:
• Gosip Address. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.

To change the parameter:
• System ID, type the wished value into the relevant boxes.
Press Set as MAC to set as physical address the System ID value.
• AFI, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.
• Domain, type the values of the bytes that represent the Domain.
• Area, type the values of the bytes that represent the area.
• IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel, type into the relevant boxes the value of the corresponding
byte/s.
• Routing. Routing level of the OSI router:

• L1. Intra Domain (inside the Domain/area)
• L2. Extra Domain (outside the Domain/area).

The Port Configuration & ACL contextual area opens (see Fig.12).
2. Press Restart.
The message Are you sure to restart? is displayed.
3. Press Ok to execute the operation.
To verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List
2. Select the ACL tab.
The tab displays the rules used by the IP Access Control List (see Fig.13).
Fig.13 ACL tab (Port Configuration & ACL contextual area)
Use status
of the
IP Access
Control List
(1)
Rules used
by the
IP Access
Control List
(2)
(3)
Fig.13 notes
(1) Option:
• Enable. The use of the IP Access Control List is enabled: the access to the equipment by oth-
er elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is allowed only if the IP address of the element matches
the rules pointed out in the list.
• Disable. The use of the IP Access Control List is disabled: the access to the equipment by
other elements (equipment, PC, etc.) is not defined by the rules pointed out in the list.
(2) Each line identifies a rule.

For each rule, is pointed out in the column:
• Name. Name of the rule.
• IP Address. IP subnetwork or single IP network which the rule refers to.
• Mask. Netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork or to the IP address which the rule refers to.
• Permission. Usage conditions of the rule:

• allow. The IP subnetwork/IP address is allowed accessing the equipment.
• deny. The IP subnetwork/IP address is not allowed accessing the equipment.
The rules in the list are sorted in alphanumeric order with respect to their name (column Name).
(3) Push-button:
• Add. It adds a rule to the list.
• Remove. It deletes a rule from the list.
To add/remove a rule from the IP Access Control List
2. Select the ACL tab (see Fig.13).
3. To add a rule:
a. Press Add.
The Insert parameters window opens.
b. In the Name box set the name of the rule.

In the box, the name ACL-<progressive numeric identifier> is suggested. This name can be
changed as one wishes.
c. Set, in the box Ip, the IP subnetwork or the single IP address which the rule refers to.
d. Set, in the box Mask, the netmask relevant to the IP subnetwork/IP address which the rule refers
to (if a single IP is set, the mask is 255.255.255.255).
e. Set the usage condition of the rule, selecting:

• deny, if the IP subnetwork/IP address must be forbidden accessing the equipment.
• allow, if the IP subnetwork/IP address must be allowed accessing the equipment.
f. If you wish the equipment allows or denies the access to any IP address, activate the check-box
Any. In detail, if you activates the check-box Any with selected the option:
• deny, the equipment will refuse packets sent by any IP address (with the exception point-
ed out at pag.49)in par. IP Access Control List (more info).
• allow, the equipment will accept packets sent by any IP address.
Selecting the check-box Any is equivalent to setting IP address to 0.0.0.0 and netmask to
0.0.0.0.
g. Press Apply and confirm.

The rule is inserted in the list in alphanumerical order with respect to the name (column Name).
To delete a rule:
a. Select the row relevant to the rule you wish to delete from the list.
Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.
b. Press Remove and confirm.

The system removes the rule(s) from the list.
To enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List
2. Select the ACL tab (see Fig.13).
3. Select the option:

• Enable, to enable the use of the IP Access Control List.
• Disable, to disable the use of the IP Access Control List.
IP Access Control List (more info)
The IP Access Control List is a mechanism used to control and filter the source IP addresses which are al-
lowed accessing to an equipment.
This mechanism consists in a list of rules (Access Control Entry) which determine if an IP subnetwork or a
single IP address is allowed accessing to the selecting equipment.
Every rules are composed by a descriptive part and a decision-making part. The descriptive part of the rule
is represented by the IP address (or by a set of IP addresses) source of the packet. The decision-making
part is the action to execute: making the packet passes (allow) or refusing it (deny).
For an ALCplus2 equipment, the analysis of the packet consists in considering the following conditions:
1. The rules present in ACL are considered only if the use of ACL itself is enabled (Fig.13 - value Enable
active).
2. The control is applied only to the packets destined to the local equipment.
3. The access to the equipment is always allowed by the port LCT PPP (see pag.43)
4. The access is always allowed if the IP address coincides with that of an user who has executed a Login
procedure. The user is allowed modifying ACL without involving the loss of the connection with the
equipment.
5. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is not contained in any deny rule.
6. The access is allowed only if the source IP address of the packet is contained in, at least, one any rule.

ROUTING TABLE

The Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address current-
ly used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway).
• To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the selected equipment
(Running Routing Table and Default Gateway) (pag.50)
• To add an element to the Routing Table (pag.51)
• To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table (pag.51)
• To set/modify the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.52)
• To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway (pag.52)
For more information about the Routing Table and the Default Gateway go to pag.52.
To verify the Routing Table and the Default Gateway currently used by the
selected equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default Gateway)
1. Select the Main Menu > Routing Table command.

The Routing Table contextual area opens, where the setting of the static Routing Table and the address
of the Default Gateway currently used by the equipment (Running Routing Table and Running Default
Gateway) are displayed (see Fig.14).
Fig.14 Routing Table contextual area
Modality of
connection
(direct or
indirect) between
Elements of the specific port
routing table (Interface) and
destination IP
network (2)
IP address
of the IP
network or of Supervision port
the destination of the local
element equipment which
the Gateway
equipment is
IP NetMask
connected to (1)
of the IP
network or of
the destination
element IP address of
the equipment
that acts as
IP address of Gateway
the equipment
that acts as
Defaul Gateway
Fig.14 notes
(1) Wording:
• Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
• Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.

• Lct. Port for the connection with the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program
or the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
• Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
• 2Mb/s EOC. 2Mb EOC communication port.
• <no wording>. Inner port (internal loopback).
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI),
The current setting of the parameters relevant to each single port can be verified selecting the Main
Menu > Port Configuration & ACL (pag.41) command.
(2) Wording:
• Local. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment interface. The
IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment software.
• NetMgmt. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment in-
terfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the user (static el-
ement).
• Ospf. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment interfac-
es. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the OSPF protocol (dy-
namic element).
• Other. All the other situations that are not comprised into one of the previous cases (this
label generally does not shown; it has been anticipated for future uses).
To add an element to the Routing Table

The Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.14).
2. Select the Add tab.

The Add New Route Item tab opens.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
For each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), insert a number comprised between
0 and 255.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network
0 and 255.
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
0 and 255.
6. Press Add and confirm.
The new element is inserted into the table. The system records the new element into the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table).
To remove one or more elements from the Routing Table

2. Select the element of the Routing Table.
Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.
3. Select the Remove tab.

The Remove Item tab opens.
4. Press Remove Selected Item(s) and confirm.

The system deletes the element into the currently used Routing Table (Running Routing Table) and into
the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway

2. Select the Default Gateway tab.

The Default Gateway tab opens.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
0 and 255.
The Interface box automatically points out the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.

The system inserts the new Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
The insertion of a new IP address used as Default Gateway can fail if the new IP address does not belong
to an IP network directly connected to the equipment interface.
To delete the IP Address used as Default Gateway

3. Press Remove and confirm.

The system deletes the Default Gateway IP address into the currently used Routing Table (Running
Routing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing Table).
Routing Table and Default Gateway (more info)
When all the equipment belong to the same IP network, it is not necessary to define the Routing Table
and the address of the gateway equipment because the network is able to manage its own inner traffic.
The setting of these parameters is necessary when the equipment belong to different networks, then, the
traffic has to be routed again from a network to the other one.
Routing Table
The function of the Routing Table is the one to check the routing of the supervisory messages exchanged
among the elements (PCs, equipment, etc.), that use the TCP/IP protocol, from one network to the other
one.

Routing Table (Running)
Each equipment at its initialisation (start-up operation) automatically sets the elements of the Routing Ta-
ble that identify the supervisory ports of the equipment (communication ports provided with the equipment
for the input/output of the supervisory signal).
These elements are set according to the IP addresses assigned to each port.
If the user changes the IP address of a supervisory port, the system does not dynamically change it into
the equipment Routing Table. It is necessary to execute a reset of the equipment, because the elements
of the Routing Table are set at the equipment start-up.
If it is necessary, the WEB LCT user can add to these elements (automatically set) some other ones.
The system records each new element (manually set) into the currently used Routing Table (Running Rout-
ing Table) and into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table); the system
does not record the elements (automatically set) into the backup memory of the controller because they
are newly set at every equipment start-up.
The Running Routing Table is a static one. The system updates such a table, through the elements present
into the Stored Routing Table, at every equipment start-up.
Stored Routing Table
The equipment does not currently use the Stored Routing Table. This table becomes operative on the
equipment restart. In fact, in this case, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into
the Routing Table used by the equipment (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the el-
ements whose router equipment (Hop) is associated to an active interface.
The setting of the Stored Routing Table id necessary, for instance, when the user wants to change an ad-
dress of the equipment supervisory ports. In such a case, it is not possible to change the currently used
Routing Table (Running Routing Table). The changes have to be inserted into the Stored Routing Table. At
the next equipment start-up, the system inserts the elements of the Stored Routing Table into the Routing
Table used by the equipment.
Default Gateway
The system forwards to the equipment with the Default Gateway function the data that have a receiver
unreachable through the routes present into the Routing Table.

STORED ROUTING TABLE
Curr. Profile System
The Stored Routing Table command manages the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address
stored in the equipment (Stored Routing Table and Stored Default Gateway).
• To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present into the backup
memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table and Default Gateway) (pag.54).
• To add elements to the Stored Routing Table (pag.55).
• To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table (pag.56).
• To set or to change the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table
(pag.56).
• To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing Table (pag.56).
For more information about the Routing Table and the Default Gateway go to pag.52.
To verify the static Routing Table and the Default Gateway address present
into the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing Table
and Stored Default Gateway)
1. Select the Main Menu > Stored Routing Table command.

The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens, where the setting of the static Routing Table and the
Default Gateway address present in the backup memory of the equipment controller (Stored Routing
Table and Stored Default Gateway) are displayed (see Fig.15).
Fig.15 Stored Routing Table contextual area
Elements of the
routing table
Supervision
port of the
IP address
local equipment
of the IP
which the
network or of
Gateway equipment
the destination
is connected to (1)
element
IP NetMask IP address
of the IP of the equipment
network or of acting as Gateway
the destination
element
IP address of
the equipment
that acts as
Defaul Gateway
(2)

Fig.15 notes
(1) Wording:
• Lan. Communication port with the LAN network.
• Lan/OSI. Communication port that interfaces itself with the router OSI.
• Lct. Port for the connection to the PC where resides the SCT/LMT management program or
the browser for the start of WEB LCT.
• Radio 1A. Communication port represented by the radio signal.
• 2Mb/s EOC. 2Mb EOC communication port.
The available values change according to the protocol managed by the equipment (IP/OSI),
The current setting of the parameters relevant to each single port can be verified selecting the Main
Menu > Port Configuration & ACL (pag.41) command.
(2) Push-button:
• Retrieve. It reads again the data from the backup memory and loads them into the equip-
ment memory.
• Save. It saves the elements of the table into the backup memory of the equipment.
• Refresh. It reads again the data from the memory of the equipment after a Retrieve com-
mand.
For instance, if the user wants updating the stored Routing Table displaying the elements
manually added by the user into the running Routing Table, he has to press Retrieve and
later the Refresh one.
To add an element into the Stored Routing Table

The Stored Routing Table contextual area opens (see Fig.15).
The Add New Route Item tab opens.
3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.
0 and 255.
4. Into the NetMask box, type the mask for the destination IP network
0 and 255.
5. Into the Hop box, type the IP Address of the equipment acting as Gateway for the destination network.
0 and 255.
6. Into the Interface box, set the supervisory port of the local equipment which the Gateway equipment
is connected to.
Select the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the wished option from the list (see Fig.15).
Select the wording None selected, when the system has automatically to insert the parameter according
to the IP address of the router.

The system inserts the new element into the table.
8. Press Save and confirm.

The system saves the new element into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the new element ONLY into the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Rout-
ing Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will insert this new element also in the current
routing table (Running Routing Table). What just said is valid only for the elements whose equipment
(Hop) is associated to an active interface.

To remove one or more elements from the Stored Routing Table

2. Select the element of the Stored Routing Table.

Items automatically inserted by the controller (items with Local protocol) cannot be deleted.


The system removes the element from the backup memory of the equipment.
The system deletes the element ONLY from the backup memory of the equipment (Stored Routing
Table). At the next equipment start-up, the system will delete such an element also into the current
Routing Table (Running Routing Table).
To set/modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Rout-
ing Table


3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.
0 and 255.
The Interface box automatically points out the supervision port which the IP address of the Gateway
equipment corresponds to.

The system saves the new IP address of Default Gateway into the backup memory of the equipment.
The system records the IP address of Default Gateway ONLY into the backup memory of the equip-
ment (Stored Routing Table). The equipment will display such an IP address only at the next restart
procedure of the equipment itself and the system will insert it also into the current Routing Table (Run-
ning Routing Table).
To delete the IP address used as Default Gateway into the Stored Routing
Table


The system removes the IP address of Default Gateway from the backup memory of the equipment.

REMOTE ELEMENT TABLE

The Remote Element Table command manages the remote equipment list.
• To verify the remote equipment list (pag.57).
• To add (pag.58), to rename (pag.58) and to remove (pag.59) a station.
• To add (pag.59) and to remove (pag.60) an equipment inside the list.
• To reset the remote equipment list (pag.60)
For more information about the remote equipment list (Remote Element Table) go to pag.60.
To verify the remote equipment list
1. Select the Main Menu > Remote Element Table command.

The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens, where the remote equipment list is displayed
(see Fig.16).
Fig.16 Remote Element Manager contextual area
Record that
List of the represents
equipment the station (1)
subdivided
according to
the belonging Record that
station represents the
equipment (2)
Equipment
name
IP address
(Agent SNMP)
Equipment
type (3)
Fig.16 notes
(1) For each station, the name of the station is displayed after the suffix Station:
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the remote equipment list.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the remote
equipment list.
To expand a station and see the list of the associated equipment, it is sufficient to select the record
of the station.

(2) The name of the equipment in the remote equipment list is automatically assigned by the applica-
tion during the creation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP address.
(3) Wording:
• Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that consti-
tutes the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local
equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
• Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. This op-
tion can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance
the coupling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into
an OSI network.
• Node X. Equipment belonging to the ALCplus2 or ALplus local node.
With ALCplus2 local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment
(ALCplus2) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus, where the
considered equipment is an element. In this case the value X can correspond to a number
between 1 and 8 and points out the subset.
With ALplus local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment (ALplus-
Nodal Matrix/ALCplus2 with IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion) interconnected
by TDM nodal bus, where the considered equipment is an element. In this case the value X
can correspond to A, B or C and points out the subset.
To add a station to the list
It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.

The Remote Element Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.16).
2. Press Add (Station Menu).

The Enter new station name window opens.
3. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, the use of
a number or of a space as first character is not allowed.
4. Press Ok.
The application displays the new station into the Remote Element Manager contextual area, at the end
of the list relevant to the already existing stations.

An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.
To rename a station of the list

2. Select the station to be renamed.
3. Press Rename (Station Menu).

The Rename Station window opens.
4. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 char-
acters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, the use of
a number or of a space as first character is not allowed.
5. Press Ok.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote Element Manager contextual area.
To remove a station of the list
The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all the equipment coupled with such a station.

2. Select the station to be removed.
3. Press Remove (Station Menu).

The application removes the station from the Remote Element Manager contextual area.
To add an equipment to the list
It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.

An equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.

2. Select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.

If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the
last selected station.
3. Press Add (Equipment Menu).
The Add New Element window opens.
4. Into the text box, type the IP address of the equipment.

The program does not create two equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even if in dif-
ferent stations).
5. Only if the equipment is inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP (Gosip) address executing the fol-
lowing procedure:
a. Into the Sys.ID field (Gosip Address area), type the wished value.
b. To check or to change the setting of the default part of the address, press Set.
The Gosip Address area is expanded.
c. To change the parameter:

• AFI, choose the arrow and select the desired value from the list.
• IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel, type into the relevant boxes the value of the corre-
sponding byte/s.

d. Press Set.
6. Select the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:

• Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equip-
ment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
• Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application. This option
can be used to insert into the remote equipment list some information as for instance the cou-
pling between the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one of an equipment inserted into an OSI
network.
7. Press OK.
In the Remote Element Table contextual area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment
<progressive number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.
To remove an equipment from the list

2. Select the equipment to be removed.
3. Press Remove (Equipment Menu).

The application removes the station from the Remote Element Manager contextual area.
To reset the remote equipment list

2. Press Clear List.

The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote Element Man-
ager contextual area.
Remote equipment list (more info)
Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.
With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.
For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.
Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.
The remote equipment list has a specific function according to the management program in use.

WEB LCT application
When the user requires the opening from browser of the WEB LCT application of an equipment (local equip-
ment), at the opening, besides the WEB LCT page of this equipment, the system automatically opens even
the WEB LCT page of the equipment, of Remote Link type, present in the remote equipment list of the local
equipment.
If the remote equipment does not answer to the connection request, the connection command will be sent
cyclically until when:
• The WEB LCT page of the local equipment is closed.
• The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
For a correct display of the equipment in the WEB LCT page, it is NECESSARY to insert in the remote
equipment list of the local equipment:
• The local equipment with type Managed by SCT.
• The remote equipment with type Remote Link.
SCT/LMT program
When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such an equipment, the SCT/LMT program reads its remote equipment list and auto-
matically forwards the connection command to all the equipment present into the list.
In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the SCT/LMT graphical interface, all
the stations that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station),
it displays the functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the func-
tional status of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the
connection request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.
The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:
• It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.
• The user disables the equipment.
• The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.
More detailed information concerning the SCT/LMT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

PERFORMANCE MONITORING

The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.

• To verify the status of the PM measures (pag.67).

• To activate a PM measure (pag.68).
• To activate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously (pag.68).
• To deactivate a PM measure (pag.68).
• To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously (pag.69).
• To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.69).
• To reset the values of the control parameters,
to execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms,
to set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms
for the measure:
• G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.70)
• G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.75)
• G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.79)
• G828 E1 Line Side (pag.83)
• G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.87)
• G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.89)
• ACM Radio A (pag.93)
• RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.99)
• TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.102)
For more information about the:

• PM measures available for the ALCplus2 equipment go to pag.63
• Quality parameters description go to pag.64
• PM measures in general go to pag.105

Measures available for the ALCplus2 equipment
The measures available for the ALCplus2 equipment are the following.
• G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.70). This measure checks the quality of the received
signal at line side (STM-1 stream).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS qual-
ity parameters.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec.
he SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
• G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> (pag.75). This measure checks the quality of the re-
ceived signal at line side (STM-1 stream).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following quality parame-
ters:
• Byte B2 -> BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP.
• Byte M1 -> BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, SEP FE.
• Byte B2 e M1 -> UASBIDI.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented
according to G.829 ITU-T Rec.
The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
• G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.79). This measure checks the quality of the received signal at
radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters.
The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
• G828 E1 Line Side (pag.83). This measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of
the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at line side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES,
UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec.
The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
• G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.87). This measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of
the IDU board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters. The BBE, ES, SES,
UAS parameters are implemented according to G.826 ITU-T Rec.
The SEP parameter is implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
• G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> (pag.89). This measure checks
the quality of the received VC12 into the STM-1 stream.
The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, SEP, SEP FE,
BBE, BBE FE quality parameters.
• ACM Radio A (pag.93). This measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters (UpShift and
DownShift).
• RxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.99). This measure checks the power of the signal at recep-
tion.
The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN
301 129 of the ETSI.
• TxPwr Radio <radio branch> (pag.102). This measure checks the power of the signal at trans-
mission.
The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN
301 129 of the ETSI.

Quality parameters description (PM measures)
G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure
The quality parameters description of the G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure (pag.70) is the
following:
• BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one er-
rored bit not belonging to SES.
• ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
• SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated an alarm
equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Loss of Signal Alarm, Loss of Frame
Alarm, B2 Excessive Ber Alarm, etc.).
• SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
• UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted
into the unavailability period. The Q and P values can be configured.
• OOFS (Out of Frame Seconds). The second that do not belong to UAS but with the Out OF Frame
Alarm activated.
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure
The quality parameters description of the G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure (pag.75) is
the following:
• BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
• ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
• SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
• SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
• UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted
• UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) una-
vailability seconds.

G828 Radio <radio branch>, G828 E1 Line Side and G828 E1 Radio Side measures
The quality parameters description of the G828 Radio <radio branch> (pag.79), G828 E1 Line Side
(pag.83) and G828 E1 Radio Side (pag.87) measure is the following:
G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure
The quality parameters description of the G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
measure (pag.89) is the following:
• BBE FE (Background Block Error Far End). Number of remote blocks, where it has been detected
at least one errored bit, not belonging to SES.
• ES FE (Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been one or more errored remote
blocks.
• SES FE (Severely Errored Second Far End). The second when there have been a percentage of
errored blocks > N% (the N value can be configured) or the second when it has been activated
an alarm equivalent to the interruption of the signal at reception (Ms Rdi Alarm).
• SEP FE (Severely Errored Period Far End). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES
FE comprised between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES FE.
• UAS FE (UnAvailable Seconds Far End). Number of remote unavailability seconds.
The counting of the seconds starts after P consecutive seconds with SES FE presence and it ends
at the beginning of a period of Q consecutive seconds without SES FE. The P seconds are counted
• UASBIDI (UnAvailable Seconds Bidirectional). Number of local (UAS) or remote (UAS FE) una-
vailability seconds.
ACM Radio A measure
The quality parameters description of the ACM Radio A measure (pag.93) is the following:
• 4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode (1).

• 4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter chang-
es according to the active increase mode (1).
• 8PSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 8PSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes
according to the active increase mode (1).
• 16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
• DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
• UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
(1) The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:
• Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
• Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modu-
lation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current mod-
ulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
• Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
• Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.
RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The quality parameters description of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure (pag.99) is the following:
• TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
• TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the ob-
servation period (15 min or 24 hours).
• Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
• Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.
TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The quality parameters description of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure (pag.102) is the following:
• TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
• TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
• Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)
• Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.

To verify the status of the PM measures
1. Select the Main Menu > Performance Monitoring command.

The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens, where the status of the PM measures is displayed
(see Fig.17).
The ALCplus2 equipment support the following measures:
Fig.17 Performance Monitoring contextual area
Measure
List of status (2)
the PM
measures
available
(1)
Fig.17 notes
(1) The measures are subdivided in groups.

Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded.
The measures of only one group at a time can be displayed.
The group and the relevant measures available for the ALCplus2 equipment are the following:
• G828 group, measure:
• G828 Radio <radio branch>, checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
• G828 E1 Line Side, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board
E1 tributary (A or B) at line side.
• G828 E1 Radio Side, checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU
board E1 tributary (A or B) at radio side.
• RxPwr group, measure:
• RxPwr Radio <radio branch>, checks the power of the signal at reception.

• TxPwr group, measure:
• TxPwr Radio <radio branch>, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
• ACM group, measure:
• ACM Radio A, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
• G829 RstB1 group, measure:
• G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>, checks the quality of the received signal at line
side (STM-1 stream).
• G829 MstB2M1 group, measure:
• G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number>, checks the quality of the received signal at
line side (STM-1 stream).
• G828 Vc12 group, measure:
• G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>, checks the quality of
the received VC12 into the STM-1 stream.
(2) Wording:
• Stopped. The measure is not on progress.
• Running. The measure is on progress.
To activate a PM measure

The Performance Monitoring contextual area opens (see Fig.17).
2. Select the group that contains the measure.

• Press Start at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated and confirm.
The measure is started-up and its status switches from Stopped to Running.
• Press Show at the side of the measure in Stopped status to be activated.

The Performance... window opens.
Press Start and confirm.
The measure is started-up.
To activate all PM measures in a group contemporaneously

2. Select the group.
3. Press Start Current and confirm.

The not active measures are started and their status passes from Stopped to Running.
To deactivate a PM measure


• Press Stop at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated and confirm.
The measure is stopped and its status switches from Running to Stopped.
• Press Show at the side of the measure in Running status to be deactivated.

The Performances window opens.
Press Stop and confirm.
The measure is stopped.
To deactivate all PM measure in a group contemporaneously

2. Select the group.
3. Press Stop Current and confirm.

The active measures are stopped and their status passes from Running to Stopped.
To display the results of a measure and the status of the threshold exceeding
alarms

3. Press Show at the side of the wished measure.

The Performance <measure name> window opens, where the results of the measures and the status
of the alarms relevant to the exceeding of the threshold limits are displayed.
The commands present into window allows executing the following operations:
• To reset the values of the control parameters.
• To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms.
• To activate/deactivate the measure.
• To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the
alarms.
The description of the Performance... window, of the control parameters and of the procedures to execute
the above mentioned operations are contained in the paragraph relevant to each specific measure. In
detail:

G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure
Measure available and meaningful only when the management of STM-1 stream(s) is active (see
Fig.44).
The G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line side
(STM-1 stream).
The check consists of measuring, by means of the B1 byte, the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS quality
parameters (see pag.64).
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS parameters are implemented according to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP parameter is
implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
In the Performance Monitoring contextual area (see Fig.17) the selection of the Show push-button, at the
side of the measure, opens the Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window (see Fig.18).
With the commands present into the window, it is possible:
• To reset the values of the records (daily and primary) (pag.72).
• To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms (pag.72).
• To activate/deactivate the measure (pag.72).
• To change the type of the displayed control parameters (pag.72).
• To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms
(pag.73).
Fig.18 Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window
Name of the Commands The values present into each column point out the result
PM measure bar (1) of the measure relevant to the control parameters (2)
Alarms Control Status of the

status (5) parameters (3) records (4)

Fig.18 notes
(1) Command:
• Refresh. It updates the data.
• Clear Counters. It resets the values contained into the records (daily or primary).
• Clear Alarms. It executes the reset of the alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding.
• Stop/Start. The commands are displayed one in alternative to the other: the first stops the
measure, the second one reactivates it.
• Chart View. Command not available for the current version of WEB LCT.
• Commons. It sets the intervention thresholds of the alarms relevant to the parameters.
Label:
• Seconds. Into the table there are the parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
• Blocks. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the blocks as measuring unit.
(2) Each column represents a daily or primary record. In detail, the column:
• Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).
• Last Day. Preceding daily record.
• Curr. 15m. Current primary record (15 minutes).
• 15m... 4h. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).
The Type column, points out the parameters corresponding to the values present into each column.
What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out the
status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, OOFS (see pag.64).
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the control parameters. Such
results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or blocks.
(4) Wording:
• Meaningless. The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not affected by
errors.
• Meaningful. The record has been completely acquired and the measured control parameters
have not exceeded their threshold value.
• Incomplete. The record has not been completely acquired during the corresponding obser-
vation period.
The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also
when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily
records are acquired at 23.59 of each day.
• Lost. The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance because
the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have for-
warded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.
• Restarted. The record has been lost after a reset of the NE.
When the NE has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a certain
measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this status.
• ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under exam-
ination, the measure was not activated.
(5) Each box represents an alarm. Box:

• 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into
one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
• 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter into
one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
• UAS. Unavailability alarm.
The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.

To reset the values of the records (daily and primary)


The Performance <measure name> window opens.
4. Select the Clear Counters command and confirm.

The values displayed into table are reset.
To execute the reset of the threshold exceeding alarms
The operation affects all the actually active alarms with the exception of the UAS.


4. Select the Clear Alarms command and confirm.

All the active alarm status boxes are deactivated, except for the unavailability alarms.
To activate a measure


4. Select the Start command and confirm.
The measure is started-up.
To deactivate a measure


4. Select the Stop command and confirm.

The measure is stopped.
To change the type of the displayed control parameters (G828..., G829...)


3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828... or G829... measure.

4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the box and select from the list:
• Seconds, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: ES, etc.
• Blocks, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the blocks: BBE.
To set the thresholds of the control parameters and the intervention thresholds of the alarms
(G829 RstB1 STM-1)

2. Select the G829 RstB1 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure.
The Performance G829 RstB1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window opens.
4. Select the Commons command.

The Commons window opens, where a list of options is present on the left side. The selection of each
single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant parameters:
• General. Threshold levels of the UAS and SES parameters:
• N Ses Set UAS (P). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with
SES - over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 10 sec (default 10).
• N Ses Reset UAS (Q). Threshold - expressed by the number of consecutive seconds with-
out SES - over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
• N BBE Set Ses. Threshold - expressed by the percentage of the errored blocks - over
which it is declared a SES.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 100% (default 30%).
• 15M Es. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
• Severity. Alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• 15M Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 900 (default 0). The value
0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
To reset the value press Reset and confirm.
• 24H Es. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es alarm:
• 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours,
when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
To change the parameter set a value comprised between 1 and 86400 (default 0). The
value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
• 15M Ses. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses alarm:
• 15M Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Ses. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses alarm:

• 24H Ses Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when SES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M Sep. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep alarm:
• 15M Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Sep. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep alarm:
• 24H Sep Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when SEP has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• UAS. Severity of the UAS alarm: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
Press Refresh to restore the values set at the opening of the window.

G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure
Fig.44).
The G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure checks the quality of the received signal at line
side (STM-1 stream). The check consists of measuring, by means of the B2 and M1 bytes, the following
quality parameters (for the description see pag.64):
• Byte B2 -> BBE, ES, SES, UAS, SEP.
• Byte M1 -> BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, SEP FE.
• Byte B2 and M1 -> UASBIDI.
The BBE, ES, SES, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI parameters are implemented according
to G.829 ITU-T Rec. The SEP, SEP FE parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.
side of the measure, opens the Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window (see Fig.19).
(pag.77).
Fig.19 Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window


Fig.19 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, SEP FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI (see pag.64).
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.


(G829 MstB2M1 STM-1)

2. Select the G829 MstB2M1 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> measure.
The Performance G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 <STM-1 number> window opens.
• 15M E. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es alarm:
• 15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
• 15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Es Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when ES has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
• 24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm:

• 15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
• 24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
• 15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
• 24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• UAS. UAS alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• UAS FE. UAS FE alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• UAS Bidi. UAS BIDI alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).

G828 Radio <radio branch> measure
The measure is available only if the equipment is provided with the radio (see option Radio A - Fig.44).
The G828 Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration.
The G828 Radio <radio branch> measure checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS quality parameters (see pag.64).
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window (see Fig.20).
(pag.81).
Fig.20 Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window


Fig.20 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.64).

(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.


(G828 Radio)

2. Select the G828 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance G828 Radio <radio branch> window opens.



G828 E1 Line Side measure
In order to execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
The G828 E1 Line Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1
tributary (A or B) at line side.
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 E1 Line Side window (see Fig.21).
(pag.85).
• To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (pag.86).
Fig.21 Performance G828 E1 Line Side window
Alarms Name of the Commands The values present into each column point out the result
status (5) PM measure bar (1) of the measure relevant to the control parameters (2)
Tributary used for Control Status of the

the measure (6) parameters (3) records (4)

Fig.21 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out
the status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.64)

(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.

(6) The No 2Mb Used, wording indicates that no tributary is set for the measure.

(G828 E1...)

3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure.

The Performance G828 E1... window opens.


To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure
The operation is not available when the system uses as supervisory port (EOC) an equipment tributary
(refer to pag.45). In such a case, the system automatically uses for the PM measures, the same tributary
used for the supervisory operations.
The change of the tributary for the G828 E1 Line Side measure automatically changes the value of the
tributary for the G828 E1 Radio Side measure and vice versa.

3. Press Show at the side of the wished G828 E1... measure.

The Performance G828 E1... window opens.
The Commons window opens.
5. Select the 2Mb Selection option

The 2Mb Selector parameter opens, which points out the 2Mbit/s used for the calculation oft he meas-
ure control parameters. In detail, the selected value:
• Trib A, the tributary A is used for the measure.
• Trib B, the tributary B is used for the measure.
• No 2Mb Used, no tributary is set for the measure.
To change the parameter, select the wished value from the list (Trib A or Trib B).
If a value is not available, this means that the relevant tributary is used as output of the T12 syn-
chronism (see Fig.53).

G828 E1 Radio Side measure
In order to execute this measure, it is necessary to use a tributary framed according the G.704 Rec.
The G828 E1 Radio Side measure checks the quality of the received signal from one of the IDU board E1
tributary (A or B) at radio side.
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 E1 Radio Side window (seen Fig.22).
(pag.85).
• To set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure (pag.86).
Fig.22 Performance G828 E1 Radio Side window
Tributary used for Control Status of the

the measure (6) parameters (3) records (4)

Fig.21 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points out
the status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS (see pag.64)

(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.

(6) The No 2Mb Used, wording indicates that no tributary is set for the measure.

G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure
Fig.44).
The G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure checks the quality of the
received VC12 into the STM-1 stream.
The check consists of measuring the ES, SES, UAS, ES FE, SES FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI, SEP, SEP FE, BBE,
BBE FE quality parameters (see pag.64).
side of the measure, opens the Performance G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12>
window (see Fig.23).
(pag.91).
Fig.23 Performance G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> - Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window

Fig.23 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
(3) Parameter: BBE, ES, SES, SEP, UAS, BBE FE, ES FE, SES FE, SEP FE, UAS FE, UASBIDI (see pag.64).
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.


(G828 STM-1... - Vc12...)

2. Select the G828 Vc12 group.
3. Press Show at the side of the G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> measure.
The G828 STM-1 <STM-1 number> Vc12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens.
• 15M Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Es FE alarm:
• 15M Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Es FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Es FE alarm:
• 24H Es FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when ES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Ses FE alarm:

• 15M Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Ses FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Ses FE alarm:
• 24H Ses FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SES FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 15M Sep FE alarm:
• 15M Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H Sep FE. Severity and threshold of the 24H Sep FE alarm:
• 24H Sep FE Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when SEP FE has occurred - over which it is activated the alarm.
• UAS. UAS alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• UAS FE. UAS FE alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• UAS Bidi. UAS BIDI alarm severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).

ACM Radio A measure
Furthermore the measure meaningful only when the adaptive modulation is active.
The ACM Radio A measure traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and two further counters: UpShift and DownShift
(see pag.64).
side of the measure, opens the Performance ACM Radio A window (see Fig.24).
• To change the type of the displayed counters (pag.72).
• To set the thresholds of the alarms (pag.85).
• To modify the modality used to increase the counters (pag.98).
Fig.24 Performance ACM Radio A window
Name of the Commands The values present into each column point out the
PM measure bar (1) result of the measure relevant to the counters (2)
Modality used to Alarms Counters Status of the

increase the counters (6) status (5) (4) records (3)

Fig.24 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
• Seconds. The counters relevant to the ACM profiles are present in the table.
• UpDownShift. The counters DownShift and UpShift are present in the table.
The Type column, points out the counters corresponding to the values present into each column.
(3) Wording:
errors.
vation period.
(4) One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 8PSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM,
128QAM, 256QAM (see pag.64).
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period points out (expressed in seconds)
the number of times the counter is increased.
The rule used to increased a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see note 6).
Besides one counter per modulation, two further counters are foreseen:
• DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming a profile lower than the previous one.
• UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period, has changed as-
suming a profile higher than the previous one.
The table does not display all the counters at the same time (see note 1).

• 15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the primary
observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.

• 24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily ob-
servation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
(6) If the active modality is:

• Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal
to the one currently active.
• Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is
higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Up-
per Modulation).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 128 QAM has been defined as Upper Modulation and the current
modulation is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
• Active Mod, each second only the counter 16QAM is increased.
• Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM are increased.
To change the type of the displayed counters

2. Select the ACM group.
3. Press Show at the side of the ACM Radio A measure.

The Performance ACM Radio A window opens.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the box and select from the list:
• Seconds, to display the results of the counters: 4QAM Str, 4QAM, 8PSK, etc.
• UpDownShift to display the results of the counters: DownShift and UpShift.
To set the thresholds of the alarms (ACM Radio A)



single option displays, in the right part of the window, the relevant counters:
• 15M 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM Strong alarm:
• 15M 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the
alarm.
• 15M 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 15M 4QAM alarm:

• 15M 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 15M 8PSK alarm:
• 15M 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 15
minutes, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 15M 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
15 minutes, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the
alarm.
alarm.
alarm.
alarm.
alarm.
• 24H 4QAMS. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAMS alarm:

• 24H 4QAMS Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when the counter 4QAM Str has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H 4QAM. Severity and threshold of the 24H 4QAM alarm:
• 24H 4QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when the counter 4QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H 8PSK. Severity and threshold of the 24H 8PSK alarm:
• 24H 8PSK Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of 24
hours, when the counter 8PSK has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
• 24H 16QAM Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, inside a period of
24 hours, when the counter 16QAM has increased - over which it is activated the alarm.
24 hours, when the counter 64QAM has increased- over which it is activated the alarm.

To modify the modality used to increase the counters


4. Press Change.
The Policy window opens.
5. Select the option:

• Active Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active
one, are increased.
• Not Available Modulation. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the cur-
rent one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Modulation), are
increased.

RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The RxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration.
The RxPwr Radio measure checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the RLTS, RLTM quality parameters specified by the Standard EN 301 129
of the ETSI (see pag.64).
side of the measure, opens the Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window shown (see Fig.25).
(pag.101).
Fig.25 Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window
Threshold Control Status of the

level (6) parameters (3) records (4)

Fig.25 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
• Rlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
• TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
What just said is valid starting from the second row of the table on, because the first row points
out the status of the records - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Rlts (see pag.64)

results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dbm.
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.

(6) Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the
user.

To change the type of the displayed control parameters

2. Select the RxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the text box and select from the list:
• Rlts, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: Rlts1, etc.
• TM, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the dBm: TMMax, TMMin,
Average Level.

2. Select the RxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the RxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance RxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.

single option displays the relevant parameters in the right part of the window:
• 15M Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Rlts... alarms:
• Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 900
(default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of
the alarm.
• Severity. Alarms severity: Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical (default Major).
• 24H Rlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Rlts... alarms:
• Rlts 1, Rlts 2, Rlts 3, Rlts 4, Rlts 5 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as
number of seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the received power is lower than
the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels - over which the system activates the
relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and
86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accord-
ingly of the alarm.
• Rlt. Threshold levels of the received power:
• Rlt 1 <current value> dBm, Rlt 2 <current value> dBm, Rlt 3 <current value> dBm, Rlt
4 <current value> dBm, Rlt 5 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second,
the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, move the cursor over a value comprised between -100dBm and -
20dBm. Default: Rlt 1: -40dBm, Rlt 2: -50dBm, Rlt 3: -60dBm, Rlt 4: -70dBm, Rlt 5: -
55dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a branch
are not automatically reported even on the other branches.

TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure
The TxPwr Radio 2A measure is available only for equipment in protected radio configuration.
The TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the TLTS, TLTM quality parameters, specified by the Standard EN 301 129
of the ETSI (see pag.64).
side of the measure, opens the Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window (see Fig.26).
(pag.104).
Fig.26 Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window

Fig.26 notes
(1) Command:
Label:
• Tlts. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the seconds as measuring unit.
• TM. Into the table there are the control parameters that use the dBm as measuring unit.
status of the record - see note (4).
(3) Parameter: TMMax, TMMin, Average Level, Tlts (see pag.64).

results have been subdivided according to the used measuring unit: seconds or dBm.
(4) Wording:
errors.
vation period.

(6) Each box points out the power threshold level actually set. This parameter can be configured by the user.

To change the type of the displayed control parameters

2. Select the TxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.
4. Into the commands bar, select the arrow present on the side of the text box and select from the list:
• Tlts, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the seconds: Tlts1, etc.
• TM, to display the results of the parameters whose measure unit are the dBm: TMMax, TMMin.

2. Select the TxPwr group.
3. Press Show at the side of the TxPwr Radio <radio branch> measure.
The Performance TxPwr Radio <radio branch> window opens.

single option displays the relevant parameters in the right part of the window:
• 15M Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 15M Tlts... alarms:
• Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, inside a period of 15 minutes, when the transmitted power is higher than the
TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and 900
(default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of
the alarm.
• 24H Tlts. Threshold and severity of the 24H Tlts... alarms:
• Tlts 1, Tlts 2, Tlts 3, Tlts 4 (Thresholds area). Threshold levels - expressed as number of
seconds, inside a period of 24 hours, when the transmitted power is higher than the TLT1,
TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels - over which the system activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number comprised between 1 and
86400 (default 0). The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accord-
ingly of the alarm.
• Tlt. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
• Tlt 1 <current value> dBm, Tlt 2 <current value> dBm, Tlt 3 <current value> dBm, Tlt
4 <current value> dBm. Respectively the first, the second, the third and the fourth
threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold move the cursor over a value comprised between -25dBm and
30dBm. Default: Tlt 1: 13dBm, Tlt 2: 15dBm, Tlt 3: 17dBm, Tlt 4: 19dBm.
To restore the default of a parameter press the relevant Default push-button and confirm.
In equipment in protected configuration the variations of the thresholds executed on a

branch are not automatically reported even on the other branches.

PM measures (more info)
A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit points out a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This con-
dition generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the thresh-
old limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommen-
dations (for instance G.828, G.826, etc.).
The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed only after a command forwarded
by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the main controller of the equipment starts the storing of the
values relevant to the control parameters. The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each
record contains the values recorded into a specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary
records) and of 24 hours (daily records).
The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.40...11.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.30...11.45), while the first daily record will have as ob-
servation period 11.40...00.00.
When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records rele-
vant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.
For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.
If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.00...9.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.09...9.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.02...9.07 will not be
stored.
If an equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will suc-
cessively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-
started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the pre-
ceding records.

REPORTS & LOGGERS MAINTENANCE
Curr. Profile Reading Monitor

Reading/Writing Read Only*, Read and Write*, Station Operator*, System
* The Read Only, Read and Write and Station Operator user cannot delete the signals and the list of oper-
ations.
The Reports & Loggers Maintenance command saves to file the equipment configuration, the status/
alarm signals and the operations executed by the users.
• To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by
the users to file (pag.106)
• To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller (pag.109).
• To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller (pag.109).
To save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the op-
erations executed by the users to file
In order to execute this operation, the display of menu bar in the browser must be active.
1. Select the Main Menu > Reports & Loggers Maintenance command.
The Report Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.27).
2. Activate, in the Report Options area, the information you wish to save to file:
• Inventory report. Whole equipment configuration: WEB LCT version, properties, list of units, sta-
tus/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default gateway, remote equipment list,
user inputs, user outputs, operating parameters, etc.
• Fault report. List of status/alarm signals currently active on the equipment (current alarms) and
signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
• Command Log. List of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX users,
stored in the equipment controller.
It is possible to select one or more options. Depending on the activated options, a file will be created
containing the relevant data.
3. Press Generate Report.

In sequence, are displayed:
• The WEB Report page, where the information, which will be saved to file depending on the ac-
tivated options, are pointed out.
Fig.28 shows an example of content of the WEB page.
• A window displaying the save mode of the file according to the browser currently in use.
4. Follow the instructions in the window to save the file.

The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Report WEB page.

Fig.27 Report Manager contextual area
Activated Information
option that can
be saved
Deactivated to file (1)
option
Fig.27 notes
(1) The option:

• Inventory report, allows saving the whole equipment configuration to file: WEB LCT version,
properties, list of units, status/version of the firmware, addresses, routing table, default
gateway, remote equipment list, user inputs, user outputs, operating parameters, etc.
• Fault report, allows saving to file the list of status/alarm signals currently active on the
equipment (current alarms) and signals stored in the equipment controller (alarm history).
• Command Log, allows saving to file the list of the operations, executed by the WEB LCT, SCT/
LMT or NMS5UX users, stored in the equipment controller.
One or more options can be selected. Depending on the activated options, a file containing the rel-
evant data will be saved.

Fig.28 Report (WEB page)
Equipment
parameters
(1)
Operations
list (2)
Current
alarms (3)
Alarms
history
(3)
Fig.28 notes
(1) The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups. The format of the parameters present
in each groupALCplus2 is self-explicative and changes according to the type of represented data.
(2) To each operation, it is devoted a record that points out the following information:
• Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
• Source address. IP address of the machine (PC or workstation) from which it has been exe-
cuted the operation.
• User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
• Object. Object to which the operation refers.
• Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
The instances relevant to the OAM-FM objects (see Fig.103/Fig.104) refer to numeric in-
dicators having the following meaning:
• OAM CFM MA. The instance relevant to this object have 2 formats: one with two field
and one with three fields. In detail, the format with:
• 2 fields is equivalent to <Domain identifier>.<MA identifier> (for example
1.500).
• 3 fields is equivalent to <Bridge identifier>.<Domain identifier>.<MA identifi-
er> (for example 1.1.500).
• OAM CFM MEP. The instance is equivalent to <Domain identifier>.<MA identifi-
er>.<MEP identifier> (for example 1.500.602).
In the equipment managed by WEB LCT/NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX:
• <MA identifier> corresponds to the VLAN identifier (VLAN ID).

<Bridge identifier> corresponds to 1.
• Value Set. Set value.
The presence of the symbol "…" points out that the information is not available because it is a not
significant one for the type of operation to which it refers.
(3) To each signal, it is devoted a record that points out the following information:
• Severity. This field points out if the record refers to a status or alarm signal or if the signal
has been detected or it has been reset. If the situation concerns an alarm, it is pointed out
also its severity level.
With details the wording:
• Disable. Alarm signal reset
• Status. Status signal
• Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity
• Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity
• Major. Alarm detected with Major severity
• Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity
• Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the signal.
• Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the signal. If:
• The wording CLEARED is absent, the record refers to a detected alarm.
• The wording CLEARED is present, the record refers to a cleared alarm.
To delete the signals stored into the equipment controller
2. Press Delete all alarm logger events and confirm.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.
To delete the operations list stored into the equipment controller
2. Press Delete all command logger items and confirm.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

SNTP & WAKE UP CONFIGURATION

The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command manages the automatic acquisition of the reference date/
time of the equipment from a network element (SNTP functionality) and the Wake Up trap (Wake Up func-
tionality).
• To verify the SNTP functionality status (pag.110)
• To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality (pag.111)
• To disable the SNTP functionality (pag.111)
• To verify the Wake Up functionality status (pag.112)
• To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality (pag.112)
• To disable the Wake Up functionality (pag.113)

• SNTP functionality go to pag.113
• Wake Up functionality go to pag.114
To verify the SNTP functionality
1. Select the Main Menu > SNTP & Wake Up Configuration command.
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active.
The tab displays the activation status of SNTP functionality and the current setting of the relevant ex-
ecution parameters (see Fig.29).
Fig.29 SNTP tab (SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area)
Time interval between

a request of reference
Activation date/time update and
status (1) the next one
and IP address
of the main NE
(Main) and of
the secondary Time interval the
NE (Reserve) equipment must wait
present in the before reattempting
network which the transmission of
the equipment a request to the main
automatically gets or secondary element
the reference
date/time from
Number of times the
equipment must reattempt
(2) the transmission of a
request to the main or
secondary element
Fig.29 notes
(1) In detail, the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time of the equipment is:
• Active, when a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is present in the Main Server IP Address
and/or Reverse Server IP Address box.

• Inactive, when the value 0.0.0.0 (IP address reset) is present in the boxes Main Server IP
Address and Reverse Server IP Address.
(2) The activation of the NTP Server Lost Alarm points out that none of the set network elements is
reachable, as consequence the reference date/time of the equipment is not aligned.
The colour of the box points out the status of the alarm:
• Green. The alarm is not active.
• Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical,
Major, Minor or Warning.
To set the execution parameters and activate the SNTP functionality
The execution parameters (Main Server IP Address, Reserve Server IP Address, etc.) can be modified
even when the SNTP functionality is already active.
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active (see Fig.29).
2. Set the IP address of the main element present in the network, from which the equipment automatically
gets the reference date/time, in the Main Server IP Address box.
It is possible type, for each one of the four available spaces (sub-divided by a dot), a number comprised
between 0 and 255.
Typing a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) involves the activation of the automatic acquisition of the
reference date/time.
3. Set the IP address of the secondary element present in the network, from which the equipment auto-
matically gets the reference date/time, in the Reserve Server IP Address box.
between 0 and 255.
4. Set the time interval between a request of refresh of the reference date/time and the next one in the
Polling Interval box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 16777215 seconds.
5. Set the time interval (t) the equipment must wait for, before re-attempting the transmission of a re-
quest to the main or secondary element in the Polling Timeout box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 30 seconds.
6. Set the number of times that the equipment must re-attempt the transmission of a request to the main
or secondary element in the Polling Retries box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 1 and 10.
To disable the SNTP functionality
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens with the SNTP tab active (see Fig.29).
2. Press Reset next to the Main Server IP Address box to reset the value (0.0.0.0).
3. Press Reset next to the Reverse Server IP Address box to reset the value (0.0.0.0).

To verify the Wake Up functionality status
The SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area opens.
2. Select the Wake Up tab.

The tab displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the current setting of the relevant sending
parameters (see Fig.30).
Fig.30 Wake Up tab (SNTP & Wake Up Configuration contextual area)
Time interval for

which the Wake Up
trap, when enabled,
Transmission status
is sent to the server (3)
of Wake Up trap (1)
Optional
parameter (4)
IP address and
NSAP address
(Gosip) of the server
which the Wake Up
trap must be
sent to (2)
Fig.30 notes
(1) The sending of the Wake Up trap is:

• Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0) is set
as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
• Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP address of
the server (option NMS IP Address).
(2) With server we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a differ-
ent management system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.
(3) The setting of the value 0 points out that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it
or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
(4) The user can insert the physical location (for example the name of the site) of the equipment in this
field. This information is communicated to the remote manager together with the characteristics of
the equipment.
The supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX does not use this information.
To set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake Up func-
tionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary to deactivate the Wake Up functionality (see
pag.113) and them modify them.

2. Select the Wake Up tab (see Fig.30).
3. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.
between 0 and 255.
4. Only if the equipment and the server are inserted into an OSI network, set the NSAP address (Gosip
Address area).
To change the parameter:
• System ID, type the wished value in the relevant boxes.
• AFI, choose the arrow placed on the side of the box and select the desired value from the list.
• IDI, Ver, Auth, Reserved and Sel, type into the relevant boxes the value of the corresponding
byte/s.
5. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled,
in the Timeout box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 points out that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or
the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
6. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.
7. Select the Enable option.
To disable the Wake Up functionality
2. Select the Wake Up tab (see Fig.30).

3. Select the option Disable or press Reset to reset the NMS IP Address value (value 0.0.0.0).
SNTP functionality (more info)
The ALCplus2 equipment, via SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) protocol, can update its date/time us-
ing an element within the network as reference (SNTP functionality).
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible to define a maximum of two elements, one main (set
in the Main Server IP Address box - see Fig.29) and one secondary (set in the Reserve Server IP Address
box) from which the equipment automatically gets the reference date/time each n seconds (set in the Poll-
ing Interval box). Entering a valid value for the main and/or secondary element causes the activation of
the functionality.
If the main element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/time, this
request is sent for n times (set in the Polling Retries box) each t seconds (set in the Polling Timeout box).
At the end of this requests, if the main element does not answer, the equipment requires the updating of
the date/time to the secondary element.
If the secondary element does not answer to the request of updating of the equipment reference date/
time, this request is sent for n times each t seconds. At the end of this request, if the secondary element

does not answer the equipment, the system activates the SNTP servers lost Alarm and requires the update
of the date/time of the main element and so on.
If no network element set can be reached, the reference date/time of the equipment is not updated. This
condition is signalled by the activation of NTP Server Lost Alarm (see Fig.29).
To deactivate the automatic acquisition of the reference date/time, it is necessary to reset the IP address
of the main and secondary elements.
Wake Up functionality (more info)
The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a re-
mote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the supervision
systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not managed by
the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is reported in the relevant
documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. In detail, the implemen-
tation of the Wake Up functionality is the following.
Via WEB LCT (or SCT/LMT) application, it is possible:

• To define the IP address and the NSAP address (meaningful only if equipment and server are
inserted within an OSI network) of the server where the supervision system, which the trap
must be sent to (option NMS IP Address - see Fig.30) is installed
• To define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the trap
is automatically disabled (option Timeout).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the user
manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
• To activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address) and select the option Enable.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the option Disable or reset the option
NMS IP Address (value 0.0.0.0) pressing Reset (available even when the functionality is active).
When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap every minute
for the time interval defined by the user (option Timeout). For example, if the value 60 has been set as
timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the sending of the trap is automatically
disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the Wake Up
notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables the sending of the
Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).

SD MEMORY MANAGEMENT

The SD Memory Management command manages the SD memory card (Secure Digital Memory Card)
for the backup/restore of the equipment software and configuration.
• To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory (pag.115).

• To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit
(pag.117).
• To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory (pag.118)
• To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory (pag.119)
For more information about the use of the SD memory card in the equipment, go to pag.120.
To verify the status and the configuration of the SD memory
1. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.

The contextual area SD Management is displayed, showing the status and the configuration of the SD
memory present in the equipment (see Fig.31).
Fig.31 SD Management contextual area
Stus and
configuration
of the SD
memory card
(1)
(2)

Fig.31 notes
(1) Option:
• Status. SD memory status
SD memory Presence of SD Compatibility Compatibility

status in the equipment SD data structure - equipment SD data - equipment type
Loaded Yes Yes Yes
Eq Type Mismatch Yes Yes No
Not formatted Yes No No
Not Present No - -
• Type. Type of data present in SD memory:

• Boot SD. The SD memory contains the equipment configuration parameters and the
equipment software.
• Sw download SD. The SD memory contains only the equipment software.
• Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present or memory data structure not
recognized/compatible with the equipment, etc.).
• Automatic data restore from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the configuration data from
SD memory:
• Enabled. The automatic update of the data from SD memory is enabled.
• Disabled. The automatic update of the data from SD memory is not enabled.
• Not loaded. Information not available (SD not present, etc.).
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Boot SD.
• Automatic SW download from SD. Enabling of automatic update of the equipment software
from SD memory:
• Enabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory is ena-
bled.
• Disabled. The automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory is not
enabled.
• “Not running” Sw delete. Enabling of the automatic deletion of the equipment software
present in the standby memory bench (status Loaded - see Fig.32) after an automatic sw
update from SD memory:
• Enabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is enabled.
• Disabled. The automatic deletion of the equipment software is not enabled.
Parameter meaningful only for SD memories containing data of type Sw Dwl SD.
• EC serial number. Serial number of the controller which has generated the version of the
data and equipment software present in SD memory.
The empty field points out that the parameter is not available (SD not present, etc.).
• EC system version. File name and version of the equipment software currently used by the
controller which has generated the version of Boot SD present in the SD memory.
• SW system version. File name and version of the equipment sw present in the SD memory.
(2) Commands available to the user for the management of SD memory.

Tab.1 lists the commands.
For every command, the use, depending on the data present in the SD memory, and the mean times
for the execution of the operation are pointed out.
The SD not present. No action possible! wording points out that the SD memory is not present.

To execute the automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of re-
placement of IDU unit
In case of replacement of the IDU unit of an equipment, it is possible to use the SD memory, where the
equipment configuration and software (Boot SD) have been previously saved, to restart the new controller
based on the data present in SD memory.
This operation is very important because it avoids the equipment re-configuration necessary after a change
of the IDU unit.
Here below the whole procedure is described, which must be applied so that the automatic equipment re-
start from SD memory is successful.
1. Save the equipment configuration and software to the SD memory:

a. Insert the SD memory in the equipment.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment.
c. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.

The SD Management contextual area (see Fig.31).
d. Select the Create Boot SD command (Actions area).
e. Press Execute and confirm.

The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD memory, the following operations
are executed in this order:
• Deletion of all the files present in the SD memory
• Creation of the file structure of type Boot SD
• Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
• Copy of the backup files (configuration parameters).
At the end, press Refresh.
If the operation has been successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the
parameter Type assumes the value Boot SD.
f. In the area Actions, select the command:

• Enable automatic restore (all), to enable the automatic equipment restart from SD
memory: at the restart, both the configuration data and the equipment software will be
pasted from the SD memory to the new controller.
• Enable automatic restore (Data only), to enable the automatic equipment restart
from SD memory: at the restart, only the configuration data will be pasted from the SD
memory to the new controller.
g. Press Execute and confirm.

If the operation has been successful and, in the previous step, the selected command was:
• Enable automatic restore (all), the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Au-
tomatic SW download from SD assume the value Enabled.
• Enable automatic restore (Data only), the parameter Automatic data restore from SD as-
sumes the value Enabled.
At this point, if the SD memory is not removed from the equipment, the controller activates the auto-
matic synchronisation of the data: this means that every configuration change is automatically saved
even to the SD memory.
If the equipment software is updated, this is not automatically saved into the SD memory. Moreo-
ver, the procedure for the automatic restart is aborted (the parameters Enable automatic restore (all)
and/or Enable automatic restore (Data only) assume the value Disabled). In this case, it is suggested
to execute again this procedure in order to enable again the SD memory to the automatic restart.
2. When the equipment becomes faulted and a replacement of the IDU unit is necessary, remove the SD
memory from the faulted equipment and insert the new IDU unit.
3. Install and switch the new IDU unit on.

Before copying the equipment and sw configuration into the new controller, the following checks are
executed:
• The status of the equipment controller must be Replaced Controller.

• The data structure of the SD memory must be of type Boot SD.
• The value of EC serial number (present in the descriptor file of the SD memory) must be equal
to that registered in the equipment backpanel.
• In the descriptor file of the SD memory, the automatic restart from SD memory must be active
(parameter Automatic SW download from SD and/or Automatic data restore from SD - value
Enabled).
• In case of automatic restart enabled only for the configuration data (selection of the Enable au-
tomatic restore (Data only) command - see step 1f), the configuration data stored in the SD
memory must be referred to a equipment sw version older than or equal to that currently active
in the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The backup configuration files are copied from the SD memory to the controller.
b. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded). This op-
eration is executed only if:
• The Enable automatic restore (all) command has been selected at step 1f
• The running version of the equipment software (Running) is different from that present
in the SD memory.
c. The Serial Number of the controller present in the descriptor file of the SD memory is updated.
d. The Serial Number of the controller of the equipment backpanel is updated.
e. The controller with change of the memory bench in use (Bench Switch) is forced to restart if
even the sw update (selection of the Enable automatic restore (all) command - see step 1f) has
been required.
f. The controller restarts with the updated sw (if required) and applying the configuration data read
from the SD memory.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the automatic restart is not executed
and the controller stays in status Replaced Controller waiting for an intervention of the user.
To execute the automatic update of the equipment software from SD mem-

ory
If the equipment software must be updated on different equipment, the SD memory can be used to
execute the operation automatically without the use of the management software (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT).
Here below the whole procedure, which must be applied in order that the automatic update of the equip-
ment sw from SD memory is successful, is described.
1. Save the equipment software master to the SD memory:
a. Insert the SD memory into the equipment where the new sw version is present.
b. Open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment
c. Select the Main Menu > SD Memory Management command.

The SD Management contextual area opens (see Fig.31).
d. Select the Create Sw DWL SD command (Actions area).
e. Press Execute and confirm.

The operation takes several minutes during which, in the SD memory, the following operations
are executed in this order:
• Deletion of all the files present in the SD memory
• Creation of the file structure of type Sw Dwl SD
• Copy of all the files relevant to the version of a running equipment sw (status Running).
Once ended, press Refresh.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Loaded, while the pa-
rameter Type assumes the value Sw download SD.

f. Select the Enable automatic restore (all) command (area Actions) in order to enable the au-
tomatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory on the equipment restart.
g. Press Execute and confirm.

If the operation was successful, the parameter Automatic SW download from SD assumes the
value Enabled.
h. Select the Enable “Not running” Sw delete command (area Actions) if you wish that, once
the update and the change of the memory bench of the controller are ended, the sw present in
the standby bench (bench where the old sw is present), is automatically deleted.
i. Press Execute and confirm.

If the operation was successful, the parameter “Not running” Sw delete assumes the value En-
abled.
2. Remove the SD card from the equipment and insert it into another equipment whose software you wish
to update.
3. Switch the IDU unit on.
Before copying the equipment sw into the new controller, the following checks are executed:
• The data structure of the SD memory must be of type Sw Dwl SD.
• The automatic update from SD memory must be active in the descriptor file of the SD memory
(parameter Enable automatic restore (all)).
• The sw version stored in the SD memory must be different from both the versions present in
the memory benches of the controller.
If the above mentioned checks were successful:
a. The controller sw is updated overwriting the inactive memory bench (status Loaded)
b. The restart of the controller with change of the memory bench in use is forced (Bench Switch)
and, then, if set (see step 1.h.), the sw present in the standby bench is deleted.
c. The controller restarts with the updated software.
If at least one of the above mentioned checks was not successful, the operation is not executed.
To execute the management and maintenance of the SD memory
As help for the management of SD memory, by means of the SD Management window (see Fig.31), the
following can be executed.
• To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory (pag.119)
• To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) (pag.120)
• To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an au-
tomatic sw update from SD memory (pag.120)
• To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD memory to
the controller (pag.120)
• To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD) (pag.120)
To delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from the SD memory
This operation deletes ALL the files of the structure Boot SD or Sw Dwl SD. The deletion of a single file
os not foreseen.

2. Select the Delete SD files command (Actions area).
3. Press Execute and confirm.
4. Once ended, press Refresh.
If the operation was successful, the parameter Status assumes the value Not formatted.

To disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory

2. Select the Disable automatic restore command (Actions area).

Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameters Automatic data restore from SD and Au-
tomatic SW download from SD assume the value Disabled.
To disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench
after an automatic sw update from SD memory
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

2. Select the Disable “Not running” Sw delete command (Actions area).

Once ended, if the operation was successful, the parameter “Not running” Sw delete assumes the value
Disabled.
To force the restore of the configuration data and of the equipment sw from the SD
memory to the controller
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Boot SD are present.

2. Select the Force automatic restore command (Actions area).
To copy the equipment sw from the SD memory to the controller (Sw Dwl SD)
Operation meaningful only for SD memories where data of type Sw Dwl SD are present.

The contextual area SD Management is displayed (see Fig.31).
2. Select the Copy Sw from SD command (area Actions).
SD memory card (more info)
ALCplus2 equipment is provided with a SD memory card reader, which allows storing the equipment data
on SD (Secure Digital) memory cards.

Storing the equipment data into SD memory
The following equipment data can be saved and managed into SD memory:
• Equipment configuration parameters and equipment software.
Saving these data generates a data structure named Boot SD into the SD memory.
• Equipment software.
Saving these data generates a data structure named Sw Dwl SD into the SD memory.
Both the data structures cannot be saved at the same time in the same SD memory. The creation of
the structure Boot SD automatically deletes the data structure Sw Dwl SD and vice versa.
What just said is valid only for the information with data structure recognized by ALCplus2 equipment and
relevant management programs (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT). Any other type of data stored in SD memory (user
file) is not deleted or damaged by the commands described in this chapter.
When the user saves the configuration parameters and/or the equipment software on SD memory, the fol-
lowing file data structure is automatically created:
• Root
• Descriptor.txt.
Descriptor file of text type, where the characteristics of the data present in the SD memory
are present: type of equipment the data refer to, type of data in SD memory (Boot SD or Sw
Dwl SD), etc.
This information is used by the management software to execute the compatibility checks
between the data of the SD memory and the equipment where the SD memory is inserted.
• Backup
• Backup file of the equipment configuration parameters
• Software
• Files of equipment software (equipment Sw/Fw + WEB LCT)
If SD memory is of type Sw Dwl SD, the directory Backup will be empty.
Use of the SD memory for the equipment management
The SD memory can be used to make the following operations easy and fast.
Automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit

This operation allows saving the whole equipment configuration, sw/fw included, on the SD memory and
keeping it constantly updated.
In fact, after the creation of the data structure of type Boot SD in the SD memory, the controller, after any
configuration change, updates the data present in the in the SD memory, keeping them constantly updat-
ed.
When the equipment is faulted, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the faulted IDU unit and insert
it into the new IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the data and the sw present
in the SD memory are copied into the controller returning the equipment configuration to the condition
before the fault.
The complete procedure to execute this operation is described at pag.117.
Automatic update of the equipment software from SD memory
This operation allows saving, on the SD memory, the new equipment sw/fw which will result to be the mas-
ter sw to use for the updating of other equipment.
At this point, it is sufficient to extract the SD card from the IDU unit and to insert into a different IDU unit.
When the IDU unit is switched on and if some compatibility checks are passed, the sw present in the SD
memory is copied into the controller.
The complete procedure to execute this operation is described at pag.118.

Commands for the management/maintenance of SD memory
The commands available to the user for the management/maintenance of the SD memory are listed in
Tab.1.
The table points out, for every command, the use depending on the type of data structure present in the
SD memory and the mean execution times of the operations.
Tab.1 Commands for the management of SD memory
(1)
Command SD memory without SD memory with data structure SD memory with data structure Time
data structure Boot SD Sw Dwl SD
Delete SD files It deletes all the files present in SD memory 1/2 min.
Create BOOT SD It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment configuration parameters and 5 min.
equipment sw (Boot SD) from the controller to the SD memory
Create Sw DWL SD It creates the structure and copies the files of the equipment sw (Sw Dwl SD) 5 min.
from the controller to the SD memory
Enable automatic - It enables the automatic equipment It enables the automatic equipment 1/2 sec.
restore (all) restart from SD memory: when the restart from SD memory: when the
equipment restarts, both the config- equipment restarts, the equipment
uration data and the equipment sw sw will be copied from the SD mem-
will be copied from the SD memory. ory to the controller.
Enable automatic - It enables the automatic equipment - 1/2 sec.

restore (Data only) restart from SD memory: when the
equipment restarts, only the config-
uration data will be copied from the
SD memory to the new controller
Disable automatic - It disables the automatic restart of It disables the automatic update of 1/2 sec.
restore the equipment from SD memory the equipment sw from SD memory
Enable - - It enables the automatic deletion of 1/2 sec.

“Not running” the equipment sw present in the
Sw delete standby memory bench (status
Loaded - see Fig.32) after an auto-
matic update of the sw from SD
memory
Disable - - It disables the automatic deletion of 1/2 sec.

“Not running” the equipment sw present in the
Sw delete standby memory bench after an au-
tomatic update of the sw from SD
memory
Force automatic - It forces the restore, from SD mem- - 5 min.

restore ory to controller, of the configuration
data and of the equipment sw
Copy Sw from SD - - It copies the equipment sw from the 5 min.

SD memory to the controller
(1)
Mean execution time of the operation.

SOFTWARE INFO & MAINTENANCE
Curr. Profile Reading Monitor*, Read Only*, Read and Write*

Reading/Writing Station Operator*, System
* The IP/OSI stack switch tab is not available to the user Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write and Station
Operation.
The Software info & Maintenance command manages the equipment firmware, the WEB LCT software
present in the equipment, the communication stack used by the equipment and the restore of the default
equipment settings.
• To verify the firmware version of the equipment (pag.123).
• To update the firmware of the equipment (pag.124).
• To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main controller (pag.125).
• To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment (pag.125).
• To update the WEB LCT application (pag.126).
• To verify the communication stack in use (pag.127)
• To modify the communication stack in use (pag.127)
• To execute the equipment software reset (pag.128)
• To restore Factory Default of the equipment (pag.128)

• Firmware updating go to pag.128.
• Factory Default of the equipment go to pag.129.
To verify the firmware version of the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Software info & Maintenance command.
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active.
The tab displays the version of the equipment firmware (see Fig.32).
Fig.32 Equip. Firmware tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
File name and version of the equipment

firmware respectively present
on the memory bench 1 and 2
Functioning
status of the
memory bench
1 and 2 (1)
List of the
codes and of
the FPGA
files that
compose the
equipment
firmware (2)

Fig.32 notes
(1) Wording:
• Running. It is on progress the firmware relevant to the subject memory bench.
• Loaded. The firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not on progress (standby).
• Not Loaded. The firmware is not present into the memory bench.
• Downloading. It is on progress the updating of the firmware relevant to the memory bench.
• Interrupted/Aborting. The update of the firmware has been interrupted.
• Aborting. The update operation has been interrupted.
(2) Column:
• Unit. Name of the tab or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or the
programmable device (FPGA file).
• Software. Firmware name. Usually the name points out the component type. Wording:
• FW_boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not provided
with a version of the memory benches.
• FW_appl, Application code.
• Conf_... or Fpga... Configuration file of the programmable devices.
• Actual Rel. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For the codes (FW…), the system points out the version and also the relevant identification
code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a different
code type).
• Rel Bench 1/Rel Bench 2. Firmware version present into the memory bench 1 and 2 of the
main controller.
To update the firmware of the equipment
The application automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present
(wording Loaded or Not Loaded - see Fig.32).
It is not possible to execute such an operation when the updating of the firmware is already on progress
(wording Downloading).
Then, it is necessary to point out that the firmware update procedure could change the equipment func-
tions.
1. If not already active, run the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to manage
the operation of FTP for the file transfer.
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active (see
Fig.32).
3. Select the Download SW Setup tab.
The Sw Download tab opens.
4. Set the path where there is the file into the Download file path box.
It is possible to type the path and the filename or to select the Browse local system (the window of the
O.S. opens for the selection of the file) and select the file.
The file you wish to use for the operation must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for
the display of WEB LCT is running).
5. Set the download type to be executed. Select the option:

• Forced, if the refresh procedure of the firmware relevant to the main controller of the equipment
is on progress.
• Only different or not present/peripheral, if the refresh procedure of the firmware relevant to pe-
ripheral units (FPGA file and/or application code) is on progress.

6. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the firmware that has been up-
dated.
7. Press Start and confirm.

Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be for-
warded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the firmware update: the wording
Interrupted is displayed in the Bench Status box of the branch whose firmware you are updating.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Bench Status box of the branch
whose firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which requires
some minutes:
• Starting. The operation has been started.
• Downloading. The operation is running.
The Abort push-button, present in the Bench Status box during the firmware update, can be
used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the firmware present into the bench memory and it
updates the firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated com-
ponents. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the
bench will be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the main controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating
of the firmware.
• Completed (refresh in 20 sec). The update operation is ended and the window will automatically
refresh in 20 seconds.
The refresh of the window can be forced, before the expiry of 20 seconds, pressing Refresh.
After the update, the Software Version box (see Fig.32) points out the new firmware version.
To switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the main con-
troller
It is not possible to switch the memory bench when the updating of the firmware is on progress (word-
ing Downloading - see Fig.32) and when the firmware of the equipment is not present into a bench (word-
ing Not Loaded).
The switching between the memory benches DOES NOT stop the traffic.
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens with the Equip. Firmware tab active (see
Fig.32).
2. Select the Bench Switch tab.

The Bench Switch tab opens.
3. Press Bench switch and confirm.

The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.
To verify the WEB LCT version present into the equipment
The Software info & Maintenance contextual area opens.

2. Bring at front the Web LCT tab.
The tab displays the version of the WEB LCT application present in the equipment (see Fig.33).
Fig.33 Web LCT tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
WEB LCT
type (1)
WEB LCT
version
present
into the
equipment
Fig.33 notes
(1) The wording Web LCT ALC Plus 2 points out the WEB LCT application for the control and the man-
agement of ALCplus2 equipment.
To update the WEB LCT application
2. Bring at front the Web LCT tab (see Fig.33).
3. Press Browse.
The window of the O.S. for the selection of the file opens.
4. Select the file (with .tar extension) you wish to use for the update.
The Status box points out the version of WEB LCT present in the file.
5. Press Upload and the confirm.

Before starting the update, the compatibility between the WEB LCT which must be sent to the equip-
ment and the one present in the terminal is checked.
The check consists in comparing the type of equipment.
If the parameters are not compatible, the application does not execute the update of WEB LCT (the
Status box displays the message Error: Probable cause wrong...).
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Status, Total Bytes and Bytes Loaded
boxes dynamically point out the progress of the operation which requires some minutes.
At the end of the operation, a message informs about the result of the operation.
6. Close and re-open the WEB LCT page relevant to the equipment, which the update has been executed
for, to avoid misalignment between the displayed data and the new WEB LCT.

To verify the communication stack in use
Operation available only to SYSTEM.
2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab.

The tab displays the communication stack in use (see Fig.34).
Fig.34 IP/OSI stack switch tab (Software info & Maintenance contextual area)
Communication
stack in
use (1)
Fig.34 notes
(1) Wording:
• IP. Communication stack Full IP
• OSI. Communication stack IP Over OSI
To modify the communication stack in use
2. Bring at front the IP/OSI stack switch tab (see Fig.34).
3. Into the SYSTEM password required box, type the access code of System user.
4. Select the option relevant to the new communication stack: IP or OSI.
5. Activate the Factory Default check-box if you wish that the change of communication stack restores the
default equipment settings.
The operation, if executed on an equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss
of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the
default values.

At the end of the operation, the message Operation Done is displayed.

If the Factory Default check-box has been activated at step 5, the default configuration will be auto-
matically applied at the equipment restart.
For more info go to pag.129.

To restore Factory Default of the equipment

The operation, if executed on an equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss of the
link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default va-
lues.
3. Into the SYSTEM password required box, type the access code of System user.
4. Activate the Factory Default box.

At the end of the operation, the message Operation Done is displayed.

The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart.
For more info go to pag.129.
Update of the equipment firmware (more info)
The firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management of the
entire equipment (firmware of the main controller firmware of the peripheral units).
The firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two memory bench-
es (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.
Each bench can contain one firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equipment.
It is possible to update the sw/fw of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time. The WEB LCT
automatically updates the firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not present (wording Loaded
or Not Loaded - see Fig.32).

Factory Default of the equipment (more info)
Through the graphical interface WEB LCT, the Factory Default settings of an equipment can be restored.
This operation can be executed during the change of the equipment communication stack (see pag.127)
or as independent operation (see pag.128).
In both cases, at the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration
will be applied.
All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment
list, cross connections, etc.).
In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: SYSTEM - Password: siae-
micr.
The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.2.
These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU of branch 1. The equipment keeps
always in memory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU. If no ODU has never been connected
to the IDU, the addresses of ODU Low must be used. If an ODU of High type is connected to an equipment
configured with ODU of Low type (and vice versa), the equipment automatically changes its own default
addresses.
Tab.2 Factory Default - ALCplus2
Parameter IP Address NetMask ODU

172.20.254.14 255.255.255.0 Low
Ethernet port (pag.42)
172.20.255.15 255.255.255.0 High
172.20.1.2 255.255.255.248 Low
LCT PPP port (pag.43)
172.20.1.9 255.255.255.248 High
172.20.2.2 255.255.255.248 Low
2Mb/s EOC port (pag.45)
172.20.2.9 255.255.255.248 High
172.20.3.2 255.255.255.248 Low
Radio 1A port (pag.44)
172.20.3.4 255.255.255.248 High
172.20.3.4 - Low
Default Gateway (Fig.14/Fig.15)
172.20.3.2 - High
Agent IP Address (Fig.11) As IP Address of the LCT PPP port
If the equipment is inserted into an OSI network
172.20.9.2 255.255.255.0 Low
IP Over OSI port (pag.45)
172.20.9.4 255.255.255.0 High
172.20.9.4 - Low
Default Gateway (Fig.14/Fig.15)
172.20.9.2 - High

BACKUP/RESTORE CONFIGURATION

The Backup/Restore Configuration command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equip-
ment configuration.
• To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) (pag.130).

• To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) (pag.130).
• To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last op-
eration of configuration restore (configuration revert) (pag.131).
For more information about the backup/restore of the equipment configuration, go to pag.131.
To save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup)
1. If not already active, start the WEB LCT Console program or the SCT/LMT program, necessary to man-
age the operation of FTP for the file transfer.
2. Select the Main Menu > Backup/Restore Configuration command.

The Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area opens (see Fig.35).
3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the name of the file and the path where you wish to save the file.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data
present in the file will be overwritten.
If the user does not set any path, the file will be saved in the main disk (for example c:\).
4. Press Backup.
The Operation status box displays the progress of the operation as messages.
During the operation, the Abort push-button is available. Pressing it and confirming, the operation is
interrupted.
The display of the message Completed in the Operation status box points out that the operation has
been executed with success.
To transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration re-

store)

3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
It is possible to type the path and the name of the file or select the Browse local system option (the
O.S. window for the selection of the file opens) and select the file.
4. Press Restore and confirm.

interrupted.

To retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program
before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert)

3. Press Revert and confirm.
interrupted.
Fig.35 Configuration Backup/Restore contextual area
During the
This box operation the
points out the Abort push-button
progress of the is active.
current operation Selecting it, the
operation in
progress can
be interrupted
Date/time of the
backup file
automatically
created by the
program before
the last restore
operation (1)
Fig.35 notes
(1) The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system.
The wording Unavailable points out that the file is not available.
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (more info)
The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup - pag.130).
The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the user needs.
Then, in any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the data
of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore - pag.130).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps it available
until the successive restore operation.
In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program
before the last operation of configuration restore (configuration revert - pag.131).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for an equipment: one executed by the user and
the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.

UNIT LIST

The Unit List command displays the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration).
To verify the characteristics of the equipment units (real configuration)
1. Select the Main Menu > Unit List command.

The Unit Table contextual area opens, where the characteristics of the equipment units are displayed
(see Fig.36).
Fig.36 Unit Table contextual area
Unit
Functional
status of Characteristics
the unit of the unit (1)
(2)
Resuming
functional
status of
the units
(2) (3)
Fig.36 notes
(1) Parameter:
• Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment.
The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not physically present into the equip-
ment.
• Expected Type. Foreseen unit type.
The wording Unequipped points out that the unit is not foreseen.
• HW Version. Unit version.
• Part Number. Part Number of the unit.
• Par Part Num. Part Number of the group that contains the unit.
Usually the group represents the equipment part that can be replaced.
Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the field will result empty and the part that can
be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.
• Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit.

If the unit is not contained into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers
to the unit.
(2) Each box identifies an alarm. In detail:

• Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.
• Mis. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type parameter)
also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).
• Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the WEB LCT interrogations.
• HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Expected
Type parameter).
• SW Mism. The firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral unit (Actual Rel.
column) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status (Rel Bench 1 or
Rel Bench 2 column) (see Fig.32).
The colour of the boxes represents the status of the alarm and the severity coupled with the alarm
itself:
• Green. Alarm deactivated.
• Red. Alarm activated coupled with the Critical severity level.
• Orange. Alarm activated coupled with the Major severity level.
• Yellow. Alarm activated coupled with the Minor severity level.
• Light blue. Alarm activated coupled with the Warning severity level.
(3) For each alarm inside the box, the total number of active alarms of the specific type in the equip-
ment units is pointed out.

ACTIVE MANUAL OPERATION

The Active Manual Operation command manages the manual operations.

• To verify active the manual operations (pag.134).
• To verify/modify the manual operation timeout (pag.135).
To verify the active manual operations
1. Select the Main Menu > Active Manual Operation command.

The Active Manual Operation contextual area opens, where the manual operations actually activated
into the equipment are displayed (see Fig.37).
Fig.37 Active Manual Operations contextual area
List of the
active
manual
operations
(1)
Current
Timeout
relevat to the
equipment
manual
operations
(2)
Fig.37 notes
(1) The information present into the contextual area are not dynamically updated. Press Refresh to
update the information.
(2) The value 0 points out that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a
manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
The activation of a manual forcing (for instance a loop) affects the traffic.

To verify/modify the manual operation timeout
The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.
1. Select the Main Menu > Active Manual Operation command.

The Active Manual Operation contextual area opens (see Fig.37).
2. Use the scrolling arrows to set a timeout comprised between 1 and 172800 seconds (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout (it means that the activation
operations of the manual forcing will not be automatically disabled but the user will have to execute
such operations).

ALARM SEVERITY CONFIGURATION

The Alarm Severity Configuration command manages the alarm transmission and their severity level.
• To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms (pag.136).
• To enable/disable an alarm (pag.137).
• To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm (pag.137).
• To change the severity level of an alarm (pag.138).
For more information about the enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm go to pag.138.
To verify the severity level and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
1. Select the Main Menu > Alarm Severity Configuration command.

The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens, where the severity level, the alarm enabling
status, the alarm forwarding status and a possible management system external to the equipment (for
example, SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX) are displayed (see Fig.38).
Fig.38 Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area
Group
name (1)
Alarm
Alarm list
subdivided
into groups
The presence of the mark Alarm

symbol points out that at description
least one characteristic of
the alarm has been changed
Forwarding status
Memorization status of the alarm and, if it is of the trap (2)
enabled, the relevant seriousness level (3)

Fig.38 notes
(1) To display the alarm list select the symbol. To hide the alarm list select the symbol.
The number of alarms present in the group is displayed next to the name of the group (between
brackets). The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.
(2) Wording:
• Trap Enable. The forwarding of the trap is enabled.
• Trap Disable. The forwarding of the trap is not enabled.
(3) In detail:
• X Disabled. Memorization of the alarm disabled.
• <Coloured box> Critical, Major, etc. Memorization of the alarm enabled. The severity level
is pointed out by the colour of the box and by the name of the level.
The wording Unavailable in this SW ver. points out that the involved alarm is not supported by
the current firmware version present into the equipment controller.
To enable/disable an alarm

The Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area opens (see Fig.38).
2. Select the alarm.
3. Select the relevant Edit wording.

The Configuration window opens.
4. Into the Severity area, select the following option:

• Disable, to disable the alarm.
• Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity level to be assigned to the alarm
5. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area.
To enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm (see
pag.137).


4. Into the Trap area, select the following option:

• Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
• Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
5. Press Ok.

To change the severity level of an alarm


4. In the Severity area, select the option relevant to the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Sta-
tus, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides mod-
ifying the alarm severity level, automatically enables it.
5. Press Ok.
Enabling/forwarding/severity of an alarm (more info)
The enabling/disabling of the alarm and of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm and
local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed
for each single alarm of each single equipment.
Enabling/disabling the alarms
The term alarm means the fault signal generated by an error or by a wrong operation of the equipment or
of any element that compose it.
The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the equipment
controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the alarm
had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this
is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see next
item), it is communicated to the management system, which displays it in the current alarms and the his-
tory alarms.
Enabling/disabling the forwarding of the alarm traps
The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by the equip-
ment to a possible external management system, for example SCT/LMT and/or NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/
NMS5LX.
The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to his own
needs.
Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equipment controller
and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.
On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is reg-
istered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system, which displays it in the
current alarms and the history alarms.
Alarm severity
Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the management program has an associated severity level
which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.

VIEW LOGGED USER
Curr. Profile Reading Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator
Reading/Writing System
The View Logged User command manages the users connected to the equipment.
• To verify the users connected to the equipment (pag.139).

• To force the logout of a user (pag.140).
To verify the users connected to the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > View Logged User command.

The View Logged User contextual area opens, where the list of the users connected to the equipment
when the command is selected is displayed (see Fig.39).
Fig.39 View Logged User contextual area
User
name
(1)
User
profile
User
Timeout
Machine
IP address
(2)
Fig.39 notes
(1) The wording NMS5UX points out the user of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system
or a remote user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be
connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).
The other ones identify the WEB LCT or SCT/LMT users.
(2) With the wording machine, it is intended the PC (for the WEB LCT and SCT/LMT users) or the server,
the workstation (for the NMS5UX users and remote users) on which the application used by the user
is actually running.

To force the logout of a user
Logging out oneself is not possible.

If the logout of a NMS5UX user is forced, the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system automati-
cally executes the restore of the user login.
1. Select the Main Menu > View Logged User command.

The View Logged User contextual area opens (see Fig.39).
2. Select the wished user.
3. Press Force Logout and confirm.

Into the View Logged User contextual area, the system removes the line relevant to the selected user.
If the Force Logout push-button is not available, this means that the record relevant to one’s user
has been selected.

USER MANAGER
Curr. Profile System
The User Manager command manages the list of the equipment users.
• To verify the user list (pag.141).

• To add a user to the list (pag.142).
• To change a user into the list (pag.142).
• To delete a user from the list (pag.143).
• To change the password and timeout of the System user (System Password) (pag.143)
• To change the network password and network timeout (Network Password) (pag.143)
• To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM Password) (pag.144)
• To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote user (different from
WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment
(pag.144).
For more information about the user list go to pag.145.
To verify the user list
1. Select the Main Menu > User Manager command.

The User Manager contextual area opens, where the user list currently stored in the equipment is dis-
played (see Fig.40).
Fig.40 User Manager contextual area
User list
of the
equipment
User
name
User
profile
(1)
User
timeout
(2)
Fig.40 notes
(1) The user with:

• Read Only profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) but it can not forward com-
mands or execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.

• Read and Write profile, can check the parameters (reading operation) and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP).
• Station Operator, can as check the parameters (reading operation) as send commands or
execute changes (writing operation (1)) to the equipment configuration.
(1) Except for the following operations: modifying the Remote Element Table, the user list,
aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the login and the logout of an user and all
those operations available only to the System user (or NMS5UX).
The System and NMS5UX users are not pointed out into the User Manager contextual area.
(2) Wording:
• No Timeout. The option is disabled, this means that the user is not automatically disconnect-
ed after a defined time range.
• <number> Sec. The option is enabled, this means that the user (if no operation is executed
in the WEB LCT page) will be disconnected after the specified time range.
To add a user to the list
Into each list, it is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 users for each profile (up to a maximum of
12 users).

The User Manager contextual area opens (see Fig.40).
2. Select the Add command.

The Add User window opens.
3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 1 up to
8).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list. Then, when
the user name has been assigned, it can not be changed later.
4. Into the Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric string with a number of characters
from 1 up to 8).
5. Into the Confirm Password box, type newly the access code of the user.
6. Into the Timeout box, set the option:

• No timeout, if the user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time range.
• Timeout, if the user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page) must be disconnected
after the specified time range set into the Sec box.
To modify the timeout, use the scrolling arrows of the Sec. box to set a value between 1 and
43200 sec. (12h).
7. Into the Profile box, set the profile to be assigned to the user: Read only, Read and write or Station
operator.
It is not possible to create a user with System profile.
8. Press OK.
The new user is inserted into the User Manager contextual area.
To modify a user into the list

2. Select the record relevant to the user.

3. Select the Modify command.
The Modify User window opens.
4. Execute the changing.

The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. To add a user
to the list (pag.142).
It is necessary to set again all the user parameters (password, timeout, profile) with the exception
of the user name that can not be changed.
5. Press OK.
To delete a user from the list

2. Select the record relevant to the user.
3. Select the Remove command.
To change the password and the timeout of the System user (System Pass-
word)

2. Select the System command.

The Change System Password window opens.
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new access code of System user (alphanumeric string with
a number of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the access code.
5. Into the Timeout box, select the option:

• No timeout, if the System user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time
range.
• Timeout, if the System user (if no operation is executed in the WEB LCT page), has to be dis-
connected after the time range set into the Sec box.
43200 sec. (12h).
To change the network password and timeout (Network Password)
If you wish to modify only the timeout, it is necessary to input the current network password in the
Enter new password and Confirm new password fields.

2. Select the Network command.

The Change Network Password window opens.
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new network password (alphanumeric string with a number
of characters from 1 up to 8).
4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the new network password.

• No timeout, if the remote equipment (if it is in Monitor status) has not to be automatically dis-
connected after a defined time range.
• Timeout, if you wish that the remote equipment, if in Monitor status, if no operation is executed,
is disconnected after the period set in the Sec. box
43200 sec. (12h).
To change the password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password)
The changing of the CEM password has to be executed only if it is changed the default password used
by the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system.
If you wish to modify only the timeout, it is necessary to type the current CEM password into the Enter
new password and Confirm new password fields.

2. Select the CEM command.
The Change CEM Password window opens.
3. Into the Enter new password box, type the new CEM password (alphanumeric string with a number of
characters from 1 up to 8)
4. Into the Confirm new password box, type newly the CEM password.

• No timeout, if the NMS5UX user has not to be automatically disconnected after a defined time
range.
• Timeout, if the NMS5UX user, (if the application does not execute any operation), has to be dis-
connected after the time range set into the Sec box.
43200 sec. (12h).
To verify/modify the IP address of remote machines that contain a remote

user (different from WEB LCT, SCT/LMT or NMS5UX user) who has the pos-
sibility to be connected to the equipment of remote users
The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does
not need for a login password.
It is possible to set a maximum of 2 remote users.

2. Select the PermaLogin command.

The Permanent Login window opens.

3. Into the Manager IP Address 1 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.
between 0 and 255.
4. Into the Manager IP Address 2 box, set the IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.
between 0 and 255.
5. Pressing the Reset push-button next to the relevant Manager IP Address… box, the value is set to zero
(0.0.0.0).
6. Activate the Trap Version 2 option, under the relevant Manager IP Address… box, to set the trap man-
agement of version 2 (SNMP).
If the option is not activated, the version 1 (SNMP) of the traps is used.
User list (more info)
The users list is a list of users that can be connected and ask for the login to the equipment.
If a user is not present into the users list memorized into the controller on an equipment, such an user will
not be able to connect and/or to execute the login of that equipment.
With the exception of the System and NMS5UX users, all the other users of the users list relevant to an
equipment have to be set by the WEB LCT application (see pag.142), the SCT/LMT program or NMS5UX/
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
Each equipment, that can be managed by the WEB LCT application or by the SCT/LMT program, is equipped
with two pre-defined users:
• SYSTEM. User of the WEB LCT application or SCT/LMT program with the following features:
User name System (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile System (unchangeable parameter)
Password Siaemicr (default) (changeable parameter - see pag.143)
The System user is single one for every equipment and he can not be deleted.
Only this user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list.
The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward
commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.
• NMS5UX. User of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system, with the following features:

User name NMS5UX (unchangeable parameter).
Timeout No Timeout (changeable parameter).
Profile System (unchangeable parameter)
Password Pre-define (changeable parameter - see pag.144)
The NMS5UX user can not be deleted.

This user has the possibility to create, modify and delete users in the user list of the equipment
by means of the NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX graphic interface. More information about the
NMS5UX/NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system is reported in the relevant documentation.
The user with System profile can as to check the parameters (reading operation) as to forward
commands or to execute changing (writing operation) to the equipment configuration.

FEATURES MANAGEMENT
Curr. Profile Reading Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator
Reading/Writing System
The Features Management command manages the functionalities (modulation, synchronisation, OSPF
protocol, etc.) enabled for the equipment.
• To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment (pag.146).

• To enable the new functionalities (pag.147).
To verify the functionalities enabled for the equipment
1. Select the Main Menu > Features Management command.

The Equipment Feature Management contextual area opens, where the functionalities enabled on de-
mand is displayed (seeFig.41).
Fig.41 Equipment Feature Management contextual area
List of the
available
functionalities
(1)
Enabling
status of the
functionalities
(2)
Fig.41 notes
(1) Functionalities:
• Maximum equipment modulation:
• Upgrade up to 8PSK
• Upgrade up to 16QAM
• Channel spacing:
• Upgrade up to 14M

• Adaptive modulation: ACM functionality
• OAM-FM for Ethernet network: ETH Oam functionality (ALCplus2 only)
• Synchronisation: Sync eth support (ALCplus2 only)
• OSPF protocol: OSPF functionality
• Fade Margin (calculation of the link margin): Built-in Fade Margin Facility
(2) Wording:
• Enabled. The functionality is enabled.
• Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.
To enable the new functionalities
In order to enable one or more functionalities, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate,
represented by a file (with .sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.
For each equipment you wish to enable one or more functionalities, a specific enabling certificate is re-
quired, because there is an univocal link between each single certificate and each specific equipment.
1. Select the Main Menu > Features Management command.

The Equipment Feature Management contextual area opens (see Fig.41).
2. Press Browse.
The window of the O.S. for the selection of the file opens.
3. Select the enabling certificate (file with .sfc extension).
4. Press Open.
The selected file is indicated in the Status - Ready to send:... box.
5. Press Send Certificate File.

A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:
• Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.
• Invalid operation for this equipment…. The selected certificate and equipment are not compati-
ble (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).

RMON
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System
The RMON command manages the statistic counters of the Ethernet ports of the equipment. The managed
counters are described in RFC 2819 - History Control Group.
• To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equip-
ment Ethernet ports (pag.148)
• To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port (pag.149)
• To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port (pag.149)
• To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (pag.149)
For more information about the implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by
WEB LCT go to pag.150.
To display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic

counters of the equipment Ethernet ports
1. Select the Main Menu > RMON command.

The RMON area is displayed showing the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the count of the
statistics (see Fig.42).
Fig.42 Remote Monitoring contextual area
List of the
external
and internal
ports of the
Ethernet
switch
Count
status (1)
Fig.42 notes
(1) Wording:
• Stopped. The count is not on progress.
• Running. The count is on progress.

To activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port

The RMON contextual area opens (see Fig.42).
2. Press Open at the side of the port in Stopped status to be activated.

The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window opens (see Fig.43).
3. Press Start and confirm.
The count is started-up.
To deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port
The deactivation of the count involves the loss of the collected data.

2. Press Open at the side of the port in Running status to be deactivated.

The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window opens (see Fig.43).
3. Press Stop and confirm.
The count is stopped.
To display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port (RMON)
Operation meaningful only for Ethernet ports for which the count of the RMON statistics is active. To
active the count see pag.149.

2. Press Open at the side of the wished port in Running status.

The Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window is displayed, showing the evolution in time (history)
of the statistic counters from the start of the count (see Fig.43).
Fig.43 Remote Monitoring <Ethernet port> window
Ethernet port to which Commands Counters

the counters refer bar (1) (2) (3)
Sampling interval (4) Counters values (5)

Fig.43 notes
(1) Command:
count, the second one reactivates it.
• Freeze/Unfreeze. The commands are displayed one as an alternative to the other: the first
one interrupts the dynamic display of the values in the window (freezes the window), the
second one reactivates it.
When the window is opened, the dynamic display of the values is active by default.
• Counter Filter. It manages the display of the counters in the window.
When the command is selected, the Select Counters window is opened where every counter
has a box on its side. If the box is:
• Active ( ). The counter is present in the Remote Monitoring... window
• Inactive ( ). The counter is not present in the Remote Monitoring... window
To activate (or deactivate) the display of a counter, activate (or deactivate) the relevant box
and press Ok.
(2) For the description of the counter go to pag.151.

For the Octets counter between brackets, the number of bytes within a second (kB/s) is pointed out.
(3) This parameter points out the seconds missing to the end of the current sampling interval, at the
end of which the new row is displayed.
The wording List update Freezed points out that the window is freezed (see command Freeze/Un-
freeze).
(4) The statistic counters of the considered Ethernet port are freezed by the equipment each minute.
For each port, the equipment can store a maximum of 120 samples (corresponding to 2 hours).
When the maximum value is reached, the new data will overwrite the oldest ones.
(5) At the end of a sampling interval, for each counter, the pointed out value corresponds to the value
registered during the measuring interval.
Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB

LCT
RMON Standard
RMON (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics count,
monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in the docu-
ment RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which must be read for any
further detail.
Outline on the operation of RMON standard
The RMON standard is based on two components: an agent (RMON probe) and a client (remote manage-
ment station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMON tables present on the network devices (equipment, routers,
etc.). The RMON probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves and therefore are located on
each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet Switch of the device to monitor.
The remote management station communicates with the RMON agent to obtain and correlate the RMON
data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows the display and
the analysis of the collected RMON data.

Implementation of the RMON standard in the equipment managed by WEB LCT
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the RMON functionality acts as client which,
through the commands present in the WEB LCT page, allows the analysis of the data collected by the
probes present on each (internal/external) port of the Ethernet Switch of the equipment in compliance with
the RMON standard (currently, the ALCplus2 equipment by the WEB LCT implement the RMON MIB group:
History).
The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMON table of the equipment.
The history of the statistics of every equipment stores, each 60 seconds (sampling range), the value of the
counters of each active Ethernet port. The equipment stores these data into a rotation buffer where, when
full, the new information overwrites the old ones (value set to 120 samples which allow storing 2 hours in
the equipment).
In order to store in the equipment and display the statistics history of a port, it is necessary to activate the
port (see pag.149). This port will remain active until when an user (WEB LCT or SCT/LMT) does not deac-
tivate it (see pag.149).
At the activation of the port, the equipment starts storing the data relevant to the statistics and makes
them available to the user, in form of table, subdivided by single Ethernet port (see pag.149).
During the count, the display of the data in the WEB LCT window can be interrupted. This operation does
not interrupt the count, but freezes only the data present in the window. In fact, when the data update is
re-activated, the window displays the values of all the sampling ranges (up to a maximum of 120), even
those stored in the equipment while the window was freezed.
Ethernet counters (RMON)
The description of the counters is the same reported for the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output
from an Ethernet port (Lan Statistics - see pag.290).
The only difference is the name of the counter which, in some cases, change from the RMON counters with
respect to the Lan Statistics counters.
Tab.3 reports the correspondence of the names for the Ethernet RMON counters.
The counter Utilization is meaningful only as RMON counter and has the following description: the best
estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval, in
hundredths of a percent.
The percentage of usage of the radio port refers to the bit rate of the port at the Switch (1Gbit/s) and not
to the available radio band.
The percentage of usage of the LAN ports instead refers to the real bit rate of the port (10Mbit/s, 100Mbit/
s or 1Gbit/s).
Tab.3 Ethernet counters denomination (RMON)
Ethernet counters denomination Ethernet counters denomination

RMON - History Lan Statistics
Drop Events Dropped Frames
Octects Total Bytes Received
Pkts Total Frames Received
Broadcasts Pkts Broadcast Frames Received
Multicasts Pkts Multicast Frames Received
CRC Align Errors CRC Align Errors
Undersize Pkts Undersize Frames
Oversize Pkts Oversize Frames
Fragments Fragments
Jabbers Jabbers
Collisions Collisions
Utilization -

EQUIPMENT MENU
In the Equipment Menu of the WEB LCT page, the following commands are present:
• Main Menu (pag.153). It displays the Main Menu commands into the contextual area of the
WEB LCT page.
• Equipment (pag.154). It manages the equipment configuration.
• Synchronisation (pag.176). It manages the synchronism sources.
• Base Band (pag.190). It manages the base band parameters.
• Radio (pag.281). It manages the radio parameters.
• Maintenance (pag.289). It manages the loops, PRBS, switching modality, Fade Margin, etc.
• Switch (pag.332). It manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream.
• User Input (pag.340). It manages the local and remote user input.
• User Output (pag.346). It manages the user output.
For equipment in protected configuration the commands relevant to the management of the redundant
parts of the modem and of the radio section are subdivided according to the branches managed by the
equipment.
For example, in case of equipment in protected configuration, two commands will be available for the radio
parameters: Radio Branch 1A and Radio Branch 2A. The first one refers to branch 1, the second one to
branch 2.
For each command, in the relative description, it is pointed out the user profile necessary to be able to use
it. In detail, the wording:
• Monitor. Equipment in connected/monitor status.
• Read only, Read and Write, Station Operator or System. Equipment in connected/login status
and that the user, who has requested the login, has respectively profile Read only, Read and
write, Station operator or System.
Moreover, if the commands allows executing some settings or changes, for each user profile the type of
operation that can be executed is pointed out. The option Reading points out that it is possible to check
the parameters, the option Writing that it is possible to set or to change them.

MAIN MENU
The Main Menu command displays the commands of the Main Menu (pag.37) into the contextual area of
the WEB LCT page.

EQUIPMENT
At the choice of Equipment option, the program displays the following commands:
• Configurator (pag.155). It manages the equipment configuration.

• Mod. Cap/Link ID (pag.164). It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity,
adaptive modulation and link identification number.
• General Preset (pag.172). It manages the modem ad radio parameters.
The Mod. Cap/Link ID and General Preset commands are available only for equipment with the radio
equipped (see Fig.44).

Configurator

The Configurator command manages the equipment configuration.

The configuration parameters change according to the type or to the expansion present in the equipment.
In detail for the ALCplus2 equipment:
IduBoard type or with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion, it is possible to verify/modify:

• Radio configuration (Radio A) (pag.155)
• Management of synchronisation (Sync Enable) (pag.158)
• Belonging of the equipment to a node (Node Type) (pag.159)
• Number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus (Nbr of Eth.
Elements) (pag.159)
• Identifier of the equipment in the ALCplus2 node (Node Element ID) (pag.160)
• Enabling of Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node (STP Mode) (pag.160)
With IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 expansion, it is possible to verify/modify:

• Management of STM-1 streams (STM-1 MST Mode) (pag.159)
Elements) (pag.159)
With IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion, it is possible to verify/modify:

• Management of STM-1 streams (STM-1 MST Mode) (pag.159)
Elements) (pag.159)
• Number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus (Nbr of TDM El-
ements) (pag.161)
• Protection of the TDM nodal bus in the ALCplus2 node (TDM Nodal Bus Protection) (pag.161)
• Identifier of the equipment in the ALplus node (Nodal ID) (pag.161)
• Number of equipment of the ALplus node (Nodal Type) (pag.162)
• Protection of the TDM nodal bus in the ALplus node (Nodal Protection) (pag.162)
When the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is connected to other elements of the node through
nodal Bus Ethernet, it is possible:
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of packets of the ports of the local Ethernet
Switch to/from the ports of the Ethernet switches of the other elements of the ALCplus2 node
(Nodal Port Based VLAN) (pag.162)
To verify/modify the radio configuration
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Configurator command.

The Configurator contextual area opens with the Configurator tab active.
The Radio A parameter points out the equipment radio configuration (see Fig.44).
2. To change the parameter select the option:

• Unequipped. Equipment without radio (radio unequipped).
• 1+0. Equipment with radio in protected configuration.
• 1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential type.
• 1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.
Fig.44 Configurator tab (Configurator contextual area)
This area
displays the
diagram with
the units that
compose the
equipment (1)
(2) (3) The configuration

ALCplus2 equipment
parameters
IduBoard type
present in this
or with
(4) (5) area change
IduBoard Exp. 16E1
depending on the
expansion
type or on the
(6) (7) equipped expansion
(2) (3) (8)

ALCplus2 equipment
with IduBoard
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 (4) (5)
expansion
(6) (7)
(2) (3) (8)
ALCplus2 equipment (4) (5)

with IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
expansion
(Node Type: ALCplus2) (6) (7)
(9) (10)
(2) (3) (8)
ALCplus2 equipment (4) (11)

with IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
expansion
(Node Type: ALplus) (12)
(13)

Fig.44 notes
(1) Radio A. Radio configuration:

• Unequipped. Equipment without radio (radio unequipped).
• 1+0. Equipment with radio in protected configuration.
• 1+1 Hot Standby. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of isofrequential type.
• 1+1 Freq. Div. Equipment with radio in protected configuration of heterofrequential type.
(2) Sync Enable. Management of synchronisation:

• Disable. Synchronisation disable.
• Enable. Synchronisation enable.
(3) STM-1 MST Mode. Management of the STM-1 streams:

• None. The management of STM-1 streams is not active.
• 1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 stream is active (MST modality).
• 1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 stream is active (MSP modality).
• 2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 streams is active (MST modal-
ity).
• 1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 stream is active (MSP modality).
For the STM-1 streams with optical interface, the Automatic Shutdown function is perma-
nently disabled.
(4) Node Type. Belonging of the equipment to a node:

• No Node. The equipment does not belong to a node.
• ALCplus2. The equipment belongs to a ALCplus2 node.
With ALCplus2 node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment in-
terconnected by a nodal Bus Ethernet and/or nodal Bus TDM.
• ALplus. The equipment belongs to an ALplus node.
With ALplus node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment (ALplus-Nodal
Matrix and/or ALCplus2 with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1) interconnected
by a nodal Bus TDM.
Option available only for ALCplus2 with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.
(5) Nbr of Eth. Elements. Number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected by nodal Bus Eth-
ernet:
• No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet.
• 2, 3, ... 8. The first two, three, ... eight elements of the node are interconnected by the nodal
Bus Ethernet.
For example, if the value 3 is set means that the equipment occupying the first three logic
positions within the ALCplus2 node are interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet. The logic
position of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying
number 1 will be considered in first position, 2 in second position and so on.
Parameter available only if the value ALCplus2 is set for the option Node Type.
(6) Node Elements ID. Identifying number of the equipment in the ALCplus2 node:
• 1. In ALCplus2 node, the equipment is identified by number 1.
...
The identifying number represents even the logic position assumed by the equipment in the
ALCplus2 node. This position is important in the definition of the equipment interconnected by the
nodal Bus Ethernet and/or nodal Bus TDM (see note 5 and 8).
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of Eth. Ele-
ments and/or Nbr of TDM Elements.
(7) STP Mode. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol at level of ALCplus2 node (STP node):
• Disable. STP node disabled.
• Bridge1-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 1.

• Bridge2-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs to Bridge 2.
• All-pro. STP node enabled: the equipment belongs both to Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of Eth. Ele-
ments and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an element interconnected by the
nodal bus Ethernet.
This means that the value of Node Elements ID must be a number lower than or equal to the number
set for the parameter Nbr of Eth. Elements.
(8) Nbr of TDM Elements. Number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected by the nodal Bus
TDM:
• No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected with the nodal Bus TDM.
Bus TDM.
For example, if the value 4 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first four
logic positions within the ALCplus2 node are interconnected by the nodal Bus TDM. The logic
position of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying
Parameter available only if the value ALCplus2 is set for the option Node Type.
(9) TDM Nodal Bus Protection.Management of the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the ALCplus2
node2:
• Not Protected. The nodal Bus TDM is not protected.
• Protected. The nodal Bus TDM is protected.
Parameter available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of TDM El-
ements and the equipment, which the WEB LCT page refers to, is an element interconnected by the
nodal Bus TDM.
This means that the value of Node Elements ID must be a number lower than or equal to the number
set for the parameter Nbr of TDM Elements.
(10) Nodal ID. Identifier name of the equipment in the ALplus node:
• Node A. The equipment belongs to a nodal system as node A.
• Node B. The equipment belongs to a nodal system as node B.
• Node C. The equipment belongs to a nodal system as node C.
Parameter available only if the value ALplus is set for the option Node Type.
(11) Nodal Type. Number of equipment composing the ALplus node.

• 2 Element. Nodal system with two equipment.
• 3 Element. Nodal system with three equipment.
(12) Nodal Protection. Management of the protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALplus node:
• Not Protected. The nodal Bus TDM is not protected.
• Protected. The nodal Bus TDM is protected.
To verify/modify the management of synchronisation

The Sync Enable parameter points out the management of synchronisation (see Fig.44).

• Disable. Synchronisation disable.
• Enable. Synchronisation enable.

To verify/modify the management of STM-1 streams
Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or Idu-
Board Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.

The STM-1 MST Mode parameter points out the management of the STM-1 stream (see Fig.44).
2. To change the parameter, select the option:
• None. The management of STM-1 streams is not active.
• 1+0. The management of one unprotected STM-1 stream is active (MST mode).
• 1+1 MSP. The management of one protected STM-1 stream is active (MSP mode).
• 2 x (1+0) MST. The management of two unprotected STM-1 streams is active (MST mode).
• 1+1 MSP No ALS. The management of one protected STM-1 stream is active (MSP mode). For
the STM-1 streams with optical interface, the Automatic Shutdown function is permanently dis-
abled.
To verify/modify the belonging of the equipment to a node

The option Node Type points out if the equipment is element of a node (see Fig.44).

• No Node. The equipment does not belong to a node.
• ALCplus2. The equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node.
With ALCplus2 node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 ALCplus2 equipment inter-
connected by a nodal Bus Ethernet and/or nodal Bus TDM.
• ALplus. The equipment belongs to an ALplus node.
With ALplus node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 3 equipment (ALplus-Nodal Matrix
and/or ALCplus2 with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1) interconnected by a nodal
Bus TDM.
Option available only for ALCplus2 with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1.
To verify/modify the number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with

Ethernet nodal Bus
Operation available and meaningful only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node.

The Nbr of Eth. Elements parameter points out the number of elements of the ALCplus2 node intercon-
nected with Ethernet nodal Bus (see Fig.44).
This option is present only if the value ALCplus2 is set for the option Node Type.

• No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected with the nodal Bus Ethernet.
Bus Ethernet.

For example, if the value 3 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first three logic
positions within the ALCplus2 node are interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet. The logic po-
sition of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying
The value 1 is not available because the nodal interconnection is realized among minimum two
and maximum eight equipment.
To verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the ALCplus2 node
Operation available and meaningful only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and for which
the number of elements interconnected by a nodal Bus Ethernet and/or nodal Bus TDM has been already
defined.

The Node Element ID parameter points out the number identifying the equipment in the ALCplus2 node
(see Fig.44).
This option is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of Eth Ele-
ments and/or Nbr of TDM Elements.
2. In order to modify the parameter, select the option relevant to the number you wish to assign to the
equipment: 1 ÷ 8.
The values available in the list change depending on the maximum number of elements interconnected
by nodal Bus Ethernet and/or by the nodal Bus TDM composing the node. For example, if an ALCplus2
node with 4 elements interconnected by nodal Bus Ethernet and 3 elements by nodal Bus TDM has been
defined, the values 1, 2, 3 and 4 will be available in the list.
The identifying number represents even the logic position assumed by the equipment in the ALCplus2
node. This position is important in the definition of the equipment interconnected by the nodal Bus Eth-
ernet and/or nodal Bus TDM.
To verify/modify the enabling of Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node
Operation available and meaningful only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node, for which the
number of elements interconnected by nodal Bus Ethernet has been already defined and the equipment,
which the WEB LCT pages refers to, is an element interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet.

The STP Mode option points out the enabling status of the protocol Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2
node (see Fig.44).
This option is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of Eth Ele-
ments and the value of the option Node Elements ID is a number lower than or equal to the number
set for the option Nbr of Eth. Elements.
• Disable. Protocol Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node disabled.
• Bridge1-pro. Protocol Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node enabled: the equipment belongs
to Bridge 1.
• Bridge2-pro. Protocol Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node enabled: the equipment belongs
to Bridge 2.
• All-pro. Protocol Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node enabled: the equipment belongs both
to Bridge 1 and Bridge 2.

To verify/modify the number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with
TDM nodal Bus
Operation available only for equipment provided with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 and
belonging to a ALCplus2 node.

The Nbr of TDM Elements parameter points out the number of elements of the ALCplus2 node intercon-
nected with TDM nodal Bus (see Fig.44).
This option is available only if the value ALCplus2 is set for the option Node Type.
• No Elements. No element of the node is interconnected by the nodal Bus TDM.
Bus TDM.
For example, if the value 4 is set, this means that the equipment occupying the first four logic
positions within the ALCplus2 node are interconnected by the nodal Bus TDM. The logic position
of the equipment is given by its identifying number: the equipment with identifying number 1
will be considered in first position, 2 in second position and so on.
The value 1 is not available because the nodal interconnection is realized among minimum two
and maximum eight equipment.
To verify/modify the protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALCplus2 node
number of elements interconnected by nodal Bus TDM has been already defined and the equipment, which
the WEB LCT pages refers to, is an element interconnected by the nodal Bus TDM.

The option TDM Nodal Bus Protection points out the protection of the TDM nodal Bus in the ALCplus2
node (see Fig.44).
This option is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of TDM Ele-
ments and the value of the option Node Elements ID is a number lower than or equal to the number
set for the option Nbr of TDM Elements.

• Not Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is not protected.
• Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is protected.
To verify/modify the identifier of the equipment in the ALplus node
belonging to a ALplus2 node.

The Nodal ID parameter points out the name identifying the equipment in the ALplus node (see Fig.44).
This option is present only if the value ALplus is set for the option Node Type.

• Node A. The equipment belongs to a nodal system as node A.

• Node B. The equipment belongs to a nodal system as node B.
• Node C. The equipment belongs to a nodal system as node C.
To verify/modify the number of equipment of the ALplus node
belonging to a ALplus node.

The Nodal Type parameter points out the number of equipment of the ALplus node (see Fig.44).
• 2 Element. Nodal system with two equipment.
• 3 Element. Nodal system with three equipment.
To verify/modify the protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALplus node
belonging to a ALplus node.

The Nodal Protection parameter points out indica la protection of the TDM nodal bus in ALplus node
(see Fig.44).
• Not Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is not protected.
• Protected. The TDM nodal Bus is protected.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the transit of the packets of the ports of the
local Ethernet Switch to/from the ports of the Ethernet switches of the other ele-
ments of the ALCplus2 node
number of elements interconnected by nodal Bus Ethernet has been already defined and the equipment,
which the WEB LCT pages refers to, is an element interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet.

The Configurator contextual area opens.
2. Select the Nodal Port Based VLan tab.

In the tab there is a table (Port Based VLan) where the enabling status of the transit of the packets of
the ports of the local Ethernet Switch to/from the ports of the Ethernet Switch of the first element of
the ALCplus2 node interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet is pointed out (see Fig.45).
The tab is available only if a value different from No Elements is set for the option Nbr of Eth Elements
in the Configurator tab, and the value of the option Node Elements ID is a number lower than or equal
to the number set for the option Nbr of Eth. Elements.

3. To modify the enabling status of a port:
a. Select the bar relevant to the equipment of the node for which you wish to modify the status of
the ports.
b. Select, in the Port Based VLan table, the check-box corresponding to the combination: port of
local Ethernet Switch - port of Ethernet Switch of node element.
At each selection, the check-box assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if the
check sign is present, it is removed and vice versa).
The presence of the check sign means that the transit between the two ports is allowed. Its ab-
sence means that the transit is forbidden.
The transit of the packets of the ports LAN 1 and LAN 2 of the local Ethernet Switch from/to the
ports of the Ethernet Switch of the specific node element is automatically enabled by the system as
pointed out in Fig.45.
If you wish to disable one of this check-box, the message Changing these settings may result in loss
of Ethernet traffic through the node. Continue? is displayed, warning that the change of the setting can
cause the loss of traffic of the nodal Bus Ethernet.
Fig.45 Nodal Port Based VLan tab (Configurator contextual area)
Ports of Ethernet
switch of the
specific equipment
of ALCplus2 node
Enabling status
Equipment of of the ports in
ALCplus2 node relation to the
interconnected transit of the
by Ethernet packets (table
nodal bus (1) Port Based VLan)
(3)
Ethernet ports
of the equipment
which you are
connected to (ports
of local Ethernet
switch) (2)
Fig.45 notes
(1) Each bar corresponds to an equipment of the ALCplus2 node interconnected by nodal Bus Ethernet.
The number reported in the bar after the prefix IDU points out the equipment identifying number.
It is possible to display the status of the table Port Based VLan of one element at a time.
(2) The colour of the ports Lan 1 and Lan 2 is different with respect to the others to point out that the
ports are used for the Ethernet nodal interconnection.
(3) In the table Port Based VLan each check-box represents a different combination: local Ethernet
Switch port - Ethernet Switch port of the node element.
The presence of the check sign in a check-box points out that, for this combination of ports, the
transit of the packets is allowed. The absence of the check sign points out that the transit is not
allowed.
The transit of the packets of the ports LAN 1 and LAN 2 of the local Ethernet Switch from/to the
ports of the Ethernet Switch of the specific node element is automatically enabled by the system.
If you wish to disable one of this check-box, the message Changing these settings may result in
loss of Ethernet traffic through the node. Continue? is displayed, warning that the change of the
setting can cause the loss of traffic of the nodal Bus Ethernet.

Mod. Cap/Link ID

Command available only for equipment provided with the radio (see option Radio A - Fig.44).
The Mod. Cap/Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number
• To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation (pag.164).
• To display the table summarizing the radio transport (pag.166).
• To modify the reference band/modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation) (pag.167).
• To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation (ACM Engine) (pag.167).
• To modify the configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.
These parameters change depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation itself.
In detail, if the adaptive modulation is:
• Active, it is possible:
• To modify the power profile of RF transmitter (Tx Power Constant Peak Mode)
(pag.167).
• To modify the lower and upper thresholds of the modulation (Upper Modulation/Lower
Modulation) (pag.168).
• To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams)
(Permanent TDM Traffic) (pag.168).
• To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
(Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.168).
• Inactive, it is possible:
• To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams)
(Permanent TDM Traffic) (pag.168).
• To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams)
(Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.168).
• To verify/modify the link identification number (pag.168)
• To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) (pag.169)
The operation:
• To verify/modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams) (Per-
manent TDM Traffic) is NOT available for the ALCplus2 equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp.
16E1 type.
• To verify/modify the priority of the E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.) is NOT available for the ALCplus2
equipment of IduBoard type.
For more information about the adaptive modulation go to pag.170.
To verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > Mod.Cap/Link ID command.

The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens with the Modulation & Capacity tab active.
The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation (see Fig.46).
When the window is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected reference
band/modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (push-
button Apply) the new reference band/modulation.

Fig.46 Modulation & Capacity tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
(2)
(1) (3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
(7) (8)
(11)
(9) (10)
(12)
Fig.46 notes
(1) ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation. Option:

• Enable. The adaptive modulation is enabled.
• Disable. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
(2) Tx Power Constant Peak Mode. Power profile of the RF transmitter. Option:
• Enable. Power increasing when the modulation decreases.
• Disable. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
This parameter is available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
The profile is used only if a modulation corresponding to the minimum modulation has been selected
as reference.
(3) Bandwidth & Modulation. Channelling - Modulation.

For each one of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be config-
ured.
(4) Tx Power Mode. Current status of the power profile of the RF transmitter. Value:
• Average. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.
• Peak. Power increasing when the modulation changes
(5) Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the Tx modula-
tion.
This parameter is available and meaningful only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
(6) Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 streams assigned permanently (high priority streams). These
streams cannot be never discarded by the adaptive modulation.
The maximum number of E1 streams which can be assigned permanently is pointed out next to the
box.
This parameter is available and meaningful only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
(7) ACM Table. This table shows, for each ACM level, the number of E1 streams which can be used.
Depending on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be available.
In detail, if the adaptive modulation is:
• Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference modulation
(Bandwidth & Modulation).

• Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile included between
the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
(8) Use the scrolling bar to display the detail of all the ACM profiles.
Selecting the arrow , it is possible to expand the list in such a way to display all the ACM profiles
at the same time. To return to the standard display, select the arrow .
(9) ACM profile. 8 profiles ACM are available from 4AQM to 256QAM. An additional profile on 4QAM with
low rate FEC (4QAM Strong) is present too.
(10) Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned to
the TDM traffic for every ACM profile.
(11) Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile. These streams
will be discarded by adaptive modulation according to the order configured by the user (see Fig.49).
(12) Pressing this push-button displays the table summarizing the radio transport and its subdivision be-
tween Ethernet and E1, in relation to the current band/modulation (see Fig.47).
To display the table summarizing the radio transport

2. Press View Current Config.
The table summarizing the radio transport and its subdivision between Ethernet and E1, in relation to
the current reference band/modulation is displayed (see Fig.47).
Fig.47 Table summarizing the radio transport
(1)
(2)
Fig.47 notes
(1) Equipment identifier.

The field is not present if no identifier is assigned to the equipment.
(2) Column:
• Active Modulation. ACM profile.
• Global Capacity. Global capacity associated to the ACM profile.
The value is given by: Ethernet Capacity + TDM High Priority + TDM Low Priority + Mainte-
nance Channel.

• Ethernet Capacity. Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries.
• TDM Capacity - High Priority. Capacity used by the high priority E1 tributaries (static).
The value is given by: Permanent TDM Traffic + Local Remote Telemetry Link.
For the ALCplus2 equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp. 16E1 type the Permanent TDM
Traffic value is 0.
• TDM Capacity - Low Priority. Capacity used by the low priority E1 tributaries (dynamic) (Ex-
tra TDM Traffic).
• Tx Power. Power in output to the transmitter.
To modify the reference band/modulation

The Bandwidth & Modulation parameter points out the current reference band/modulation (see Fig.46).
For each one of the radio channelling, the modulation and the consequent capacity can be configured.
2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value.

If the message Operation Fail! Wrong value assigned is displayed, the selected band/modulation is not
enabled for the equipment.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. To verify the enabled features, select the Fea-
tures Management (pag.146) command.
To modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation

The ACM Engine parameter points out the operating status of the adaptive modulation (see Fig.46).
2. To modify the parameter, select the option:

• Disable. Adaptive modulation disabled.
• Enable. Adaptive modulation enabled.
If the option Enable is not available, the use of the adaptive modulation is not enabled.
Some equipment features are available after enabling. To verify the enabled features, select the Fea-
tures Management (pag.146) command.
To modify the power profile of the RF transmitter (ACM enabled)
Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The profile is used only if a modulation equal to the minimum modulation has been selected as reference.

The Tx Power Constant Peak Mode parameter points out the power profile of the RF transmitter (see
Fig.46).
2. To modify the parameter, select the value:

• Enable. Power increasing when the modulation decreases.
• Disable. Mean power constant when the modulation changes.

To modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM ena-
bled)
Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

The Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation parameters respectively points out the upper threshold
and the lower threshold of the modulation (see Fig.46).
2. To modify the parameters Upper Modulation and Lower Modulation, select the value relevant to the
wished modulation.
To modify the number of E1 streams permanently allocated (high priority streams)
Operation available only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.

The Permanent TDM Traffic parameter points out the number of E1 streams permanently allocated
(high priority streams) (see Fig.46).
2. To modify the parameter, select the wished value.
To modify the number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority

streams)

The Extra TDM Cap parameter points out the number of E1 streams which must be kept active for the
specific ACM profile (see Fig.46).
2. To modify the parameter, use the scrolling arrows to set the wished value.
To verify/modify the link identification number

The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens.
2. Select the Local Link ID tab.

The Local Link ID parameter points out the link identification number (see Fig.48).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the new number (value between 1 and 255).
The setting of the 0 value corresponds to the non-selection of the identification number.

The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

Fig.48 Local Link ID tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Identificative
number of the
connection (1)
Fig.48 notes
(1) The current value is displayed into the Value field. The lack of selection of said identification (val-
ue=0) is shown by the wording Not Used.
To verify/modify the priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.)

The Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area opens.
2. Select the Extra TDM Priority tab.

The tab displays the priority of the E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.)
3. In order to modify the sequence, execute one of the following actions:

• Move a single E1 upwards by one place (higher priority)
Select the tributary and press Up.
• Move a single E1 downwards by one place (lower priority).
Select the tributary and press Down.
(1).
• Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the following way: A, B, 1, 2, 3, ... n
Press A B 1-16 (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or A B 1-19 (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or
IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment).
(1),
• Sort the E1s (from top to bottom) in the following way: 1, 2, 3, ... n A, B.
Press 1-16 A B (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or 1-19 A B (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or
IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment).
(1) n = 16 (IduBoard Exp. 16E1 equipment) or 19 (IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod.
2xSTM-1 16E1 equipment).

Fig.49 Extra TDM Priority tab (Mod.Cap/Link ID contextual area)
Maximum
priority
Sorting
sequence
of Extra TDM
E1 streams
(1)
Minimum
priority
Fig.49 notes
(1) Wording:
• A. Tributary A (first E1 tributary of base board).
• B. Tributary B (second E1 tributary of base board).
• 1...n. E1 radio.
n = 16 (equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion) or 19 (equipment with IduBoard
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion).
When an E1 stream is grey, this means that this stream is available but is not included within
the maximum number of Extra TDM E1 streams carried by the configured radio frame.
For example, in the figure the maximum number of Extra TDM streams configured for the radio
transport is 8. Then, the first 8 E1s from top to bottom in the list will be displayed black, the remnant
ones grey.
The order, as displayed in the window, goes from highest priority (first position in the list) to lowest
one (last position in the list).
This means that the E1 at the bottom of the list will be the first stream to be discarded by the adap-
tive modulation, the penultimate E1 in the list will be the second to be discarded and so on until
reaching the E1 at the top of the list which will be the last stream to be discarded by the adaptive
modulation.
Adaptive modulation (more info)
Ethernet transport
ALCplus2 equipment assigns all the capacity not assigned to the TDM transport to the Ethernet interface.
Then, in absence of TDM traffic, the Ethernet capacity coincides with the total available capacity.
TDM transport
(ALCplus2 equipment of IduBoard or IduBoard Exp. 16E1 type)
The TDM traffic is assigned to every ACM profile selecting the number of E1 streams which must be trans-
ported.

The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. For each ACM profile, the value Extra TDM Cap must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap -
Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 2 (ALCplus2 equipment of IduBoard
type) or 18 (ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 expansion).
b. When the user sets a value Extra TDM Cap for an ACM profile, WEB LCT automatically checks
and possibly modifies the values Extra TDM Cap of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in such
a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value Extra TDM Cap set by the user.
Key:
• Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned
to the TDM traffic for each ACM profile.
• Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile.
TDM transport
(ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1
expansion)
The TDM band can be subdivided in two parts: one not subjected to ACM, destined to the privileged traffic
(high priority) and not shareable with the Ethernet band (Permanent TDM Traffic), and one subjected to
ACM and destined to the lower priority traffic, possibly shareable with the Ethernet traffic (Extra TDM Cap).
The rules to respect for the setting of TDM traffic are the following:
a. The number of high priority E1 traffic channels must be lower than or equal to value displayed
next to the Permanent TDM Traffic box.
b. The value of Permanent TDM Traffic fixes the minimum allowed modulation as it blocks all the
modulations for which Max TDM Cap is lower than Permanent TDM Traffic (WEB LCT highlights
the minimum allowed modulation as consequence of the value Permanent TDM Traffic set disa-
bling all the not allowed modulations).
c. For each ACM profile, the value Extra TDM Cap must be lower than or equal to Max TDM Cap -
Permanent TDM Traffic and cannot be never greater than 21.
d. When the user sets a value Extra TDM Cap for an ACM profile, WEB LCT automatically checks
and possibly modifies the values Extra TDM Cap of the higher modulation ACM profiles, in such
a way they result higher than or, at most, equal to the value Extra TDM Cap set by the user.
e. A change of Permanent TDM Traffic can cause a violation of rule c. In this case, WEB LCT only
highlights which are the out-of-range values of Max TDM Cap (the wordings of the row of the
ACM profile become red) and the restore of the correct values is at user’s charge.
Key:
• Max TDM Cap. Maximum number of (high and low priority) E1 streams which can be assigned
to the TDM traffic for each ACM profile.
• Extra TDM Cap. Number of (low priority) E1 streams assigned to each ACM profile.
• Permanent TDM Traffic. Number of E1 streams permanently assigned (high priority streams).
Priority of dynamic E1 Radio streams (Extra TDM Cap)
The user, via WEB LCT, can define the priority of dynamic Radio E1s (Extra TDM Cap) (see Fig.49).
This priority determines the modality used to discard the dynamic Radio E1s when the ACM profile changes.
Reference modulation and power profile of the transmitter
The choice of the reference modulation and of the power profile depends on the license type owned by the
network operator.
The reference modulation determines the emission spectrum to be in compliance with the current laws.
The power profile increasing when the modulation decreases can be enabled according to the standard
ETSI EN 302 217-2-2: the power as function of the modulation can be only lower then or equal to the power
of the reference modulation.
More information is reported in the equipment manual ALCplus2.

General Preset

Command available only for equipment provided with the radio (see option Radio A - Fig.44).
The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.
In detail, it is possible to verify/modify:
• Threshold level of the signal at reception (pag.172)
• Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol (pag.173)
• Enabling of the switch in transmission (pag.173)
• T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control) (pag.174)
• Reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control) (pag.174)
• Radio branch label (pag.174)
For more information about the local/remote synchronization protocol go to pag.175.
To verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Equipment > General Preset command.
The General Preset contextual area opens with the General tab active.
The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter points out the threshold level
of the signal at reception (see Fig.50). Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.
2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.
Fig.50 General tab (General Preset contextual area)
Threshold
of the signal
at reception
Status of the
local/remote
synchronization
protocol (1)
Fig.50 notes
(1) Option:
• Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.
• Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.

To verify/modify the status of the local/remote synchronization protocol
The General Preset contextual area opens with the General tab active.
The Synchronization Setup Protocol parameter points out the state of the local/remote synchronization
protocol (see Fig.50).

• Enable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is active.
• Disable. The local/remote synchronization protocol is inactive.
To verify/modify the enabling of the switch in transmission
Operation available only for the equipment in 1+1 isofrequential configuration. For the 1+1 etherofre-
quential configuration, the operation is not available because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the
same time as the selection of the signal is made in reception.
The General Preset contextual area opens.
2. Select the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab.
In the Tx Switch Control area the enabling of the switch in transmission is displayed (see Fig.51).

• Enable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is enabled.
• Disable. The switch in transmission as consequence of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodulator Fail
Alarm) in reception of the remote equipment is not enabled.
Fig.51 Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (General Preset contextual area)
Enabling of
the switch in
transmission Select this
(1) push-button
to reset the
Transmitter
Switch on
Remote...
(3)
(2)
Fig.51 notes
(1) Enabling status of the switch in transmission as consequences of alarms (…BER Alarm, …Demodu-
lator Fail Alarm) on the signal received from the equipment located at the other side of the link (re-
mote equipment). If active, the option:
• Enable, the switch is enabled.
• Disable, the switch is not enabled.

(2) When the switch in transmission is active (see previous note), this switch is executed when the
number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T. The box:
• Check Period, points out the time interval T.
• Alarm Threshold, points out the number of alarmed seconds N.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place con-
temporarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
(3) The Transmitter Switch on Remote... notifies the switch in transmission as consequence of alarms
on the signal received from the remote equipment.
To verify/modify the T and N parameters (Tx Switch Control)
2. Select the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (see Fig.51).
The box:
• Check Period points out the time interval T (expressed in seconds) when the number of alarmed
seconds must be > N so that the switch in transmission takes place.
• Alarm Threshold points out the number of alarmed seconds N.
3. To modify the parameters, type the new values in the relevant boxes (Check Period box: value between
1 and 300; Alarm Threshold: value between 1 and 60).
When the enabling status of the switch in transmission is active (Tx Switch Control), this switch is ex-
ecuted when the number of alarmed seconds is > N within a time interval T.
With number of alarmed seconds we mean the seconds when an alarm condition takes place contempo-
rarily on both the Rx of the remote equipment.
To reset the Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm (Tx Switch Control)
2. Select the Tx Sw on Remote Alarms tab (see Fig.51).
3. Press Alarm Reset.
To verify/modify the radio branch label
2. Select the Radio Branch Label tab.

The Radio Branch Label parameter points out the label that identifies the radio branch (see Fig.52).
3. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).

Fig.52 Radio Branch Label tab (General Preset contextual area)
Label that
identifies the
radio branch
Local/remote synchronization protocol (more info)
The local/remote synchronization protocol (Synchronization Setup Protocol) is a functionality allowing the
management the change of radio configuration between two equipment connected by link, in such a way
to reduce the out-of-service time at each repartition of the available radio band and to keep the supervision
on the remote equipment active.
This management works in the following way.

When a parameter is changed is the local (or remote) equipment, the change is not immediately executed,
but it is freezed. The system raises the alarm RADIO... Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch to signal
to the user that a mismatch is present between the radio configuration of the local equipment and that of
the remote equipment. The alarm remains active until the operator executes the same change in the equip-
ment located at the other side of the link.
When the change is executed in the remote equipment, the same change is automatically executed even
in the local equipment, becoming then effective on both the equipment of the link.
The radio parameters, whose change is managed by the local/remote synchronization protocol as de-
scribed above, are the following:
• Reference modulation (Fig.46 - Bandwidth & Modulation).
• Profile mask (Fig.46 - Upper Modulation, Lower Modulation).
• ACM (Fig.46 - ACM Engine).
• Number high-priority channels (Fig.46 - Permanent TDM Traffic).
• Number of low-priority channels of every profile (Fig.46 - Extra TDM Cap.).
• Priority of Extra TDM channels (Fig.49)
The local/remote synchronization protocol, when active, besides the management of the change of the ra-
dio parameters, allows managing the radio configuration of the equipment in the link when the alarm RA-
DIO... Link Telemetry Fail is present.
This alarm, if it is the only radio alarm active, points out a mismatch on the band repartition between the
two equipment.
In this condition, the modality called Rescue setup is automatically activated, which forces both the equip-
ment to the following condition:
• Modulation: 4QAM (respecting ETSI spectral masks)
• Radio traffic: all Ethernet
The activation of the Rescue setup modality is pointed out by the activation of the alarm RADIO... Rescue
Setup Active. The alarm is removed when the operator realigns the radio parameters in both the equipment
of the link.
The synchronization protocol can be enabled and disabled by the user (see pag.173). By default, the pro-
tocol is enabled.
If the user disables it, it remains disabled until the user re-enables it.
The local/remote synchronization is implemented by a proprietary protocol. It is meaningful and available
for the radio equipment of type ALCplus2 or ALplus2.

SYNCHRONISATION
Curr. Profile Reading Monitor, Read Only

Reading/Writing Read and Write*, Station Operator, System
* Read and Write user profile can set only the parameters relevant to the maintenance (MAN. OP).
This command is available only if the synchronisation management is enabled (see Fig.44)
The Synchronisation command manages the synchronism sources.

• To verify the status of the synchronism sources (pag.176)
• To manage the synchronism sources in input:
• To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input (pag.178)
• To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input (pag.180)
• To force the use of a synchronism source in input (pag.180)
• To set a synchronism source in input as preferential (pag.180)
• To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2 (pag.181)
• To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A (T0) or STM-1/NODAL
B (T0) (pag.181)
• To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input (pag.181)
• To manage the equipment inner synchronism (T0):
• To force the status of the T0 synchronisation (pag.182)
• To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism (pag.182)
• To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and define the interface (output/
input) of tributary A/B (pag.182)
• To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation (pag.183)
For more information about the management of synchronisation go to pag.184.
To verify the status of the synchronism sources
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Synchronisation command.

The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active.
The tab displays the status of the synchronism sources (see Fig.53).
Fig.53 SETS tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Indication of
the input
source from
which the
equipment
Input
“gets” the T0
synchronism
synchronisation
sources
for T0 (1)
Input
synchronism
sources
for T0 (1)
T0
synchronism
source (2)

Fig.53 notes
(1) Each synchronization source in input is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are illus-
trated here below.
Status and Synchronism source Forced use of
priority use of name (a) the source (d)
the source (b)
Alarms status
Source type (c) of the source (e)
a. Wording:
• TE LAN-3. Source extracted from LAN 3.
• TE LAN-4. Source extracted from LAN 4.
• T2/T3 1. Source extracted from the tributary A.
• T2/T3 2. Source extracted from tributary B or from one of the E1 of the expansion.
• RADIO (T0). Source extracted from the Radio.
• STM-1/NODAL A (T0), STM-1/NODAL B (T0). Sources extracted from the STM-1 (1 or 2)
or from the Nodal Bus (1 or 2).
• STM-1 [1] (T0) or STM-1 (T0). Source extracted from the first STM-1 tributary.
• STM-1 [2] (T0). Source extracted from the second STM-1 tributary.
• Nodal 1 (T0). Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 1.
• Nodal 2 (T0). Source extracted from the Nodal Bus 2.
• Internal Source. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (12,8MHz STRATUM 3).
The detail of the signal/configuration relevant to every single s source and the availability of the
source depending on the type/configuration of the equipment is pointed out in Tab.4.
In the boxes representing the synchronism sources in input for which the user can change the
parameters, the pointer assumes the shape of an hand.
The Internal Source synchronism source has not configuration parameters.
b. Wording:
• P: D. The synchronism source is not enabled.
• P: <1÷9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by the
number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
c. Wording:
• Trib. A. E1 tributary of the base board (tributary A).
• Trib. B. E1 tributary of the base board (tributary B).
• Trib. <number>. E1 tributary of the expansion.
• STM-1 <STM-1 number>. Tributary STM-1 (1 or 2)
• Nodal 1. First Nodal Bus.
• Nodal 2. Second Nodal Bus.
Not all the synchronism sources are provided with this information.
d. Colour box:
• White. The source in input has not been manually forced by the operator for the gener-
ation of the T0 synchronism.
• Light blue. The source has been manually forced (Manual Operation).
e. Colour box:
• White. There are not active alarms.
• Red. At least one source alarm has been activated.
(2) T0: equipment inner synchronism.

Status of T0 source (a)
Forced use of Status of T0

T0 source (b) alarms (c)
a. Wording:
• (Locked). The input source, set for the creation of the T0 synchronism, is physically
present, the relevant signal is valid and it is used by the equipment for the creation of
the inner synchronism.

• (Hold Over). All the possible sources in input are degraded. In this case the equipment
keeps the estimated frequency of the last used external source.
• (Free Running). The T0 synchronism is created by equipment inner reference (Internal
Source), because the other input synchronism sources are not physically present, their
signal is degraded or they are disabled.
b. Colour box:
• White. The user has not forced the status of the T0 synchronism.
• Light blue. The user has forced the status of the T0 synchronism (Manual Operation).
c. Colour box:
• White. There are not active alarms.
• Red. At least one T0 alarm has been activated.
To enable/disable the use of a synchronism source in input

The Synchronisation contextual area opens with the SETS tab active (see Fig.53).
2. Select the input synchronism source.

The Configuration: <source name> window opens.
The Timing Synk Priority area points out the usage status of the synchronism source (see Fig.54).
3. To enable the use of the source:
a. Activate the Enabled control box.

The cursor label changes from Priority: Input to Priority: <number>.
b. Move the cursor on a number comprised between 1 and 9 according to the desired priority level
to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
To disable the use of the source:
a. Deactivate the Enabled control box.

The cursor label changes from Priority: <number> to Priority: Input.
Fig.54 Configuration: <input synchronism source> window
Source
alarms (1)
Status of
Status
preferential
of forced
usage of
usage of the
the source
source (2)
(3)
Usage status
and priority
level of the
source (4)
The contents
of this area
change
according to
the selected
input
synchronism
source (5)

Fig.54 notes
(1) The colour of each box displays the status of the alarm:
• Grey. The alarm is not active.
(2) Option:
• Forced Switch Off. The source is not forced for the generation of the internal synchronism.
• Forced Switch On. The source is forced for the generation of the internal synchronism.
(3) Option:
• Preferential Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled
synchronism sources.
• Preferential On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the internal synchronism.
(4) The box Enabled points out the use status of the source. In detail, if the box is:
• Active. The source is enabled to use.
• Inactive. The source is not enabled to use.
The parameter Priority: <1÷9> points out the priority level of the source: 1 maximum priority, 9
minimum priority. The word Priority: Input points out that the source is not enabled.
(5) If the selected synchronism source in input is:

• T2/T3 1. The Source E1 area contains the Type parameter which points out the interface of
tributary A:
• T2 (2Mb/s). 2Mbit/s interface.
• T3 (2MHz). 2MHz interface.
• T2/T3 2. The Source E1 area contains the Unit parameter which points out the tributary used
as synchronism source:
• Trib. B. Tributary B.
If this value is active, the area Source E1 contains the parameter Type which points
out the interface of tributary B:
• T2 (2Mb/s). 2Mbit/s interface.
• T3 (2MHz). 2MHz interface.
• Trib. 1-16/Trib. 1-32. One of the E1 tributaries of the expansion.
If this value is active, the area Source E1 contains the parameter PPI which points out
the number of the tributary (2Mb/s interface) selected as synchronism source.
The Trib. 1-16 value is available for ALCplus2 with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 or IduBoard
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion. While the Trib. 1-32 value is available for
ALCplus2 with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 expansion.
• STM-1/NODAL A (T0), STM-1/NODAL B (T0). The Source area contains a box pointing out
the type of source used as synchronism:
• STM-1 [1] or STM-1. First STM-1 stream.
• STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1 stream.
• Nodal 1. First nodal bus.
• Nodal 2. Second nodal bus.
The availability of the values changes depending on the type and on the configuration of the
equipment as depicted in Tab.4.
The synchronism sources TE LAN-3, TE LAN-4, RADIO (T0), STM-1 [1] (T0), STM-1 [2] (T0), STM-
1 (T0) Nodal 1 (T0) and Nodal 2 (T0) are not provided with the Source area.

To verify/modify the use priority of a synchronism source in input
Operation available and meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.53).


The Timing Synk Priority area points out the priority level of the source (see Fig.54).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the number representing the wished priority.
The user can set a number between 1 and 9, where 1 represents the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
To force the use of a synchronism source in input
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.53).


The Manual Operation parameter points out the forcing status of the source (see Fig.54).

• Forced Switch Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the internal synchronism.
• Forced Switch On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the internal synchronism.
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing
and displaying the current setting of timeout.
5. Press Yes to continue the operation.

The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To set a synchronism source in input as preferential
Operation meaningful only when the use of the synchronism source is active (see Fig.53).


The Manual Switch parameter points out if the source is used as preferential (see Fig.54).

• Preferential Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources.
• Preferential On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for
the generation of the internal synchronism.

To set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2

2. Select the input synchronism source T2/T3 2.

The Configuration: T2/T3 2 window opens.
The Source E1 area points out the tributary used as synchronism source (see Fig.54).
3. To change the parameter, in the box Unit select the value:

• Trib. B. Tributary B.
When this value is selected, the Type box is displayed which points out the interface used by the
tributary B.
• Trib. 1-16/Trib. 1-32. One of the E1 tributaries of the expansion.
When this value is selected, the cursor PPI <number of the selected PPI> is displayed. Move the
cursor over the wished number of tributary.
The Trib. 1-16 value is available for ALCplus2 with IduBoard Exp. 16E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod.
2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion. While the Trib. 1-32 value is available for ALCplus2 with IduBoard
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 expansion.
To set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A (T0) or

STM-1/NODAL B (T0)
if the management of the STM-1 streams and/or the management of the nodal configuration is active (see
Fig.44).

2. Select the input synchronism source STM-1/NODAL A (T0) or STM-1/NODAL B (T0).

The Configuration: STM-1/NODAL A (T0) or Configuration: STM-1/NODAL B (T0) window opens.
The Source area points out the source type used as synchronism as the specific source (see Fig.54).

• STM-1 [1] or STM-1 (T0). First STM-1 stream.
• STM-1 [2]. Second STM-1 stream.
• Nodal 1. First nodal bus.
• Nodal 2. Second nodal bus.
The availability of the values changes depending on the type and on the configuration of the equipment
as depicted in Tab.4.
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A (T0), this value will not be available for the source
STM-1/NODAL B (T0) and vice versa.
To verify the alarms status of synchronism source in input


The Alarms area points out the status of the alarms relevant to the source (see Fig.54).

To force the status of the T0 synchronisation

2. Select the T0 synchronism source.

The Configuration Parameters window opens.
The Status Control area points out the status of the T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The T0 synchronism is generated by the equipment internal reference (Internal
Source).
• Hold Over. The Hold Over status is forced.
• Locked. The locking of the synchronism to an external source is enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.

The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To verify the alarms status of T0 synchronism

2. Select the T0 synchronism source.

The Configuration Parameters window opens.
The Alarm Report area points out the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.
The colour of each box displays the status of the specific alarm:
• Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor or Warning.
To manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and set the in-
terface (output/input) of tributary A/B
The setting of the tributary (A or B) as output of synchronism T12 compromises the use of
the tributary (A or B) as traffic tributary.

The Synchronisation contextual area opens (see Fig.53).
2. Select the E1 Source Type tab.

The Trib. A and Trib. B boxes respectively point out the output of synchronism T12 on tributary A and
B (see Fig.55).
3. In order to modify the parameters select, in the box relevant to the wished tributary, the option:
• NORMAL TRAFFIC. The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for the
contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see pag.188).
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.
• T2 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/s.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2Mbit/s as interface for
the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.

• T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
Moreover, setting this value causes the automatic setting of the value 2MHz as interface for the
tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input.
Fig.55 E1 Source Type tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Use status of
tributary A as
output of
synchronism (T12)
and interface
(output/input)
of tributary A (1)
Use status of
tributary B as
output of
synchronism (T12)
and interface
(output/input)
of tributary B (1)
Fig.55 notes
(1) Parameters:
• NORMAL TRAFFIC. The tributary (A or B) is used for the transport of the traffic only or for
the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic if properly set (see pag.188).
The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2Mbit/s.
• T2 (2Mb/s). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2Mbit/
s.
The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2Mbit/s.
• T3 (2MHz). The tributary (A or B) is used as output of synchronism T12 with interface 2MHz.
The interface for the tributary (A or B) used as synchronism source in input is 2MHz.
Setting the value T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) compromises the use of the tributary (A or B)
as traffic tributary.
To re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and syn-
chronisation
Here below only the operation of re-timing of the E1s of an equipment is described. For the correct
configuration of the functionality for a radio link go to pag.188.

The Synchronisation contextual area opens (see Fig.53).
2. Select the E1 Retiming tab.

Every Tributary... box points out the activation status of the E1 re-timing function relevant to the spe-
cific tributary (see Fig.55).
3. To modify a parameter select, in the E1 Retiming area relevant to the wished tributary, the option:
• Disabled. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
• Enabled. The E1 re-timing function is active.

Fig.56 E1 Retiming tab (Synchronisation contextual area)
Tributary
(1)
Tributary
label (2)
Status of
retiming of
the tributary
(3)
(4)
Fig.55 notes
(1) Value:
• Tributary A. First E1 tributary of base board.
• Tributary B. Second E1 tributary of base board.
• Tributary <number>. E1 tributary of expansion.
(2) Read-only value.
(3) Value:
• Disabled. The E1 re-timing function is inactive.
• Enabled. The E1 re-timing function is active.
For more information about the E1 re-timing function and the modality to use the parameter for
the implementation of the function in a radio link go to pag.188.
(4) The Sync Alarm, when the E1 re-timing function is active, points out whether the operation failed
(alarm activated) or it was successful (alarm deactivated).
The colour of the box represents the Sync Alarm status and severity:
Management of synchronisation (more info)
ALCplus2 equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.

When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source in input, enabled and with the highest pri-
ority, is used to synchronise the local IDU (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
It is possible to generate the synchronisation in output using the tributaries A and/or B.
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see pag.158).
Here below the following topics are described:
• Synchronism sources in input (pag.185)

• Internal synchronism T0 (pag.187)
• Synchronism in output T12 (pag.188)
• Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation (pag.188)

Synchronism sources in input
The equipment has more synchronism sources in input.

The number/type of synchronism sources in input depends on the type/expansion of equipment (see
Tab.4).
Enabling of the synchronism sources in input
A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see pag.178).
Configuration of the synchronism sources in input
For some synchronism sources, the type of source can be set (see Tab.4).
Priority of the synchronism source in input
A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source in input (see pag.180).
The source with the highest priority level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment
(if a forcing or a preferential source is not active).
The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 points
out the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.
Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.
When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment will automatically start to
use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become unavailable, the
equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.
The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
• The source is not physically present.
• The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3) is
greater than ± 9,2 ppm.
Forcing of a synchronism source in input
This function allows the user forcing a synchronism source in input as source from which the T0 synchro-
nism is taken (see pag.180).
This forcing is made without considering the status and the priority of the source.
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).
Function of synchronism source in preferential input
This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see pag.180).
When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest priority.
When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.
This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.

Tab.4 Synchronism sources in input
ALCplus2 Synchronism sources in input

equipment Name Type Configuration
LAN-3.
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
Source available only if the LAN is configured with electrical interface
LAN-4.
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
IduBoard (1)
T2/T3 1 E1 Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz)
T2/T3 2 E1 Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) (1)
Synchronism from the remote terminal

RADIO (T0) Radio
Source available only when the radio is equipped (Fig.44).
LAN-3.
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-4.
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
(1)
IduBoard Exp. T2/T3 1 E1 Tributary A with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz)
16E1
Source configurable as:
T2/T3 2 E1 • Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) (1)
• Tributary E1 of expansion (1÷16) with interface T2 (2Mb/s)
RADIO (T0) Radio
LAN-3.
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-4
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
(1)
Source configurable as:
T2/T3 2 E1 • Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) (1)
IduBoard Exp • Tributary E1 of expansion (1÷32) with interface T2 (2Mb/s)
2xSTM-1 32E1 Synchronism from the remote terminal
RADIO (T0) Radio
STM-1 stream.
STM-1 (T0) STM-1
Source available only if the management of 1 STM-1 is enabled (Fig.44).
First STM-1 stream.
STM-1 [1] (T0) STM-1
Source available only if the management of 2 STM-1 is enabled (Fig.44)
Second STM-1 stream.
STM-1 [2] (T0) STM-1
Source available only if the management of 2 STM-1 is enabled (Fig.44)
LAN-3.
TE LAN-3 LAN Eth
LAN-4.
TE LAN-4 LAN Eth
(1)
IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 Source configurable as:
16E1 T2/T3 2 E1 • Tributary B with interface T2 (2Mb/s) or T3 (2MHz) (1)
• Tributary E1 of the expansion (1÷16) with interface T2 (2Mb/s)
RADIO (T0) Radio
The name and the configuration of the sources in input for the STM-1 stream and for the Nodal Bus
change depending on the configuration of the equipment and are pointed out in Tab.5
(1) The type of interface depends on the setting made by the user for the management of the synchronism
in output T12 (see Fig.55).

Tab.5 Availability sources in input (ALCplus2 with IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1)
Equipment Configuration Synchronism sources in input for STM-1/Nodal Bus
STM-1 management Nodal Bus management
Enable Enable Name Type Configuration
Disable Disable Enable
1 STM-1 (1) 2 STM-1 (1)
X - - X - - - -
Nodal 1 (T0) Nodal Bus Nodal Bus 1
X - - - X
Nodal 2 (T0) Nodal Bus Nodal Bus 2
- X - X - STM-1 (T0) STM-1 First STM-1 stream
Source configurable as (2):
STM-1
STM-1/ • STM-1 stream (STM-1)
or
NODAL A (T0) • Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
Nodal Bus
• Nodal Bus 2 (Nodal 2)
- X - - X
STM-1
STM-1/ • STM-1 stream (STM-1)
or
NODAL B (T0) • Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
Nodal Bus
STM-1 [1] (T0) STM-1 First STM-1 stream
- - X X -
STM-1 [2] (T0) STM-1 Second STM-1 stream
STM-1 • First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
STM-1/
or • Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
NODAL A (T0)
Nodal Bus • Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
- - X - X
STM-1 • First STM-1 (STM-1 [1])
STM-1/
or • Second STM-1 (STM-1 [2])
NODAL B (T0)
Nodal Bus • Nodal Bus 1 (Nodal 1)
(1)
Refer to Fig.44.
(2)
If a value is set for the source STM-1/NODAL A (T0) this value will not be available for the source STM-
1/NODAL B (T0) and vice versa.
Internal synchronism T0
The synchronism source in input, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by
the controller SETS of the equipment according to specific criteria:
• Forcing of the source
• Status of the source (enabled/disabled)
• Preferential source
• Source priority
• Status of the signal (valid/degraded)
The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:

• Locked, the input source, set for the creation of the T0 synchronism, is physically present, the
relevant signal is valid and used by the equipment for the creation of the synchronism.
• Hold-over, all the possible sources in input are degraded. In this case the equipment keeps the
estimated frequency of the last used external source.
• Free-running, the T0 synchronism is generated by equipment internal reference (Internal
Source), because the other synchronism sources in input are not physically present, their signal
is degraded or they are disabled.
The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see pag.182).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).

Synchronism in output T12
The user can set that the synchronism in output is provided to tributaries A and/or B (see pag.182). In
this case the use of the tributary (A and/or B) as traffic tributary is compromised.
Moreover the use of the tributary A and/or B as output of synchronism T12 determinates the type of the
interface of the tributary (A and/or B) used as synchronism source in input (see Tab.6).
Tab.6 Synchronism in output (T12)
Value set as output of

Output of Synchronism Interface of tributary A Use of tributary A
synchronism T12
T12 on tributary A (output/input) as traffic tributary
(parameter Trib. A - Fig.55)
(1)
NORMAL TRAFFIC Yes 2Mbit/s Yes
T2 (2Mb/s) Yes 2Mbit/s No
T3 (2MHz) Yes 2MHz No
Value set as output of

Output of Synchronism Interface of tributary B Use of tributary B
synchronism T12
T12 on tributary B (output/input) as traffic tributary
(parameter Trib. B - Fig.55)
(1)
NORMAL TRAFFIC Yes 2Mbit/s Yes
T2 (2Mb/s) Yes 2Mbit/s No
T3 (2MHz) Yes 2MHz No
(1)
For the contemporary transport of synchronism and traffic see pag.188).
Re-timing of the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisa-
tion
The function called Re-timing of E1s allows re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic
and synchronisation, to increase the requirements of jitter and wander even in case of operation with adap-
tive modulation (ACM).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the base board (tributary A and B)
The tributaries of the base board can be set for the transport only of the traffic or as output of T12 syn-
chronism.
If the user wishes to use the tributary A or B for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation,
in any condition of operation of the radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations
described in the following example.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary A used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchro-
nisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.57).
Fig.57 Example of re-timing of tributary A (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment REMOTE equipment
SETS SETS
management management
Tributary A Tributary A

Operations to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT:
a. Activate the management of the synchronisation (Sync Enable - Fig.44).
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see Fig.84)

c. Set the source T2/T3 1 (tributary A) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.53 and Fig.54).
d. Set the value NORMAL TRAFFIC as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A (see
Fig.55).
Operations to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT:
b. Activate the use of the tributary A (see Fig.84)
c. Set the source RADIO (T0) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.53 and Fig.54).
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary A (Tributary A - value Enabled - Fig.56).
e. Set the value NORMAL TRAFFIC as output of synchronism T12 for the parameter Trib. A (see
Fig.55).
Implementation of the function for the E1s of the expansion (tributary 1...n)
Generally the tributaries of the expansion transport traffic.
If the user wants to use their frequency for synchronisation purposes in any condition of operation of the
radio transport (ACM enabled), it is necessary to execute the operations described in the following exam-
ple.
Suppose you want to re-timing the tributary 1 used for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchro-
nisation between the local equipment and the remote equipment (see Fig.58).
Fig.58 Example of re-timing of tributary 1 (synchronisation)
LOCAL equipment REMOTE equipment
SETS SETS
management management
Tributary 1 Tributary 1
Settings to execute for the LOCAL equipment by means of WEB LCT:

b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see Fig.84)
c. Set the tributary 1 as source T2/T3 2 (see Fig.54).
d. Set the source T2/T3 2 as synchronism source in input (see Fig.53 and Fig.54).
Settings to execute for the REMOTE equipment by means of WEB LCT:
b. Activate the use of the tributary 1 (see Fig.84)

c. Set the source RADIO (T0) as synchronism source in input (see Fig.53 e Fig.54).
d. Activate the re-timing of tributary 1 (Tributary 1 - value Enabled - Fig.56).
In case you want to use this function (contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation) on more
E1 tributaries, all the tributaries must be synchronous, moreover the re-timing must be activated for all
the tributaries and not only for the tributary used as synchronous source in input.

BASE BAND
At the choice of Base Band option, the program displays the following commands:
• Ethernet Switch (pag.191). It manages the general configuration of the Ethernet interface.
• LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4 (pag.200). It manages the Ethernet external ports.
• Port A (pag.228). It manages the Ethernet internal port.
• Spanning Tree (pag.238). It manages the spanning tree in the network.
• TDM Tributaries (pag.243). It manages the TDM tributaries.
• Cross Connection (pag.267). It manages the cross-connection matrix.
The Cross Connection command is available only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-
1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.

Ethernet Switch

The Ethernet Switch command manages the general configuration of the Ethernet interface.
General settings of the Ethernet Switch

• To verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Address Table (pag.191)
• To reset the MAC Address Table (pag.193)
• To restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch (pag.193)
• To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet (pag.193)
• To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field (pag.193)
• To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue (pag.193)
• To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, according to its Tag
802.1p (pag.194)
• To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding modality is
activated and deactivated (pag.194)
Parameters of PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)

• To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ethernet ports,
depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3) (pag.195).
Virtual LAN
• To verify the existing virtual Lans (pag.196).
• To create a virtual Lan (pag.197).
• To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan (pag.198).
• To delete a virtual Lan (pag.199).
For more information about the MAC Address Table, refer to pag.199.
To verify/modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Address Table
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Ethernet Switch command.
The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active.
The MAC Addr. Aging Time parameter points out the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically
acquired and stored in the specific table (see Fig.59).
2. To change the parameter, set the wished value.

Fig.59 General tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Press this button to restore the

Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch Validity period of
Maximum size the MAC addresses,
of the accepted stored in the
packet (1) MAC Address Table
Eth Type value in

Press this button the S_Tag (Service
to reset the Tag) QinQ field
MAC Address Table
Emptying algorithm
of the packets
Tag 802.1p value present in the
of the packet in output queue (2)
input to a port of
the equipment (3)
This table indicates which
output queue a packet
Output queue (4) must be assigned to,
available in the depending on its
equipment (3) 802.1p priority Tag (5)
Fig.59 notes
(1) Option:
• 1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames).
• 2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
• 10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
(2) The option:
• 8421 WRR, indicates that a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties,
then a part of the queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with fur-
ther lower priority (2 messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message)
and so on restarting from the queue with highest priority.
• Strict Priority, indicates that the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending
of all the messages) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
• Strict 3, indicates that the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the
messages). The other queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
• Strict 3 and 2, indicates that the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied.
The other queues (1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
(3) The check sign indicates which output queue (Queue…) the packet in input is associated to, whose
value of priority Tag (802.1p) corresponds to the value 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7.
The 802.1p Priority Management table is COMMON to all the Ethernet port of the equipment.
(4) Each Ethernet port of the equipment has four output queue, which the packets in input from other
ports are sent to. Wording:
• Queue 0. Queue with 0 priority (lowest priority).
• Queue 1. Queue with 1 priority.
• Queue 2. Queue with 2 priority.
• Queue 3. Queue with 3 priority (highest priority).
(5) A packet in input from any Ethernet port of the equipment, having a valid value of priority Tag
802.1p, is automatically assigned to one of the four queues of the output port, according to what
reported in the 802.1p Priority Management table.
For example, with reference to the figures, the packets in input with Tag 802.1p equal to 0, 1, 2 or
3 will be assigned to the queue with lower priority (Queue 0), while the packets with Tag 802.1p
equal to 4, 5, 6 or 7, to the output queue with highest priority (Queue 3).
What just said is valid only if the analysis of the priority at level 3 (field PTOS/DSCP) is not active
and prioritary.
The equipment allows analysing the priority at level 2, according the standard 802.1p (values
0…7), or at level 3, through the analysis of the PTOS/DSCP field present in the header of the IP
packets (values 0…63). The priority standard can be modified by the user and can be different for
each Ethernet port.

To reset the MAC Address Table
The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active (see Fig.59).
2. Press Mac Table clear and confirm.
The system reset the MAC Address Table.
To restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch
The operation is traffic affecting.
The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens with the General tab active (see Fig.59).
2. Press Reset Switch and confirm.

The system reset the MAC Address Table.
At the equipment restart, the default configuration (Factory Default) will be automatically applied only
for the Ethernet Switch.
All the settings executed until that moment by the user (for example the configuration of the Ethernet
ports, of the VLANs and of OAM-FM) and the statistics (Lan Statisticians and RMON) will be deleted.
To verify/modify the maximum size of the accepted packet
When the in-band supervision is active (see pag.42) and the Double Tag function is enabled (see Fig.66/
Fig.76), for the correct transit of the supervision packets it is suggested to set the value 2048 as maximum
packet size.
The Max Packet Size parameter points out the maximum size of the accepted packet (see Fig.59).
• 1522. Maximum size for standard Ethernet (IEEE Tagged Frames).
• 2048. Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 2048.
• 10240 (Jumbo). Maximum dimension of the packet extendable up to 10240 (Jumbo).
To verify/modify the Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field
The QinQ ETH Type parameter points out the Eth Type value in the S_Tag (Service Tag) QinQ field (see Fig.59).
2. To change the parameter, type the new value.
To verify/modify the emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue
The Egress Priority Policy parameter points out the emptying algorithm of the output queues (see Fig.59).

• Strict Priority, the queue with highest priority is completely emptied (sending of all the messag-
es) before sending a message of the queue with lower priority.
• 8421 WRR, a part (8 messages) of the queue with highest priority is empties, then a part of the
queue with lower priority (4 messages), then a part of the queue with further lower priority (2
messages), then a part of the queue with lowest priority (1 message) and so on restarting from
the queue with highest priority.
• Strict 3, the high priority queue 3 is completely emptied (sending of all the messages). The other
queues (2, 1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
• Strict 3 and 2, the high priority queue 3 and queue 2 are completely emptied. The other queues
(1, 0) are managed with a WRR 421 mechanism.
To verify/assign the output queue to a packet, in input to any Ethernet port, accord-
ing to its Tag 802.1p
The 802.1p Priority Management table points out the current setting output queues - Tag 802.1p (see
Fig.59).
2. To change the parameter, select the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to the wished com-
bination output queue - Tag 802.1p.
For the same value of Tag 802.1p, it is possible to select only one queue at a time.
To verify/modify the time interval (Hysteresis) after which the Link Loss Forwarding
modality is activated and deactivated
The Ethernet Switch contextual area opens.
2. Select the LLF tab.

The LLF Hysteresis parameter points out the setting of the hysteresis of the Link Loss Forwarding mo-
dality (see Fig.60).
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
Fig.60 LLF tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
Hysteresis of
the Link Loss
Forwarding
modality

To verify/modify which queue a packet must be assigned to, in input from the Ether-
net ports, depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3)
The setting of the parameter is common to all the Ethernet ports of the equipment.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is connected to other node elements through Ethernet
nodal Bus, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the packets
takes place through the nodal interconnection (see Fig.61).
2. Select the PTOS/DSCP Config tab.
In the Queue Pri column, for each PTOS/DSCP value, the relevant output queue is displayed (see
Fig.62).
3. To modify the output queue, which a value is associated to, select, in the Filter area, the option relevant
to the IP format which the DSCP field refers to:
• IP v4 DSCP. The DSCP field is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the IPv4 format.
• IPv6 DSCP. The DSCP field is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the IPv6 format.
4. Select the output queue which the value is associated to:
• Queue 0, to assign the value to the output queue with 0 priority (high priority).
• Queue 1, to assign the value to the output queue with 1 priority.
• Queue 2, to assign the value to the output queue with 2 priority.
• Queue 3, to assign the value to the output queue with 3 priority (low priority).
5. Repeat the previous step for the output queue of all the wished value.
Fig.61 Management of the field PTOS/DSCP in an ALCplus2 node
IDU1
3 A
2
4
1
Ethernet nodal Bus
Switch
IDU2
A Packets for which the priority

3 2 analysis at layer 3 is managed
4 1
Switch Packets for which the priority
analysis at layer 3 is not managed
Fig.62 PTOS/DSCP Config. tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
List of the
possible
In these
values
boxes it is
for the
possible
PTOS/DSCP
to activate
field (1)
some filters
to the list
of value (2)
(3)

Fig.62 notes
(1) For each value of the column:

• Value. It is displayed the value expressed in binary digits.
• Precedence, Delay, Throug., Reliab., DSCP. For the description of the wording present in
these columns refer to RFC 2474, 2597 and 2598 (Request For Comments).
• Queue Pri. The queue which the packet in input to the specific port, whose PTOS/DSCP has
the value displayed in the row, is assigned to is displayed:
• Queue 0. Output queue with 0 priority (low priority).
• Queue 1. Output queue with 1 priority.
• Queue 2. Output queue with 2 priority.
• Queue 3. Output queue with 3 priority (high priority).
The single asterisk (*) near the wording indicates that the value has been modified but it is not yet
transmitted to the equipment (pressing Apply).
The output queue, which a value is associated to, can be modified by the user.
(2) If set the option:

• View All. The list displays all the values.
• View Queue 0. The list displays only the values associated to the 0 output queue (low prior-
ity), (Queue Pri column, Queue 0 wording).
• View Queue 1. The list displays only the values associated to the 1 output queue (Queue Pri
column, Queue 1 wording).
• View Queue 2. The list displays only the values associated to the 2 output queue (Queue Pri
column, Queue 2 wording).
• View Queue 3. The list displays only the values associated to the 3 output queue (high pri-
ority), (Queue Pri column, Queue 3 wording).
To modify the displaying of the list, select the wished values.
(3) If selected the option:

• VP v4 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the IPv4
format.
• IP v6 DSCP. The DSCP column is meaningful for traffic incoming in the Switch in the IPv6
format.
To verify the existing virtual LANs
2. Select the Virtual Lan Config. tab.
The existing virtual LANs are displayed in the Virtual Lan Config. tab (see Fig.63).
Fig.63 Virtual Lan Config. tab (Ethernet Switch contextual area)
List of the
virtual Lan’s
(1)
Default VLan
identifier
of each
Ethernet
port of the
equipment
(2)

Fig.63 notes
(1) For each virtual Lan, the columns indicate:

• VLan ID, identifier assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation.
The wording Used, indicates that the ID of the virtual Lan is used also as default Vlan ID by
one of the internal/external ports (see Default Vlan ID area).
• Label, name assigned to the virtual Lan by the user during its creation or modification.
• Lan1, enabling of the external port 1 to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the virtual LAN:
• ----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan.
• Untag, the port allows the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed
to the packets in output from the port.
• Tagged, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automati-
cally added the Tag composed by the information:
• Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the
packet itself.
• Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan
ID of the input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is
not satisfied, the Vlan Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
• Unmodif, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or
added to the packets in output from the port.
the virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1).
• PortA, enabling of the internal port to the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual LAN. For the description of the wordings, refer to the previous note (Lan1).
(2) The default identifier of the internal (Port A) and external (Lan...) ports.
To create a virtual Lan

The Virtual Lan Config. tab opens (see Fig.63).
The Virtual Lan Properties tab opens.
4. Type, into the VLan ID box, the identifier (within 1 and 4095) you wish to assign to the virtual LAN.
The parameter cannot be modified later.
5. Type, into the Label box, the name (alphanumeric string up to 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN.
When the box is selected, Vlan <identifier> is suggested as name of the virtual Lan. This name can be
changed as you wish.
6. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3 and Lan 4) and internal port (Port A),
select the option:

• Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
• Untagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
• Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag com-
posed by the information:
• Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself.
• Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the
input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan
Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.
• Unmodified, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the pack-
ets in output from the port.

The Virtual Lan Config. tab displays the row relevant to the new virtual Lan.
If the displayed message is:

• Warning! VLAN ID already in the list. The set identifier corresponds to that of an already existing
VLAN. Change the value in the box VLan ID.
• Warning! VLAN ID already reserved in port configuration “In Band Management”.The set iden-
tifier corresponds to that reserved for the in-band supervision for one or more elements. Change
the value in the box VLan ID.
To modify the configuration of a virtual Lan
3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to modify.

4. Select the Modify tab.
The Virtual Lan Properties tab opens.
The VLan identifier cannot be changed.
5. Type the possible new name (alphanumeric string at most of 20 characters) you wish to assign to the
virtual LAN in the Label box.
6. In the box relevant to each external port (Lan 1, Lan 2, Lan 3 and Lan 4) and internal port (Port A),
select the option:
• Disable, not to enable the port for the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan.
• Untagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. The tag 802.1Q (information of priority and VLAN identifier) is removed to the packets in
output from the port.
• Tagged, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the virtual
Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added the Tag com-
posed by the information:
• Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the packet itself.
• Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the origin port
of the packet.
The Vlan Table can be used, in case of traffic without Tag, only if the default Vlan ID of the
input port is contained as routing row in the table itself. If this condition is not satisfied, the Vlan
Table is not meaningful for all the traffic without Tag.

• Unmodified, to enable the port to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added to the pack-

In the Virtual Lan Config. tab the changes to the row relevant to the specific virtual Lan are made.
If the displayed message is:
• An OAM MA and/or a MEP are bound on this VLAN. Please remove them before modifying it. To
the VLAN is associated at least a MA and/or a MEP of the OAM-FM Domain defined for the equip-
ment. Before changing the VLAN is necessary to dismiss all the relevant MA/MEP (see Fig.104).
To delete a virtual Lan

3. Select the virtual Lan you wish to delete.

The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.


The virtual Lan is removed from the list.
MAC Address Table (more info)
The MAC Address Table is a table created by the Ethernet Switch to keep trace of the reachability of the
equipment present in the network.
For the editing of the MAC Address Table, the Switch uses the MAC addresses (source and destination) of
the packets in input and the number of the port through which a packet enters in the Switch as information
source.
When the Switch receives a packet, it checks its source MAC Address and, if this is not already present in
the MAC Address Table as reachable through the port where it has received the message, inserts it there.
Then it checks the destination MAC Address. If it is already present in the MAC Address Table, it transmits
the packet with the associated interface to the considered MAC Address.
If the destination MAC Address is not present in the MAC Address Table, the Switch transmits the frame
on all its own interfaces, excluding only that where the frame itself has been received.
A MAC address, once stored in the table, is automatically deleted from the table itself if it is not used within
a given time period (Aging Time).
Via WEB LCT application, it is possible:

• To delete the content of the MAC Address Table on the equipment (see Fig.59).
• To define the validity period of the addresses stored in the MAC Address Table of the equipment
(parameter MAC Addr. Aging Time - Fig.59).
• To enable/disable the automatic learning of MAC Address in the MAC Address Table for each sin-
gle port of the Ethernet Switch (parameter MAC Learning - Fig.64/Fig.75).

LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3, LAN 4

The LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 and LAN 4 commands manage the Ethernet external port.
On the choice of one of the commands, the LAN <number relevant to the selected Lan> contextual area
opens, where it is possible to manage the specific external port.
In detail:
Status and communication parameters

• To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.201).
• To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port (Lan1, Lan2 and
Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.203).
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inac-
tive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4) (pag.204).
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) (pag.204)
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses in the MAC
Address Table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.205)
• To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.205).
• Verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4
electrical interface) (pag.205)
• Verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of line synchronism
(Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface) (pag.206)
Interface type (electrical, optical)

The following operation is available only for ports LAN 3 and LAN 4.
• To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4) (pag.206)
Virtual Lan parameters

• To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.207).
• To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.208).
• To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output (Lan1, Lan2,
• To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.209).
• To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external port (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.209).
Priority parameters
• To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external
port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.210).
• To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external
port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.211).
• To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) (pag.211)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) parameters

• To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (Lan1, Lan2,

• To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.213).
• To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.213).
• To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.214).
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) parameters

• To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Ethernet line protection (Lan1, Lan2,
• To enable/disable the Ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.216).
• To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.213).
• To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.214).
Trunking mode parameters

• To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Trunking mode (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4) (pag.216).
• To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.218).
LLF parameters
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (pag.218).
Loop
• To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(pag.219)
Laser parameters
The following operations are available only for ports LAN 3 and LAN 4 when configured as optical inter-
faces.
• To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.220)
• To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.221)
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.221)
• To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.222)
• To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.222)
• To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface) (pag.223)

• MAC Address Table, refer to pag.199.
• Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.223.
• Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) a go to pag.223.
• Trunking mode go to pag.226
To verify/modify the enabling status of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface tab active (LAN 1/LAN 2). For LAN
3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring this tab in foreground.
The Rate Control parameter points out the enabling status of the port (see Fig.64).

• Disable. The external port is not enabled to the use.
• Full Rate. The external port is enabled to the use of the maximum bit rate relevant to the port.
• ...Kb/...Mb. The external port is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.

Fig.64 Interface tab (LAN... contextual area)
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(6)
(5) (7)
(8) (9)
(10)
Fig.64 notes
(1) Operating modality of the line synchronism:

• Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
• Slave. The line synchronism is generated starting from the clock retrieved from the line
(Loop Time).
Parameter available and meaningful only for the ports with electrical interface for which the auton-
egotiation is active (box Speed/Duplex - value Auto).
(2) Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism:
• Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
automatic.
• Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the box Master/Slave is used.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonego-
tiation is active (box Speed/Duplex – value Auto).
(3) Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:

• MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card mo-
dality).
• MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
• Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of ex-
ternal port is enabled (box Rate Control – value Full Rate or ...Kb/...Mb).
(4) Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Address in the MAC Address Table:
• Enable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is enabled.
• Disable. The automatic learning of the MAC Address is disabled.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other node elements
through Ethernet nodal Bus, the value Enable is forced for this parameter. The setting cannot be
changed.
(5) Enabling status of the port:

• Disable. The external port is not enabled to the use.
• Full Rate. The external port is enabled to the use of the max bit rate relevant to the port.
• ...Kb/...Mb. The external port is enabled to the use with bit rate limited to the specific value.
(6) Activation status of the flow control of the port:

• Enable. The flow control is forced active.
• Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.

• Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto ne-
gotiation procedure).
The option Auto is available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex
box - option Auto).
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other elements of
the node by nodal Bus Ethernet, the flow control must be DISABLED. If it was enabled, at
the opening of the window a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If already
disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
(7) Activation status of the autonegotiation and, if the autonegotiation is deactivated, operating modal-
ities and transmission speed of the port.
For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are
available:
• Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s.
• Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
• Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex
and the data transmission speed through the external port is 100Mbit/s.
• Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
• Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and
the data transmission speed through the external port is 1GMbit/s.
(8) Connection parameters of the port. Box:

• Speed. Data transmission speed.
• Duplex. Transmission modality.
(9) Current status of the line synchronism.

Parameter available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonego-
tiation is active (box Speed/Duplex – value Auto).
(10) Status of the alarms relevant to the port.

The colour of each box displays the status of the alarm:
To verify/modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port
(Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the use of the ex-
ternal port is enabled (see pag.201).
3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground.
The Cable crossover parameter points out the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines (see Fig.64).

• MDI (NIC). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
• MDIX (switch). The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
• Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.

To verify/modify the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negoti-
ation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the ex-
ternal port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Speed/Duplex parameter points out the enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto
negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and the transmission speed used by the external port
(see Fig.64).
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.

For LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with electrical interface, the following values are avail-
able:
• Full-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the external port is 10Mbit/s.
• Half-Duplex-10M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and the
• Half-Duplex-100M. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Half-Duplex and
• Auto. The auto negotiation is enabled.
For LAN 3, LAN 4 configured with optical interface, the following values are available:
• Full-Duplex-1G. The auto negotiation is disabled, the transmission type is Full-Duplex and the
data transmission speed through the external port is 1GMbit/s.
To verify/modify the enabling status of the flow control of the external port (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other elements of the node
by nodal Bus Ethernet, the flow control must be DISABLED.
If it was enabled, at the opening of the window a message is displayed asking to disable the parameter. If
already disabled, the setting cannot be changed.
The Flow Control Full Dplx/Back Pressure Half Dplx parameter points out the activation status of the
flow control of the external port (see Fig.64).

• Enable. The flow control is forced active.
• Disable. The flow control is forced inactive.
• Auto. The flow control is automatic (automatically activated or deactivated by the auto negoti-
ation procedure).
The option Auto is available only if the auto negotiation is active for the port (Speed/Duplex box
- option Auto).
In Full-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the 802.3x normative.
In Half-Duplex modality, the flow control is regulated according to the Back Pressure technique.

To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
in the MAC Address table (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this function.
The MAC Learning parameter points out the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Ad-
dress in the specific table (MAC Address Table) (see Fig.64).
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other elements of the node
through Ethernet nodal Bus, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be enabled.
If the parameter Mac Learning has value:
• Disable, when the tab Interface is opened, the message You have to enable Mac Learning will
be displayed. Modify the value from Disable to Enable.
• Enable, it cannot be modified.

To restart the auto negotiation procedure for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4)
3 and LAN 4, it is necessary to bring it in foreground. Fig.64 shows an example.
2. Press Restart Auto Neg. and confirm.
The push-button is available only if the auto negotiation is enabled (Speed/Duplex and/or Flow Con-
trol... box - option Auto).
To verify/modify the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) (Lan1, Lan2
and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation
is active (see pag.204).
The Master/Slave parameter points out the operating modality of the line synchronism (role) of the ex-
ternal port (see Fig.64).

• Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
• Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).

To verify/modify the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of
the line synchronism (Lan1, Lan2 and Lan3, Lan4 electrical interface)
Operation available and meaningful only for ports with electrical interface for which the autonegotiation
is active (see pag.204).
The M/S Autoneg. parameter points out the activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles
of the line synchronism of the external port (see Fig.64).

• Enable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is au-
tomatic.
• Disable. The autonegotiation between the roles Master and Slave of the line synchronism is
forced. In this case, the role defined in the box Master/Slave is used.
To verify/modify the interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4)
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > LAN 3 or LAN 4 command.
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens with the Interface Type tab active.
The Interface Type parameter points out the interface type of the external port (see Fig.65).

• Electrical. The external port is configured with electrical interface.
• Optical. The external port is configured with optical interface.
Fig.65 Interface Type tab (LAN... contextual area)
(1)
Interface
type (2)
Fig.65 notes
(1) Tab available only for the external ports LAN 3 and LAN 4.
(2) Option:
• Electrical. The external port is configured with electrical interface.
• Optical. The external port is configured with optical interface.

To verify/modify the default Vid value of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The LAN <port number> contextual area opens.
2. Select the VLan(802.1Q) tab.
The Default Vid parameter points out the default Vid value of the port (see Fig.66).
The default Vid of a port is used as Vid in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value in the box (maximum 4095).
Fig.66 VLan(802.1Q) tab (LAN... contextual area)
Default
Vid value
of the port Forcing of the
Vid value of the
Control status port to the
of Tag Vlan ID default value (3)
on the messages
in input from
the port (1)
Behaviour of
the port towards
the packets in
output (2)
Ports through
which can transit
the messages in
input from the
external port (4)
Fig.66 notes
(1) Option:
• Disable 802-1Q. The external port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
They will be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Fallback. The external port uses both the following modalities:
• If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports
enabled in the list for the same Tag.
• If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet
will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Secure. The external port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN
identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port
does not belong to the VLAN itself.
(2) Option:
• Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the
packets in output from the port.
• Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority infor-
mation and VLAN identifier).
• Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port:
the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
• Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is al-
ready tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The add-
ed Tag is composed by:
• The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message en-
tered in the equipment.

• The default priority of the port, which the packet is entered from, if the priority 802.1p
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the
option 802.1p is enabled on this port.
When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag) on
the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the
packets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which
can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
(3) Check box:

• Active ( ). The forcing is enabled.
• Inactive. The forcing is disabled.
(4) For each single Ethernet port, if the set option is:
• Disable, the packets, in input from the external port which the window refers to, are not en-
abled to transit through the specific internal or external port.
• Enable, the packets, in input from the external port which the window refers to, are enabled
to transit through the specific internal or external port
The LAN… box relevant to the external port, which the window refers to, is not displayed.
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the exter-
nal port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter points out, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port (see Fig.66).
• Disable 802-1Q. The external port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
• Fallback. The external port uses both the following modalities:
• If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports en-
abled in the list for the same Tag.
• If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will
be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Secure. The external port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN iden-
tifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does not
belong to the VLAN itself.
For each configuration (selection of the option Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table
of Port Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only
on Tag base (see pag.209).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag
802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
To verify/modify the behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output
(Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)

The Frame Egress Mode parameter points out the behaviour of the external port towards the packets
in output (see Fig.66).

• Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the pack-
• Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).
• Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
• Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already
tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is
composed by:
• The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered
in the equipment.
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the op-
tion 802.1p is enabled on this port.
the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the pack-
ets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can
be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
In an ALCplus2 nodal system with the Trunking Radio modality enabled, when the option Add
Double Tag (QinQ) is active, for the traffic ports of the Switch (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A) you must
set the value Disable 802-1Q for the parameter Ingress Filtering Check (see Fig.66/Fig.76) (the
routing of the traffic is not managed according to the VLAN table).
To force the value of Vid of the external port to the default value (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4)

The Force Default VID parameter points out if the forcing of the Vid value of the external port to the
default value is active (see Fig.66).
3. To change the parameter:

• Activate the Force Default VID ( ) check-box to enable the forcing.
• Deactivate the check-box to disable the forcing.
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the external
port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)

The enabling status of the ports through which can transit the message in input from the external port,
which the window refers to, is displayed in the Port Based VLAN area (see Fig.66).
The LAN… box relevant to the external port, which the window refers to, is not displayed.
3. To change the parameters, set the option:

• Disable, not to enable the packets in input from the external port, which the window refers to,
to transit through the specific internal or external port.
• Enable, to enable the packets in input from the external port, which the window refers to, to
transit through the specific internal or external port.
Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you
enable the port LAN 4 in the contextual area LAN 3, the port LAN 3 is automatically enabled in
the contextual area LAN 4.
To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
external port to the output queue (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is connected to other node elements through Eth-
ernet nodal Bus, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the
packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see Fig.61).
2. Select the Priority Selection tab.

The Priority parameter points out the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
external port, to the output (see Fig.67).
• Disable, to disable the priority management.
• 802.1P, to analyse the value of 802.1p priority (level 2) for the choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS, to analyse the value of TOS (Type Of Service) (level 3).
• 802.1P-IpTOS, to analyse the value of 802.1p and, if not evaluate, the value of TOS for the
choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS-802.1P, to analyse the value of TOS and, if not evaluate, the value of 802.1p priority for
the choice of the output queue.
Fig.67 Priority Selection tab (LAN... contextual area)
Priority criterion This table points

used to associated out the mapping
the packets, in of the priority
input to the port, 802.1p inside
to the output (1) the Tag VLan
(3)
Value to insert in the

field 802.1p of the Tag 802.1p
packets in input value of the
from the port which, packet in
in output, the output to the
Tag is added to (2) Switch
Tag 802.1p
value of the
packet in
input to the
Switch
Fig.67 notes
(1) Option:
• Disable. The priority is disabled.

• 802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3).
• 802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value
of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p pri-
ority for the choice of the output queue.
(2) Option:
• 0. Lowest priority
• 7. Highest priority.
(3) The priority 802.1p present in a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch
with a different priority value.
The remapping of a priority is pointed out in the table by a check sign.
For example, as shown in the figure, a packet in input with priority 3 is remapped in output from
the Switch with priority 5.
The table is available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (pa-
rameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P) is active.
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from
the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)

The Default Priority parameter points out the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the external port which, in output, the Tag is added to (see Fig.67).
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (Lan1,
Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter
Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P - see Fig.67) is active.
If the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p is active, the mapping of the priority in the Tag VLan
is pointed out in the tab (see Fig.67).
3. In order to modify a value, select in the table the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to
the wished combination: values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from
the Switch.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
through nodal Bus Ethernet, this operation is not available for the external ports LAN 1 and LAN 2.

2. Select the STP/ELP/Trunking tab.

The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol, the Ethernet line
protection or to the Trunking modality.
Fig.68 reports an example of the tab when the Spanning Tree protocol is active.
Fig.68 STP/ELP/Trunking tab (STP active) (LAN... contextual area)
Status of the
ports in
relation to the
Spanning Tree
protocol (1)
Enabling status of
the Spanning
Tree protocol for
the port (2) (4)
Port
priority (3)
Cost of the
network part
directly connected
to the port
Fig.68 notes
(1) Parameter:
• Role. Role assigned by the Spanning Tree protocol to each port of a Bridge/Switch. The role
defines the behaviour of the port according to the status of the Bridge in the network:
• Disable. Port disabled.
• root-port. Port offering the best path (lowest cost) towards the Bridge selected as
root. Each Bridge can have only one root port. When the Spanning Tree algorithm is
at steady state, each root port is in port-forwarding status.
• alternate-port. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path to-
wards the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alter-
nate port is in port-blocking status.
• designated-port. Port which does not offer paths towards the Bridge Root and is used
to propagate the information of the Bridge Root to the other bridges. Each Designated
port is in port-forwarding status.
• backup-port. Port physically connected on a Lan where a Designated port of the same
Bridge is connected. The Backup port is in port-blocking status.
• Status. Status of the port:
Receive Forward Update the Receive/ Re-transmit

Port status
traffic traffic Address Table Unit process BPDU BPDU
port-disable No No No No No
port-blocking No No No Yes No
port-learning Yes No Yes Yes Yes
port-forwarding Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
• Version. Version of the Spanning Tree protocol:

• rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol
characterized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
• stp-802-1d. Spanning Tree Protocol standard IEEE 802.1d.

(2) Value:
• Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled.
• Enable-Bridge1. Spanning Tree protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
• Enable-Protection1, Enable-Protection2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet line
protection of the equipment is enabled (see Fig.69).
• Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3, Enable-node-Prot4. Spanning
Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet line protection of the node is enabled (see Fig.69).
If the Trunking modality is enabled (see Fig.70) the value Disable is automatically set for the
parameter STP/ELP. In order to change the value, first it is necessary to disable the use of Trunking
modality.
(3) Value:
• 0. Highest priority
(4) Parameters for the Trunking mode (see Fig.70).
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the external port (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4)
The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality is enabled (see Fig.70). In or-
der to enable the STP protocol, it is first necessary to disable the use of the Trunking modality.

The STP/ELP parameter points out the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the selected
port (see Fig.68).
3. To change the parameter, select the value:

• Disable. Spanning Tree protocol disabled
• Enable-Protection1, Enable-Protection2. Spanning Tree protocol disabled. The Ethernet line pro-
tection of the equipment is enabled (see Fig.69).
• Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3, Enable-node-Prot4. Spanning Tree
protocol disabled. The Ethernet line protection of the node is enabled (see Fig.69).
To verify/modify the priority of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4) (SPT/ELP)

The Priority parameter points out the priority of the external port (see Fig.68/Fig.69).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).

To verify/modify the connection cost of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
(STP/ELP)

The Path Cost parameter points out the cost of the network part directly connected to the external port.
(see Fig.68/Fig.69). This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connec-
tions, the preference of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.

It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Ethernet line protection

The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Ethernet line protection, to the Spanning Tree
protocol or to the Trunking modality.
Fig.69 reports an example of the tab when the Ethernet line protection is active.
Fig.69 STP/ELP/Trunking tab (ELP active) (LAN... contextual area)
Status of the
ports in
relation to the
ethernet line
protection (1)
Enabling status
of the ethernet
line protection
for the port (2) (4)
Port
priority (3)
Cost of the
network part
directly connected
to the port

Fig.69 notes
(1) Parameter:
• Role. Role assigned by the Ethernet line protection to each port. The role defines the behav-
iour of the port:
• alternate-port. Port in stand-by status, as it offers an alternative path with higher cost
as opposed to the Designated port. Normally the Alternate port is in port-blocking sta-
tus.
• designated-port. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.

Port status
• Version. Parameter not meaningful in this condition.
(2) Value:
• Disable. Ethernet line protection disabled.
• Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet line protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol
enabled (see Fig.68).
• Enable-Protection1. The Ethernet line protection of the equipment (see pag.224) is enabled
between the considered external port and the other external port(s) of the equipment whose
parameter value is Enable-Protection1.
• Enable-Protection2. The Ethernet line protection of the equipment is enabled between the
considered external port and the other external port(s) of the equipment whose parameter
value is Enable-Protection2.
• Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet line protection of the node (see pag.225) is enabled be-
tween the considered external port and the other external ports of the node elements whose
value of the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.
• Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet line protection of the node is enabled between the consid-
ered external port and the other external ports of the node elements whose value of the con-
sidered parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.
The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4

are available and meaningful only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is intercon-
nected to other node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.
If the Trunking modality is enabled (see Fig.70), the value Disable is automatically forced for the
parameter STP/ELP. In order to change the value, it is first necessary to disable the use of the
Trunking modality.
(3) Value:
• 15. Lowest priority.
(4) Parameters for the Trunking mode (see Fig.70).

To enable/disable the Ethernet line protection for the external port (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4)
The line Ethernet protection cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality is enabled (see Fig.70). In or-
der to enable the line Ethernet protection, it is first necessary to disable the use of the Trunking modality.

The STP/ELP parameter points out the enabling status of Ethernet line protection for the selected port
(see Fig.69).

• Enable-Bridge1 - Enable-Bridge2. Ethernet line protection disabled. Spanning Tree protocol en-
abled (see Fig.68).
• Enable-Protection1. The Ethernet line protection of the equipment (see pag.224) is enabled be-
tween the considered external port and the other external port(s) of the equipment whose pa-
rameter value is Enable-Protection1.
• Enable-Protection2. The Ethernet line protection of the equipment is enabled between the con-
sidered external port and the other external port(s) of the equipment whose parameter value is
Enable-Protection2.
• Enable-node-Prot1. The Ethernet line protection of the node (see pag.225) is enabled between
the considered external port and the other external ports of the node elements whose value of
the considered parameter is Enable-node-Prot1.
• Enable-node-Prot2. The Ethernet line protection of the node is enabled between the considered
external port and the other external ports of the node elements whose value of the considered
parameter is Enable-node-Prot2.
The values Enable-node-Prot1, Enable-node-Prot2, Enable-node-Prot3 and Enable-node-Prot4 are

available and meaningful only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected
to other node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.
To verify the status of the external port in relation to the Trunking mode (Lan1, Lan2,
Lan3, Lan4)

The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Ethernet line protection, to the Spanning Tree
protocol or to the Trunking modality.
Fig.70 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is active.

Fig.70 STP/ELP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (LAN... contextual area)
Status of the
ports in
relation to the
(3) Trunking
mode (1)
Enabling status
of the Trunking
mode for
the port (2)
Fig.70 notes
(1) Parameter:
• Status. Status of the port as regards the LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol):
• Up. Protocol active.
• Down. Protocol inactive.
• Partner Id. MAC Address of the remote equipment located at the other end of the Ethernet
connection (remote Switch).
• Tx Pck Cnt. LACP packets transmitted to the remote Switch.
• Rx Pck Cnt. LACP packets received from the remote Switch.
(2) Value:
• Disable. Trunking mode disabled.
• Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled. The considered LAN port is aggregated to the equip-
ment LAN ports, whose considered parameter has value Enable-Trunk1.
It is possible to aggregate up to 4 LAN ports for each group (Trunk).

If the STP protocol or the Ethernet Line Protection (see Fig.68/Fig.69) is enable, for the parameter
Trunk the value Disable is automatically forced. In order to modify the value, it is first necessary to
disable the use of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the Ethernet Line Protection.
(3) Parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol and to the line Ethernet protection (see Fig.68/
Fig.69).

To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol or the line Ethernet protection
is enabled (see Fig.68/Fig.69). In order to enable the Trunking, it is first necessary to disable the use of
the Spanning Tree protocol or of the line Ethernet protection.
If you wish to enable the Trunking modality, it is first necessary to disable the external port (see Fig.64).

The Trunk parameter points out the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port (see
Fig.70).

To verify/modify the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality of the ex-
ternal port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3, Lan4)
2. Select the LLF tab.

The LLF parameter points out the enabling status of the Link Loss Forwarding modality (see Fig.71).

• Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
• Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (IDU BRAN-
CH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id. Alarm) or if the internal port is disabled (see
Fig.75).
Only if the Local option is selected, it is possible to activate one or more of the following options:
• Rem. LAN-1. The port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the remote LAN 1 port
associated to it.
associated to it.
associated to it.
associated to it.

Fig.71 LLF tab (LAN... contextual area)
Activating status
of the Link Loss
Forwarding
modality (1)
Fig.71 notes
(1) Option:
• Disable. The LLF modality is disabled.
• Local. The LLF modality is enabled: the port is disabled in presence of radio alarms (IDU
BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id. Alarm) or if the internal port is disabled
(see Fig.75).
Only if the Local option is active, the activation of the check-box:
• Rem. LAN-1, points out that the port is disabled even in presence of a LOS alarm on the re-
mote LAN 1 port associated to it.
To activate/deactivate the loop on line side of the external port (Lan1, Lan2, Lan3,
Lan4)
2. Select the Line Loop tab.

The tab displays the status of the loop on line side of the port (see Fig.72).
3. To change the parameter, select the loop.
The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated
and vice versa).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the loop a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and
displaying the current setting of timeout.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Fig.72 Line Loop tab (LAN... contextual area)
Loop on
line side
inactive
Loop on
line side
active
To verify the current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
2. Select the Laser Control tab.

In the Trasmitter Control area the status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.73).
Fig.73 Laser Control tab (LAN... contextual area)
(1)
Current status
of the laser (2)
Enabling Laser
status of the module
laser (4) type (3)
(6)
Transmission
mode of the
laser (5) (7)
Fig.73 notes
(1) The tab is available only when the port is configured with optical interfaces.
(2) Wording:
• Status On. The laser is on transmission.
• Status Off. The laser is not on transmission.
(3) Value:
• optical-100baseFX. Laser module of type 100 Base FX (Fiber).

• optical-1000baseSX. Laser module of type 1000 Base SX (Short WaveLength).
• optical-1000baseLX. Laser module of type 1000 Base LX (Long WaveLength).
• Unknown. The laser module is not among those listed above (possible anomaly of the laser
module).
For more information relevant to laser module refer to IEEE standard 802.3.
(4) If active, the option:

• On. The laser is enabled for transmission.
• Off. The laser is not enabled for transmission.

• Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real
presence of the optical signal.
• Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when
the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not
transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x
seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if
the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present,
after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
• Manual. The laser transmission is manually enabled by the operator.
• Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).
(6) Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller be-
fore trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
(7) Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser
during the testing operation.
To verify the type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)

The Module Type parameter points out the type of laser module (see Fig.73).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)

In the Transmitter Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.73).

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message is displayed warning that
you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.

The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.

To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)

In the Automatic Shutdown area the transmission mode of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.73).

• Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real pres-
ence of the optical signal.
• Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x sec-
onds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x sec-
onds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Select the Apply and confirm.
• Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.

The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the trans-
mission mode of the laser is Auto.
To enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
2. Select the Laser Control tab (see Fig.73).

3. Into the Automatic Shutdown box, select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
A message is displayed, warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of
timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.

The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.

The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.

To execute the test laser functioning status (Lan3, Lan4 - optical interface)
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser.
To modify the time interval set into the box a value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.).
4. Into the Automatic Shutdown box, select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
timeout.

The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) (more info)
Spanning Tree is a protocol for the management of the connections, which supports the redundancy of the
path avoiding the creation of unwished loops in the network. In order that an Ethernet network operates
correctly, only an active path must exist between two stations. Multiple active paths cause loops in the
network and, as consequence, the possible replication of the messages to infinity.
The Spanning Tree protocol constitutes a tree logic network which pass through all the bridges into a com-
plex physical network forcing the possible duplicated paths (possible loops) into a stand-by status
(Blocked).
If a network segment becomes unreachable or if the cost of a path changes, the algorithm of Spanning
Tree reconfigures the topology of the network activating an alternative path.
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE:
• 802.1d (Spanning Tree Protocol).
• 802.1w (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol).
The use of the Spanning Tree protocol must be enabled at level of single port (LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3,
LAN 4, Port A).
The use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the external ports (LAN...) is alternative to the use of the line
Ethernet protection or of the Trunking modality.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other node elements through the
nodal Bus, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol can be enabled/disabled for the Ethernet traffic ports
(LAN 3, LAN 4 and Port A).
The management of the Ethernet nodal interconnection ports (LAN 1 and LAN 2) is responsibility of the
system which ensures that no data loop is created.
Even in this case, the use of the Spanning Tree protocol for the ports LAN 3, LAN 4 and Port A is alternative
to the use of the line Ethernet protection (only external ports) or of the Trunking modality.
Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) (more info)
The Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) is a function which allows implementing a protection at physical level
(Level 2) between two or more LAN external ports.
When the user enables the Ethernet line protection, even the management of the ELP switch is enabled.

The switch operates in automatic mode: the equipment executes the switch when the LOS alarm is present
on the LAN port in service. When the alarm clears, the controller does not execute the switch again.
The Ethernet line protection is implemented by means of proprietary protocol. As consequence, the ELP
switch is managed without considering alarms or settings executed on the equipment on the other side of
the LAN connection.
In ALCplus2 equipment, the line Ethernet protection can be enabled at equipment level (equipment ELP -
see pag.224) or at node level (node ELP - see pag.225).
This last chance is available and meaningful only for the equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and
which are interconnected to other node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.
Ethernet Line Protection of the equipment (ELP equipment)
The Ethernet line protection of the equipment allows setting in mutual protection more LAN ports of the
same equipment.
The functionality manages up to two different protection groups: Protection 1 and Protection 2.
In this way, it is possible to setting in mutual protection two, three or four LANs or setting in protection
the LANs in pairs of two.
In detail, the same protection group (Protection1) will be enable for the two, three or four LANs. In the
second case, a protection group (Protection1) will be enable for two LANs and the other protection group
(Protection2) for the remnant two.
The parameters, which determine which LAN port among those in protection must be set as operating, are
the port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.

When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more external ports, the port currently active
for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The port LAN
1 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 200.000, the port LAN 2 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost
250.000, the port LAN 3 is enabled, has a valid signal and cost 300.000. The port LAN 1 is used for the
transport.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.

When the ELP equipment function is enabled for two or more external ports and the ports have the
same cost, the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and low-
est priority value.
Example. For the ports LAN 1, LAN 2 and LAN 3 the ELP equipment function is enabled. The ports are
all enabled, have a valid signal and cost 200.000. The port LAN 1 has priority 1, the port LAN 2 has
priority 2, the port LAN 3 has priority 3. The port LAN 1 is used for the transport.
Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports are operating (status Designated), cost
and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical position is keep active.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB LCT the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:
LAN port Rule Port status

Operating Designated Forwarding
Reserve Alternate Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following op-
erations:
• To enable/disable the use of the LAN ports (parameter Rate Control - Fig.64)
• To enable/disable the ELP equipment functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (parameter
STP/ELP, Enable-Protection1 or Enable-Protection2 value - Fig.69).
• To set the port priority (parameter Priority - Fig.69)
• To set the port cost (parameter Path Cost - Fig.69)

The use of the equipment ELP functionality for each LAN port is alternative to the use of Spanning Tree
or of the Trunking modality.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other node elements through the
nodal Bus Ethernet, the use of the equipment ELP functionality can be enabled/disabled only for the Eth-
ernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN 4).
In this case, the use of the equipment ELP functionality (besides the use of the Spanning Tree protocol or
of the Trunking modality) is alternative to the use of the node ELP functionality.
Ethernet Line Protection of the node (ELP node)
Only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other node elements through
nodal Bus Ethernet, it is possible to enable the line Ethernet protection at node level (node ELP).
This ELP functionality, in fact, allows setting in mutual protection the Ethernet traffic ports (LAN 3 and LAN
4) of the equipment belonging to the node and interconnected by the nodal Bus Ethernet.
Up to 4 different protection groups can be created: Node Protection1, Node Protection2, Node Protection3
and Node Protection4.
For example, with reference to Fig.74, if you wish to set in mutual protection the port LAN 3 of A.1, A.2
and A.3, you must enable the node ELP functionality (Node Protection1) for all the three ports.
At the same time, if you wish to set in mutual protection the port LAN 4 of A.1, A.2 and A.3, you must
enable the node ELP functionality for all the above mentioned ports but not using the protection group Node
Protection1, which would insert the LAN 4 ports in the same protection group of the LAN 3 ports, but using
instead the group Node Protection2. In this way, a second node protection group is created, independent
from the first one.
The parameters, which determine which LAN port among those in protection must be set as operating, are
the port parameters foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol:
1. Cost. A connection cost can be assigned to every port.

When the ELP node function is enabled for two or more external ports, the port currently active for the
transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest cost.
Example. With reference to Fig.74. For the LAN 3 port of the equipment A.1 and for the LAN 4 port of
the equipment A.2, the node ELP function is enabled. The LAN 3 port of A.1 is enabled to the use, has
valid signal and has cost 200.000, the LAN 4 port of A.2 is enabled to the use, has valid signal and cost
250.000. For the transport, the port LAN 3 of A.1 is used.
2. Priority. A priority value between 1 and 9 can be assigned to every port.

When the ELP node function is enabled for two or more external ports and the ports have the same
cost, the port currently active for the transport will be the enabled port with valid signal and lowest
priority value.
Example. With reference to Fig.74. For the LAN 3 port of A.1 and the LAN 4 port of A.2 the node ELP
function is enabled. The ports are all enabled to use, have valid signal and cost 200.000. The LAN 3
port of A.1 has priority 1, the LAN 4 port of A.2 has priority 2. For the transport, the LAN 3 port of A.1
is used.
Only if the ELP function is enabled for one port when more ports have the node ELP function enabled
and are operating (status Designated), cost and priority being equal, the port with the lower physical po-
sition is keep active.
The physical position of the traffic external ports of a node is the following:
• LAN 3 of the first element of the node (lowest logic position)
• LAN 4 of the first element of the node
• LAN 3 of the second element of the node
• LAN 4 of the second element of the node
... and so on.
The values of Role and Port Status foreseen for the management of the Rapid Spanning Tree protocol have
been used to represent in WEB LCT the status of the ports involved in the ELP switch:

LAN port Rule Port status
Operating Designated Forwarding
Reserve Alternate Blocking
The user can manage the criteria for the choice of the operating/reserve port executing the following op-
erations:
• To enable/disable the use of the LAN ports (parameter Rate Control - Fig.64)
• To enable/disable the ELP node functionality on the LANs you wish to protect (parameter STP/
ELP, Enable-Node-Prot1, Enable-Node-Prot2, Enable-Node-Prot3 or Enable-Node-Prot4 value -
Fig.69).
• To set the port priority (parameter Priority - Fig.69)
• To set the port cost (parameter Path Cost - Fig.69)
The use of the node ELP function for the LAN 3 and LAN 4 ports is alternative to the use of the equipment
ELP functionality, of the Spanning Tree protocol or of the Trunking mode.
Fig.74 ELP of node (example)
Node A
Lan 3 (1)
A.1
Lan 4
Lan 3 (1)
Lan 4
A.2
Lan 1 and Lan 2
Ethernet
(Ethernet nodal
traffic
interconnection)
Lan 3 (1)
A.3
Lan 4
Lan 3 (1)
A.4
Lan 4
Notes of Fig.74
(1) A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4. Respectively first, second, third and fourth equipment of the node intercon-
nected to the nodal Bus Ethernet.
Trunking mode (more info)
The Trunking mode is a functionality which allows aggregating two or more Ethernet ports.
In this way, the ports belonging to the same group (Trunk) will be considered as a single entity.
In ALCplus2 equipment, it is possible to enable the Trunking mode for the external LAN ports (Trunking
Ethernet - see pag.227) and for the internal port Port A (Trunking radio - see pag.227).
This possibility is available only for the equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and interconnected by
the nodal Bus Ethernet.

Ethernet Trunking mode (LAN ports)
The Ethernet Trunking mode allows aggregating two or more physical ports (LAN) of the same equipment
to achieve a single logic channel.
The functionality manages up to 4 different aggregation groups (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1, Enable-Trunk2,

Enable-Trunk3 and Enable-Trunk4.
In this way, it is possible to aggregate two, three or four LANs or to aggregate the LANs at pair of two.
In the first case, the same aggregation group (Enable-Trunk1) will enable for the two, three or four LANs
of the Switch. In the second case, an aggregation group (Enable-Trunk1) will enable for the two LANs and
the other aggregation group (Enable-Trunk2) for the remnant two.
Up to 4 LAN ports for each Trunk can be aggregated.
The enabling of the Ethernet Trunking mode is in compliance with the standard LAG (Link Aggregation
Group) and the relevant LACP protocol (Link Aggregation Control Protocol).
For more information, refer to the standard IEEE 802.3ad (Link Aggregation).
The use of the Trunking Ethernet mode must be enabled at level of single external port (LAN 1, LAN 2,
LAN 3, LAN 4) and is in alternative to the use of the line Ethernet protection or of the Spanning Tree pro-
tocol.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other node elements through nodal
Bus Ethernet, the use of the Trunking mode can be enabled/disabled only for the external Ethernet traffic
ports (LAN 3, LAN 4). Even in this case, the use of the Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the line
Ethernet protection or of the Spanning Tree protocol.
If the Trunking modality is active for an external port and you wish to disable it, before executing the op-
eration it is necessary to disable the port itself (see Fig.64).
Radio Trunking mode (internal port - Port A)
This mode is available only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node and interconnected by nodal
Bus Ethernet.
The radio Trunking mode allows aggregating more radio of a nodal system.
The functionality manages an aggregation group (Trunk): Enable-Trunk1.
To insert a radio port of a Switch in the Trunk, it is necessary to enable the radio Trunking mode for this
port (Enable-Trunk1).
In this mode, up to 4 radio ports can be aggregated.
The use of the radio Trunking mode is alternative to the use of the Spanning Tree protocol.

Port A

The Port A command manages the Ethernet internal port.

Status and communication parameters

• To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port (pag.228)
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses in the MAC
Address Table for the internal port (pag.229)
Virtual Lan parameters

• To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port (pag.229)
• To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port
(pag.231)
• To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output (pag.231)
• To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value (pag.232)
• To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal port
(pag.232)
Priority parameters
• To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal
port to the output queue (pag.233)
• To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal
port which, in output, the Tag is added to (pag.234)
• To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port)
(pag.234)
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) parameters

• To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.234)
• To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port (pag.236)
• To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (pag.236)
• To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (pag.236)
Trunking mode parameters
• To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Trunking mode (pag.237)
• To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port (pag.237)
Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and interconnected to other
node elements through the nodal Bus Ethernet.

• MAC Address Table, refer to pag.199.
• Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.223
• Trunking mode go to pag.226
To verify/modify the enabling status of the internal port
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Port A command.
The Port A contextual area opens with the Interface tab active.
The Port parameter points out the enabling status of the internal port (see Fig.75).
• Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use.
• Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.

Fig.75 Interface tab (Port A contextual area)
Enabling
status of
the internal
port (1)
Enabling
status of the
automatic
learning of the
MAC Address in
the specific table
(MAC Table) (2)
Fig.75 notes
(1) Option:
• Disable. The internal port is not enabled to the use.
• Enable. The internal port is enabled to the use.
(2) Option:
To verify/modify the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses
in the MAC Address Table for the internal port
The MAC-based routing functionality in the Ethernet Switch is available only if enabled this function.
The Port A contextual area opens with the Interface tab active.
The MAC Learning parameter points out the enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Ad-
dress in the specific table (MAC Address Table) (see Fig.75).
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other elements of the node
through Ethernet nodal Bus, the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses must be enabled.
If the parameter Mac Learning has value:
• Disable, when the tab Interface is opened, the message You have to enable Mac Learning will
be displayed. Modify the value from Disable to Enable.
• Enable, it cannot be modified.

To verify/modify the default Vid value of the internal port

The Port A contextual area opens.

The Default Vid parameter points out the default Vid value of the port (see Fig.76).
The default Vid of a port is used as Vid in the field 802.1Q of the packets came from the port in subject
without Tag and destined to exit with Tag from any port of the Switch.
3. To change the parameter, type a numeric value in the box (maximum 4095).
Fig.76 VLan(802.1Q) tab (Port A contextual area)
Default
Vid value
of the port Forcing of the
Vid value of the
Control status port to the
of Tag Vlan ID default value (3)
on the messages
in input from
the port (1)
Behaviour of
the port towards
the packets in
output (2)
Ports through
which can transit
the messages in
input from the
internal port (4)
Fig.76 notes
(1) Option:
• Disable 802-1Q. The internal port does not analyse the Tag of the packets in input. They will
be sent only to the ports indicated in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Fallback. The internal port uses both the following modalities:
• If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports
enabled in the list for the same Tag.
• If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet
will be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Secure. The internal port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN
identifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port
does not belong to the VLAN itself.
(2) Option:
• Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the
packets in output from the port.
• Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority infor-
mation and VLAN identifier).
• Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port:
the identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
• Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is al-
ready tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The add-
ed Tag is composed by:
• The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message en-
tered in the equipment.
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the
option 802.1p is enabled on this port.

When the Add Double Tag value is active, besides the insertion of a Tag (Provider Tag)
on the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on
the packets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which
can be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
(3) Check-box:
• Active ( ). The forcing is enabled.
• Inactive. The forcing is disabled.
(4) For each single Ethernet port, if the set:

• Disable value, the packets, in input from the internal port, are not enabled to transit through
the specific external port.
• Enable value, the packets, in input from the internal port, are enabled to transit through the
specific external port
The Port A box is not displayed.
To verify/modify the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal
port
The Ingress Filtering Check parameter points out, if active, the control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages
in input from the port (see Fig.76).
• Disable 802-1Q. The internal port does not analyse the Tag (802.1Q) of the packets in input.
• Fallback. The internal port uses both the following modalities:
• If the Tag 802.1Q is present in the list of VLAN, the packet is sent to the other ports en-
abled in the list for the same Tag.
• If the Tag 802.1Q is not present in the list of VLAN or if no Tag is present, the packet will
be sent to the port listed in the Port Based VLAN area.
• Secure. The internal port discards the packets which have not, in their Tag, a known VLAN iden-
tifier, that is present in the list of VLAN; furthermore it discards the packets if the port does not
belong to the VLAN itself.
For each configuration (selection of the value Disable 802-1Q, Fallback and Secure) the table of
Port Based VLAN must be ALWAYS configured even if the traffic management is executed only on
Tag base (see pag.232).
If you wish to obtain a bidirectional traffic routed according the Vlan table, the control of the Tag
802.1Q (Fallback or Secure) must be activated on all the ports.
To verify/modify the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output

The Frame Egress Mode parameter points out the behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in
output (see Fig.76).
• Unmodified. The Tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) is not added or removed to the pack-

• Untagged. The packets in output from port are deprived of the Tag 802.1Q (priority information
and VLAN identifier).
• Tagged. The VLAN identifier, if not present, is added to the packets in output from the port: the
identifier is that indicated in the Default Vid box.
• Add Double Tag. The packets in output from the port are always tagged. If the packet is already
tagged, a second Tag is added. If the packet is not tagged, the Tag is added. The added Tag is
composed by:
• The Vlan identifier set in the Default Vid box of the port from which the message entered
in the equipment.
is disabled on this port. Otherwise by the native priority of the incoming packet if the op-
tion 802.1p is enabled on this port.
the packets in output from the considered port, the Provider Tag is always removed on the pack-
ets in input to the same port.
The Provider Tag added by the Double Tag function has an identifier (Ethernet Type) which can
be configured by the parameter QinQ ETH type.
In an ALCplus2 nodal system with the Trunking Radio modality enabled, when the option Add
Double Tag (QinQ) is active, for the traffic ports of the Switch (LAN 3, LAN 4, Port A) you must
set the value Disable 802-1Q for the parameter Ingress Filtering Check (see Fig.66/Fig.76) (the
routing of the traffic is not managed according to the VLAN table).
To force the value of Vid of the internal port to the default value
The Force Default VID parameter points out if the forcing of the Vid value of the internal port to the
default value is active (see Fig.76).
3. To change the parameter:
• Activate the Force Default VID ( ) check-box to enable the forcing.
• Deactivate the check-box to disable the forcing.
To enable/disable the ports through which the messages in input from the internal
port

The enabling status of the ports, through which can transit the messages in input from the internal port,
is pointed out in the Port Based VLAN area (see Fig.76).
The Port A box is not displayed.
3. To change the parameters, set the value:

• Disable, not to enable the packets in input from the internal port to transit through the specific
external port.
• Enable, to enable the packets in input from the internal port to transit through the specific ex-
ternal port.
Enabling a port involves the automatic enabling of the corresponding port. For example, if you
enable the port LAN 4 in the contextual area LAN 3, the port LAN 3 is automatically enabled in
the contextual area LAN 4.

To verify/modify the priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the
internal port to the output queue
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is connected to other node elements through Eth-
ernet nodal Bus, the level-3 priority (analysis of field PTOS/DSCP) is not managed when the transit of the
packets takes place through the nodal interconnection (see Fig.61).

The Priority parameter points out the priority criterion used to associated the packets, in input to the
internal port, to the output (see Fig.76).

• Disable, to disable the priority management.
• 802.1P, to analyse the value of 802.1p priority (level 2) for the choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS, to analyse the value of TOS (Type Of Service) (level 3).
• 802.1P-IpTOS, to analyse the value of 802.1p and, if not evaluate, the value of TOS for the
choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS-802.1P, to analyse the value of TOS and, if not evaluate, the value of 802.1p priority for
the choice of the output queue.
Fig.77 Priority Selection tab (Port A contextual area)
Priority criterion This table points

used to associated out the mapping
the packets, in of the priority
input to the port, 802.1p inside
to the output (1) the Tag VLan
(3)
Value to insert in the

field 802.1p of the Tag 802.1p
packets in input value of the
from the port which, packet in
in output, the output to the
Tag is added to (2) Switch
Tag 802.1p
value of the
packet in
input to the
Switch
Fig.77 notes
(1) Option:
• Disable. The priority is disabled.
• 802.1P. The value of the 802.1p priority (level 2) is analysed for the choice of the output
queue.
• IpTOS. The value of TOS (Type Of Service) is analysed (level 3).
• 802.1P-IpTOS. The value of the 802.1p priority is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value
of TOS for the choice of the output queue.
• IpTOS-802.1P. The value of TOS is analysed and, if not evaluated, the value of 802.1p pri-
ority for the choice of the output queue.

(2) Option:
(3) The priority 802.1p present in a packet in input to a port can be remapped in output from the Switch
with a different priority value.
The remapping of a priority is pointed out in the table by a check sign.
For example, as shown in the figure, a packet in input with priority 3 is remapped in output from
the Switch with priority 5.
The table is available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (pa-
rameter Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P) is active.
To verify/modify the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from
the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to

The Default Priority parameter points out the value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input
from the internal port which, in output, the Tag is added to (see Fig.77).
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
To verify/modify the mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal
port)
Operation available and meaningful only if the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p (parameter
Priority set to the value 802.1P, 802.1P-IpTOS or IpTOS-802.1P - see Fig.77) is active.
If the analysis of the value of the priority 802.1p is active, the mapping of the priority in the Tag VLan
is pointed out in the tab (see Fig.77).
3. In order to modify a value, select in the table the box (the check sign is displayed) corresponding to
the wished combination: values of Tag 802.1p in input to the port - value of Tag 802.1p in output from
the Switch.
To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
2. Select the STP... tab.

The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol or to the Trunking
modality (only for equipment belonging to an ALCplus2 node).

Fig.78 STP/Trunking tab (STP active) (Port A contextual area)
(1)
Status of the
ports in
relation to the
Spanning Tree
protocol (2)
Enabling status of
the Spanning
Tree protocol for
the port (3)
Port
priority (4)
Cost of the
network part
directly connected
to the port
Fig.78 notes
(1) If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and it is interconnected to other elements of the node
through nodal Bus Ethernet, the name of the considered tab is STP/Trunking and the parameter
Trunk is present in the tab (see Fig.79).
Differently, if the equipment is not a node element or is an element interconnected to other ele-
ments only through the nodal Bus TDM, the name of the tab is STP and the parameter Trunk is not
present.
(2) Parameter:

Port status

(3) Value:
• Disable. STP protocol disabled

• Enable-Bridge1. STP protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1)
• Enable-Bridge2. STP protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2)
If the Trunking modality is enabled (see Fig.79) the parameter STP is automatically forced to
the value Disable. To modify the value, it is then first necessary to disable the use of the Trunking
modality.
(4) Value:
To enable/disable the Spanning Tree protocol for the internal port
The Spanning Tree protocol cannot be enabled when the Trunking modality is enabled (see Fig.79). To
enable the STP protocol, it is first necessary to disable the use of the Trunking modality.
The STP parameter points out the enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol for the selected port
(see Fig.78).
• Disable. Protocol disabled
• Enable-Bridge1. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1)
• Enable-Bridge2. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2)
To verify/modify the priority of the internal port (STP)

The Priority parameter points out the priority of the internal port (see Fig.78).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value (0: highest priority, 15: lowest priority).
To verify/modify the connection cost of the internal port (STP)

The Path Cost parameter points out the cost of the network part directly connected to the internal port
(see Fig.78). This cost determines, priority being equal among two or more redundant connections, the
preference of a port with respect to the others.
This cost must be inversely proportional to the bit rate of the port
3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box.
It is suggested to set a value belonging to the Recommended Range according to what pointed out in
the Standard IEEE 802.1w.

To verify the status of the internal port in relation to the Trunking mode
Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to the
other node elements by the nodal Bus Ethernet.
2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.

The tab points out the status of the port in relation to the Trunking modality or to the Spanning Tree
protocol.
Fig.79 reports an example of the tab when the Trunking modality is active.
Fig.79 STP/Trunking tab (Trunk active) (Port A contextual area)
(2)
Enabling status
of the Trunking
mode for
the port (1)
Fig.79 notes
(1) Value:
• Disable. Trunking mode disabled
• Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.
If the STP protocol is enabled (see Fig.78) the parameter Trunk is automatically forced to the
value Disable. To modify the value, it is first necessary to disable the Spanning Tree protocol.
(2) Parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol (see Fig.78).
To enable/disable the Trunking mode for the internal port
Operations available only if the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is interconnected to other
elements of the node through nodal Bus Ethernet.
The Trunking modality cannot be enabled when the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled.
2. Select the STP/Trunking tab.
The Trunk parameter points out the enabling status of the Trunking mode for the selected port (see
Fig.79).

• Enable-Trunk1. Trunking mode enabled at radio port level.

Spanning Tree

The change of the default values of the configuration (Hello Time, Forward Delay, Max Age) of the Span-
ning Tree protocol could damage the correct operation of the Spanning Tree protocol itself.
The Spanning Tree command manages the spanning tree in the network
• To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.238)
• To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets (Hello Time) (pag.239)
• To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval (pag.239)
• To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets (Max Age) (pag.239)
• To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol (pag.239)
• To verify the MAC Address of a Bridge (pag.241)
• To verify/modify the priority of a Bridge (pag.241)
Moreover, if for one or more external ports (LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 or LAN 4) the STP is not active, but the
Ethernet line protection is active, by means of the Spanning Tree command it is possible:
• To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the Ethernet line protection (pag.241)

• Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) go to pag.223.
• Ethernet Line Protection (ELP) go to pag.223.
To verify/modify the version of the Spanning Tree protocol
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Spanning Tree command.
The Spanning Tree contextual area opens with the Settings tab active.
The Force Version parameter points out the version of the Spanning Tree protocol to use (see Fig.80).

• rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol characterized
by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
Fig.80 Setting tab (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Version of the
Spanning Tree
protocol (1)
Transmission
interval of the
BPDU packets
Forward
Delay interval
Maximum
lifetime of the
BPDU packets

Fig.80 notes
(1) Value:
• rapid-stp-802-1w. Rapid Spanning Tree protocol standard IEEE 802.1w. Protocol character-
ized by a greater speed (lower convergence time).
To verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets
The Hello Time parameter points out the time interval that passes between two consecutive transmis-
sions of the BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packet from the Ethernet ports with the Spanning Tree
function enabled (see Fig.80).
2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 2sec.
To verify/modify the Forward Delay interval
The Forward Delay parameter points out the time interval which passes between the passage between
the port-blocking status and the port-learning status and between the port-learning status and the
port-forwarding status of the port (see Fig.80).
2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 15 sec.
To verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets
The Max Age parameter points out the maximum number of switches which the packet can pass
through before expiring. The passage from a Switch to another one involves the decrease of 1 second
per equipment (see Fig.80).
2. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value. Default: 20 sec.
To verify the status of the Ethernet ports in relation to the Spanning Tree protocol
The Spanning Tree contextual area opens.
2. Select the Summary tab.

The tab for every Ethernet port displays the parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol or to
the Ethernet line protection (only external ports).

Fig.81 Summary tab (STP active) (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Status of the
Ethernet ports
in relation to the
Spanning Tree
protocol (1)
Fig.81 notes
(1) Parameter:
• LAN.../Port A. Enabling status of the Spanning Tree protocol of the specific port:
• Disable. Protocol disabled.
• Bridge 1. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 1).
• Bridge 2. Protocol enabled (the port belongs to Bridge 2).

Port status


To verify the MAC Address of a Bridge
2. Select the wished Bridge tab: Bridge 1, Bridge 2.
The MAC Address parameter points out the physical address of the specific Bridge.
Fig.82 shown an example.
Fig.82 Bridge... tab (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Physical
address
of the
bridge
Bridge
priority
(1)
Fig.82 notes
(1) Value:
• 0. Maximum priority.
• 15. Minimum priority.
To verify/modify the priority of a Bridge
2. Select the wished Bridge tab: Bridge 1, Bridge 2.

The Priority parameter points out the priority of the Bridge to use in the auto negotiation of the root:
0 (maximum priority), 15 (minimum priority). If two bridges have the same priority, the Bridge with
lower MAC Address is chosen as root.
Fig.82 shown an example.
3. To change the parameter move the cursor to the wished value.
To verify the status of the external ports in relation to the Ethernet line protection
2. Select the Summary tab.

The tab for every Ethernet port displays the parameters relevant to the Spanning Tree protocol or to
the Ethernet line protection (only external ports).
Fig.83 reports an example of the tab when the Ethernet line protection is active.
Fig.83 Summary tab (ELP active) (Spanning Tree contextual area)
Status of
the ports in
relation to the
Ethernet line
protection (1)
Fig.83 notes
(1) Parameter:
• LAN.... Enabling status of the Ethernet line protection of the specific port:
• Prot1. Ethernet line protection of the equipment (see pag.224) enabled (Protection1).
• Prot2. Ethernet line protection of the equipment enabled (Protection2).
• Node Prot1. Ethernet line protection of the node (see pag.225) enabled (Node
Protection1).
• Node Prot2. Ethernet line protection of the node enabled (Node Protection2).
• Role. Role assigned by the Ethernet line protection to each port. The role defines the behav-
iour of the port:
• Alternate. Port in alternative to the root port, as it offers an alternative path towards
the Bridge Root with cost higher than that of the root port. Normally the Alternate
port is in port-blocking status.
• Designated. Port active. Each Designated port is in port-forwarding status.

Port status
• Version. Parameter not meaningful in this condition.

TDM Tributaries
At the choice of TDM Tributaries option, the program displays the following commands:
• E1 (pag.244). It manages the 2Mbit/s tributaries.

• STM-1 (pag.247). It manages the 2STM-1 tributary.
• VC-4 (pag.256). It manages the VC4 virtual container.
• VC-12 (pag.261). It manages VC12 virtual container.
The STM-1, VC-4 and VC-12 commands are available only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp.
2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 streams
is active (see Fig.44).

E1

The E1 command manages the 2Mbit/s tributary.

• To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status (pag.244)

• To verify/modify the label of a tributary (pag.245)
• To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use (pag.245)
• To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops (pag.246)
To verify the 2Mbit/s tributary status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > E1 command.
The E1 contextual area opens, where the status of the tributaries, of the loops and of the alarms is
pointed out (see Fig.84).
Fig.84 E1 contextual area
Select this
arrows to
display a
different
group of
tributaries
(5)
Tributary
label
Tributary use Line side

status (1) loop
status (4)
Management
of LOS alarm Inner side
when the loop
tributary is status (4)
not used (2)
Tributary
alarms
status (3)
Fig.84 notes
(1) Symbol:
• . The tributary is not active (tributary not used). In this condition, the alarms are inhib-
ited and the LOS alarm is raised or not depending on the setting of the LOS Inv box (see
next note).
• . The tributary is active (tributary used). In this condition, the controller does not inhibit
the alarms.
If the symbol relevant to tributary A and/or B is not available (grey symbol), this means that
the tributary is not available for the traffic as already used as synchronism in input and/or output
(see pag.176).

(2) If the box is:
• The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is not raised if, with tributary disabled, the
2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
• The alarms are inhibited and the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/
s signal is however connected.
To verify the status of the LOS Inv box, it is sufficient to move the pointer on the box which points
out the summary alarm status. A dynamic window is displayed containing the LOS Inv box (the fig-
ure shows an example).
The status of the LOS Inv box IS MEANINGFUL ONLY if the tributary is not used.
(3) The colour of box points out the status of the alarm:
• White. The alarm is not active.
To verify the alarm detail, it is sufficient to move the pointer on the box. A dynamic window is dis-
played, where the status of each single alarm is displayed (the figure displays an example).
(4) Symbol:
• . The line loop is active.
• . The internal loop is active.
• . The loop is not active.
(5) In detail, use the keys to scroll the tabs and the key to display the list of the tabs
The number of available tributaries changes according to the equipment type.
To verify/modify the label of a tributary
The E1 contextual area opens, where the label of each single tributary is pointed out (see Fig.84).
2. To modify the label of a tributary, select the label itself.

A dynamic window is displayed.
3. Type an alphanumeric string of maximum 40 characters.
4. Press Ok.
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributaries use
Operation not available for the tributaries A and/or B if already used for the T12 synchronism in output
(see pag.176).
The E1 contextual area opens (see Fig.84).
2. Select the tributary to be enabled (or disabled).

The tributary assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it becomes disabled
and vice versa).
If the tributary is enabled and you wish to disabled it, at the selection tributary the message Do you
want LOS inversion enable? is displayed. Pressing:
• Ok, the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
• No, the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.

When the tributary is disabled the management status of LOS alarm can be modified in the following
way.
Move the pointer over the box which points out the summary alarm status of the tributary for which
you wish to verify or modify the management of LOS alarm.
A dynamic window is displayed containing the LOS Inv box. If the box is:
• the LOS alarm is NOT raised if, with tributary disabled, the signal is however connected.
• the LOS alarm is raised if, with tributary disabled, the 2Mbit/s signal is however connected.
Select the box to enable or disable the alarm management. Each time is selected, the box assumes the
status complementary to the previous one (if enabled, it changes to disabled and vice versa).
To activate/deactivate the 2Mbit/s tributary loops
The E1 contextual area opens (see Fig.84).
2. Select the loop to be activated (or deactivated).
The loop assumes the state complementary to the previous one (if activated, it becomes deactivated
and vice versa).
The activation of the loop on internal side automatically enables the tributary, if this is already en-
abled.
3. Press Apply.
If at least one loop is going to be activated, a message is displayed that warns that you are executing
a forcing and the current setting of the timeout.

The activation of, at least, one loop causes the activation of the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is
switched off and, then, switched on, independently from the previous setting, the loops are deactivat-
ed.
If the Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, verify that the user profile in use can enable
the tributary.

STM-1
This menu is available only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp.
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 streams is active (see Fig.44).
At the choice of STM-1 option, the program displays the following commands:
• Lim A STM-1 [x] (pag.248). It manages the configuration of the specific STM-1 stream.
The x value points out the STM-1 stream which the command is referred to (1, 2).

Lim A STM-1 [x]

This command is available only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.44).
The command relevant to the STM-1 2 stream (Lim A STM-1 [2]) is available only if the protection of STM-
1 stream (MSP mode) is active or if the management of two unprotected STM-1 streams is active (MST
mode).
The Lim A STM-1 [x] command manages the configuration of the specific STM-1 stream.
• To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream (pag.248)

• To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side) (pag.250)
• To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte (pag.250)
• To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier
(pag.250)
• To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms (pag.251)
• To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.251)
• To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm (pag.252)
The following operations are available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface.
• To verify the current status of the laser (pag.252)

• To verify the type of laser module (pag.253)
• To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser (pag.253)
• To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser (pag.254)
• To enable manually the laser transmission (pag.254)
• To execute the test laser functioning status (pag.255)
To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 stream
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > STM-1 > Lim A STM-1 [x] com-
mand.
The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens with the Settings tab active.
In the Loop And Alarms area the status of the STM-1 stream is pointed out (see Fig.85).
2. To change the status of the STM-1 stream, select the symbol that represents the stream.
The symbol assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it switches to inactive
and vice versa).

Fig.85 Settings tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Status of the
STM-1 loop on
line side (1)
Status of
the STM-1
stream (2)
Status of
the alarms
of STM-1 Status of the
stream (3) STM-1 loop on
inner side (1)
Sequence of
Enabling characters
status of transmitted
the J0 and/or
byte (4) received (5)
Fig.85 notes
(1) Symbol:
• . The STM-1 loop on line side is active.
• . The STM-1 loop on inner side is active.
• . The loop is inactive.
(2) Symbol:
• . The STM-1 stream is not active (unused stream). In this condition, the alarms are in-
hibited and the LOS alarm is raised, with disabled stream the STM-1 signal is however con-
nected.
• . The STM-1 stream is active (used stream). In this condition, the controller does not
inhibit the alarms.
(3) The colour of each box points out the status of the alarm:

• Disable. The control of the J0 byte is disabled.
• 1 byte ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0
Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
• 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm
signal (J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
(5) Box:
• Sent Trace. Transmitted sequence of the control characters.
• Expected Trace. Character sequence to be controlled at reception.
• Received Trace. Character sequence in reception.

To verify/modify the status of the STM-1 loops (line side and inner side)
mand.
In the Loop And Alarms area the status of the STM-1 loops on line side and inner side is pointed out
(see Fig.85).
2. To change the parameter, select the loop.

The loop assumes the status complementary to the previous one (if active, it switches to inactive and
vice versa).
The STM-1 loops on line side and on inner side cannot be activated at the same time.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating a loop a message is displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and
displaying the current setting of timeout.
The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the loop is inactive, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte
mand.
Into the Trace Type area the enabling status of the J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is point-
ed out (see Fig.85).

• 1 byte ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 1 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte and the received one creates an alarm signal (J0 Trace
Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
• 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J0 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal
(J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
To verify/modify the sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier
mand.
Into the J0 Trace Identifier area the sequences of the characters at transmission and/or at reception
relevant to J0 byte used for the control of STM-1 signal is pointed out (see Fig.85).
2. To change the parameter, type a new string of ASCII characters into the box:
• Sent Trace, to change the transmitted sequence of the control characters.
• Expected Trace, to change the sequence of the characters to be controlled at reception.
The number of characters that has to constitute the sequence depends on the selected option push-
button into the Trace Type area (1 or 16 bytes).

To verify the status of the STM-1 alarms
mand.
In the Loop And Alarms area, the status of the STM-1 stream alarms is displayed (see Fig.85).
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm
mand.
The Lim A STM-1 [x] contextual area opens.
2. Select the Thresholds tab.

The B2 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B2 Signal De-
grade alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal (see Fig.86).

• E-5, at the detection of a BER > 10E-5 the alarm is activated.
4. Press Apply and then confirm.
Fig.86 Thresholds tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Intervention
threshold of
the B2 Signal
Degrade alarm
(1)
Intervention
threshold of the
B2 Excessive
BER alarm (2)
Fig.86 notes



To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm
mand.
2. Select the Thresholds tab.

The B2 Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive
BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B2 of the STM-1 signal (see Fig.86).
To verify the current status of the laser
Operation available only for equipment with STM-1 stream with optical interface.
mand.

In the Laser Control area the status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.87).
Fig.87 Laser Control tab (Lim A STM-1... contextual area)
Current
status of the
laser (1)
Enabling Laser
status of the module
laser (3) type (2)
(5)
Transmission
mode of the
laser (4) (6)
Fig.87 notes
(1) Wording:
• Status On. The laser is on transmission.
• Status Off. The laser is not on transmission.
(2) Value:
• optical-S11. S type laser module (application: Inter office-Short-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-
1), 1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).

• optical-L11. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-1),
1 (fibber type: according to G.652 Spec.).
• optical-L12. L type laser module (application: Inter office-Long-haul), 1 (STM level: Stm-1),
2 (fibber type: according to G.652, G.654 Specifications).
• optical-I1. I type laser module (application: Intra office), 1 (STM level: Stm-1).
• Unknown. The laser module is not one of the above listed modules (possible anomaly of the
laser module).
Classification of the optical interface according to G.957 Specification.


• Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real
presence of the optical signal.
• Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when
the signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not
transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x
seconds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if
the signal at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present,
after x seconds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
• Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of test laser operation status).
If the management of STM-1 stream in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality is active (see Fig.44), the
Automatic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that, in the Automatic Shutdown
area, the value Disable (option not modifiable) is automatically set and the other items of the area
are not available.
(5) Auto Restart Time. Time (expressed by means of seconds) waited by the equipment controller be-
fore trying again the laser turning-on (when the transmission mode of the laser is Auto).
(6) Test Time. Time (expressed in seconds) during which the equipment controller turns on the laser
during the testing operation.
To verify the type of laser module
mand.

The Module Type parameter points out the type of laser module (see Fig.87).
To verify/modify the enabling status of the laser
mand.

In the Laser Control area the enabling status of the laser is pointed out (see Fig.87).

4. Press Apply.
Only if you are disabling the laser (selection of the Off option), a message is displayed warning that
you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.

The laser disabling activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and switched off, the
laser is enabled to transmit independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the transmission mode of the laser
mand.

In the Automatic Shutdown area the transmission mode of the laser is displayed (see Fig.87).
If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.44), the Auto-
matic Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is
forced to Disable.
In this case, the change operation here below is not available.

• Disable. The laser transmission is affected only by its enabling status and not by the real pres-
ence of the optical signal.
• Auto. The transmission of the laser is affected by the presence of the optical signal: when the
signal is present, the laser transmits, when the signal is not present, the laser does not transmit.
In this last condition, the controller automatically turns on the laser for 2 seconds every x sec-
onds (adjustable into the Auto Restart Time box) to activate the remote transmitter: if the signal
at reception is present, the laser will continue to transmit, while if it is not present, after x sec-
onds, the laser will be turned on again for 2 seconds and so on.
To modify the Auto Restart Time interval set into the relevant box a value comprised between
60 and 300 sec. (default 120 sec.). Press Apply and confirm.
• Test. The laser transmits for x seconds (operation of laser functioning status).
4. Press Apply.
Only if you are setting Disable, Manual or Test as transmission modality for the laser, a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of the timeout.
The selection of a modality different from Auto activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the user turns off the
equipment and then turns it on again, without taking into any account the preceding setting, the trans-
mission mode of the laser is Auto.
To enable manually the laser transmission

If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.44), the Automatic
Shutdown function is permanently disabled. This means that the laser transmission modality is forced to
Disable. In this case, this operation is not available.
mand.

3. Into the Automatic Shutdown area, select the Manual option.
4. Press Apply.
timeout.

The setting of the Manual modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.

The laser transmits for 2 seconds and then stops itself.
To execute the test laser functioning status
If the management of STM-1 stream is active in 1+1 MSP No ALS modality (see Fig.44), the Automatic
Shutdown function is permanently disabled (laser transmission modality is forced to Disable). In this case,
this operation is not available.
mand.
3. Set, into the Test Time box, the number of seconds during which the user wants to turn on the laser.
To modify the time interval set into the box a value comprised between 1 and 100 sec. (default 90 sec.).
4. Into the Automatic Shutdown area, select the Test option.
5. Press Apply.
timeout.

The setting of the Test modality, activates the MAN. OP alarm.
The laser transmits for the number of seconds set into the Test Time box and then it stops itself.

VC-4
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.44).
At the choice of VC-4 option, the program displays the following commands:
• Lim A VC-4[x] (pag.257). It manages the specific VC4 virtual container configuration.

Lim A VC-4 [x]

The Lim A VC-4 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 streams is
active (MST mode).
The Lim A VC-4 [x] command manages the specific VC4 virtual container configuration.
• To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte (pag.257)

(pag.258)
• To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms (pag.258)
• To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.258)
• To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm (pag.259)
• To verify/modify the Signal Label value (pag.260)
To verify/modify the control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-4 > Lim A VC-4 [x] command.
The Lim A VC-4 [x] contextual area opens with the J1/Alarms tab active.
The Trace Type parameter points out the enabling status of the overhead J1 byte used for the control
of the received signal (see Fig.88).

• 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte. The
inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm signal
(J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
Fig.88 J1/Alarms tab (Lim A VC-4... contextual area)
Enabling Status of
status of VC-4
the J1 virtual
byte (1) container
alarms (3)
Sequence of
characters
transmitted
and/or
received (2)

Fig.88 notes

• 16 bytes ctrl. The control of the J1 byte is enabled; it is executed on a sequence of 16 byte.
The inconsistency between the waited byte sequence and the received one creates an alarm
signal (J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm).
(2) Box:
• Received Path Trace. Character sequence in reception.
(3) The colour of each box points out the status of the alarm:
In the tab the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to the byte J1, used
for the control of the received signal, is pointed out (see Fig.88).
To verify the status of the VC-4 alarms
In the Alarms area the status of the VC-4 alarms is pointed out (see Fig.88).
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm
The Lim A VC-4 [x] contextual area opens.
2. Select the B3/Signal Label tab.

The B3 Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B3 Signal De-
grade alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal (see Fig.89).


Fig.89 B3/Signal Label tab (Lim A VC-4... contextual area)
Intervention
Intervention
threshold of
threshold of the
the B3 Signal
B3 Excessive
Degrade alarm
BER alarm (2)
(1)
Signal
Label
configuration
parameters
(3)
Fig.89 notes


(3) Box:
• Sent Label. Specification which the transmitted value of Signal Label refers to.
• Expected Label. Specification which the received value of Signal Label refers to.
• Received Signal Label. Specification which the received signal refers to.
The specifications, according to G.707 ITU-T Rec. are: Path UnEquipped, Tug Structure.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm

The B3 Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive
BER alarm according to the error degree calculated on the byte B3 of the received signal (see Fig.89).

To verify/modify the Signal Label value

In the Signal Label area, the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of the
received signal is displayed (see Fig.89).
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC4 Signal Label Mis-
match Alarm).
3. To modify the parameter, set in the box:

• Sent Label. The specification which the value of the transmitted C2 byte refers to.
• Expected Label. The specification which the value of the expected C2 byte refers to.
The specifications, which can be set in the Sent Label and Expected Label boxes according to G.707
ITU-T Rec. are: Path UnEquipped, Tug Structure.

VC-12
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the management of STM-1 stream is active (see Fig.44).
At the choice of VC-12 option, the program displays the following commands:
• VC-12 Thresholds (pag.262). It manages the intervention threshold of some VC12 alarms.
• Lim A VC-12 [x] (pag.264). It manages the configuration parameters of each VC-12 channel.

VC-12 Thresholds

The VC-12 Thresholds command manages the intervention threshold of some VC12 alarms.
• To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (pag.262)
• To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (pag.263)
To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds com-
mand.
The VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens.
The Signal Degrade Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal De-
grade alarm (see Fig.90).

Fig.90 VC-12 Thresholds contextual area
Intervention
thresholds
of the VC12
Signal Degrade
alarm (1)
Intervention
thresholds
of the VC1
Excessive
BER alarm (2)
Fig.90 notes



To verify/modify the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > VC-12 Thresholds com-
mand.
The VC-12 Thresholds contextual area opens.
The Excessive BER Threshold parameter points out the intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive
BER alarm (see Fig.90).


Lim A VC-12 [x]

The Lim A VC-12 [2] command is available only if the management of two unprotected STM-1 streams is
active (MST mode).
The Lim A VC-12 [x] command manages the configuration parameter of each VC-12 channel.
• To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12 (pag.264)
of a VC-12 (pag.265)
• To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12 (pag.265)
• To verify the alarms status of a VC-12 (pag.266)
To verify/modify the control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte of a VC-12
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > TDM Tributaries > VC-12 > Lim A VC-12 [x] com-
mand.
The Lim A VC-12 [x] contextual area opens with the TUG-3 1 tab active (see Fig.91).
2. Select the wished VC-12 channel.
If the VC-12 channel is in TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3, in order to select it, first it is necessary to select the
tab TUG-3 2 or TUG-3 3 and then the VC-12.
The Lim A STM-1 VC-12 <TUG3-TUG2-TUG12> window opens.
The enabling status of the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal is pointed out in the J2
Trace Identifier area. If the active option is:
• Disable. The control of the byte C2 is disabled.
• Enable. The control of the byte C2 is enabled.
3. To change the parameter, select the wished value.
Fig.91 TUG-3 x tab (Lim A VC-12... contextual area)
VC-12
channel
(1)

Fig.91 notes
(1) Each VC-12 channel is represented by a box and by the number of the channel reported into the
box.
The position of the box identifies the TUG-3 and the TUG-2 which the VC-12 belongs to.
The total status of the channel is displayed by the color of the box:
• Grey. No alarm is active.
• Red, orange, yellow or light blue. At least one alarm of channel is active and it has severity,
respectively, Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
If there are more alarms with different severity, the color of the box will point out the most
serious alarm present in the VC-12 channel.

of a VC-12
mand.

In the J2 Trace Identifier area, the sequence of characters in transmission and/or reception relevant to
the byte J2 used for the control of the received signal. In detail, the box:
• Received Path Trace. Character sequence in reception.
To verify/modify the Signal Label value of a VC-12
mand.
In the Signal Label area, the setting of the value of Signal Label (byte C2) used for the control of the
received signal is displayed. In detail, the box:
• Sent Label. Specification which the value of the transmitted byte C2 refers to.
• Expected Label. Specification which the value of the expected byte C2 refers to.
The mismatch between expected value and received value generates an alarm (VC12 Signal Label Mis-
match Alarm).
3. To change the parameter, set in the Sent Label and Expected Label box the new specification.
The specifications which can be set in the Sent Label and Expected Label boxes, according to G.707
ITU-T Rec. are: Path Unequipped, Asynchronous.

To verify the alarms status of a VC-12
mand.
In the Alarms area, for each alarm of the Vc12 channel, there is a box containing the alarm name. The
color of the box indicates the alarm status:
• Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has severity, respectively, Critical, Ma-
jor, Minor or Warning.

Cross Connection

Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion.
The Cross Connection command it manages the cross-connection matrix.

• To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format (pag.267)

• To display the connections of the equipment in table format (pag.273)
• To execute a Tributary-Radio connection (pag.274)
• To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection (pag.274)
• To delete one or more connections (pag.275)
• To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) (pag.275)
• To disable an Auto-Loop (pag.276)
• To verify/modify the connection label (pag.276)
• To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (ALplus node) (pag.277)
For more information about the cross connection matrix go to pag.277.
To display the connections of the equipment in graphic format
It is possible to display only one connection at a time.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Base Band > Cross Connection command.
The Cross connection contextual area opens with the Matrix tab active (see Fig.92).
2. Press Configuration.
The Cross Connection Manager window opens where the existing connections are displayed.
3. To display a connection, move the pointer on a channel used for the connection you wish to verify.
If are highlighted:
• A tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and an E1 radio connected by a blue
line, the connection is of type Tributary-Radio.
• Two different tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) connected by a blue line,
the connection is of type Tributary-Tributary.
• The same tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS/E1 radio) with a blue line
linking the channel itself, the connection is of Auto-Loop type.

Fig.92 Matrix tab (Cross Connection contextual area)
Press this
push-button
to open the
window with
the detail of
the connections

Fig.93 Cross Connection Manager window
CHANNELS area (1)
Status channels Preferential Trash VIEW area Push-buttons

key (3) Nodal Link area (5) (2) (4)

Fig.93 notes
(1) This area displays the (tributary and radio) channels provided on the equipment and grouped by
membership streams.
Every channel is represented by a box.

For the E1 channels, the channel number is pointed out in the box.
For the VC-12 channels (Expansion STM-1) the TU12 number is pointed out in the box while the
position of the box identifies the TUG3 and the TUG2 of membership of VC-12.
The status of use of the channel is represented by the colour of the box (see note 3). The currently
selected channel is represented by the yellow box.
The streams displayed in this area change according to the settings made by the user in the View
area (see note 2).
When an used channel is selected, the connection is displayed represented by a blue line with a
yellow rectangle next where the connection name is reported.
A connection is named on its creation by means of a default name composed by the names of the
channels composing the connection separated by /. The default name can be modified by the user.
(2) The parameters present in the View area determine the streams displayed in the channels area.
If the selected option is:
• Tributary-Radio. The channels area contains:
• The radio stream subdivided in the group of high priority E1 channels (Radio Perma-
nent E1 (<radio branch label>) and the group of low priority E1 channels (Radio Extra
E1 (<radio branch label>).
The order used to display the Extra E1 Radio channels depends on the priority defined
by the user (seeFig.49).
• Only one stream among the available ones.
The right part of the View area displays the parameter Tributary which is used to modify the
tributary stream present in the channels area.
Selecting the arrow of the Tributary box, the list of the available streams is displayed.
Selecting a value, the central part of the channels area changes displaying the detail of the
channel for the selected tributary.
• Tributary-Tributary. The channels area contains two different tributary streams.
The top part displays the tributary stream pointed out in the box 1st Trib. The bottom part
displays the tributary stream pointed out in the box 2nd Trib.
In order to display a different tributary, select the arrow of the box 1st Trib or 2nd Trib and
select a value from the list. The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception
of the tributary set in the other box …Trib.
The boxes 1st Trib and 2nd Trib are displayed in the right part of the View area instead of
the parameter Tributary when the Tributary-Tributary option is selected.
In the boxes Tributary, 1st Trib and 2nd Trib the following values can be present:
• Expansion 16xE1. E1 channels of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1).
• Expansion 32xE1. E1 channels of the expansion (equipment IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1).
• Expansion STM-1. VC-12 channels of STM-1 streams.
If the management of two STM-1 streams is active (see Fig.44), the values Expansion STM-
1 [1] and Expansion STM-1 [2] will be available, which respectively point out VC12 channels
of the first and of the second STM-1.
• NBUS.... E1 channels of Nodal Bus.
The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration.The detail
is pointed out in Tab.8.
The availability of the above mentioned values depends on the type of equipment and on the
equipped tributary streams. The detail is pointed out in Tab.7.
If the user moves the pointer over a channel used for a connection and at least one of the (radio/
tributary) streams involved by the connection is not displayed in the cross-connection window, the
View area dynamically displays the connections existing between the channels and the type of con-
nection. Here below an example is reported.

If the equipment is not provided with the radio (see option Radio A - Fig.44), the options Tributary-Radio
and Tributary-Tributary are not present in the View area, because in case of absence of the radio the Radio-
Tributary cross-connections cannot be realized as the Radio E1 channels are not available.
In this case, in the View area, displayed in the following window, there will be only the boxes 1st Trib and
2nd Trib. The meaning of the boxes and the values available for each box are the same described at the
beginning of the note.
(3) The key points out the colours that determines the status of the channels:
• Dark green (Auto loop req.). The channel has been selected for an Auto-Loop. The apply
command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been transmitted to the equipment yet
(Auto-Loop requested).
• Light blue (Auto loop). The channel is used for an Auto-Loop executed on the equipment (real
Auto-Loop).
• Light green (Unlinked). The channel is not used.
• Purple (Link requested). The channel has been selected for a Tributary-Tributary or Tribu-
tary-Radio connection. The apply command (selection of Apply push-button) has not been
transmitted to the equipment yet (connection requested).
• Blue (Linked). The channel is used for a Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio connection
executed on the equipment (real connection).
• Grey (Linked to Trib. A/B). The channel is used for the pre-configured connection with the
Tributary A (box A) or tributary B (box B).
The pre-configured connections cannot be modified or deleted.
(4) Push-button:
• Refresh. It forces the reading of the data from the equipment.
If you have made at least one modification, to the choice of the push-button a confirmation
message is displayed. Pressing:
• Ok. The data present in the window are updated and all the changes made to the con-
nections and not confirmed yet (selection of Apply push-button) are lost.
• No. The data present in the window are not updated.
• Apply. It makes the changes operating.

When it is selected, a confirmation message is displayed. Pressing:
• Ok. All the changes made on the matrix are communicated to the controller.
• No. The operation is not executed.
• Help. It opens the help on-line.
(5) This area is available only if the equipment ALCplus2 with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1 belongs to a three-elements protected ALplus node composed by AL IDU plus equipment (pa-
rameter Node Type: ALplus, Nodal Type: 3 Element, Nodal Protection: Protected - see Fig.44).
In this condition, the user can select, in the Preferential Nodal Link area, to which element of the
node transmit in preferential mode the E1 channel (protected NBUS) cross-connected with another
channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS protected/E1 radio).
The key shows the colours determining the status of only the channels involved in this type of con-
nections:
• Dark orange (Link to IDU ... req). The channel has been selected for a connection composed
by a protected NBUS channel and another channel. The connection will be sent in preferential
mode to the IDU of the first nodal element. The apply command (selection of Apply push-
button) has not been sent yet to the equipment (requested connection).
• Light orange (Link to IDU ...). The channel is used for a connection, composed by a protected
NBUS channel and another channel, applied on the equipment (real connection). The con-
nection is sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the first nodal element.
• Bright yellow (Link to IDU ... req). The channel has been selected for a connection composed
by a protected NBUS channel and another channel. The connection will be sent in preferential
mode to the IDU of the second nodal element. The apply command (selection of Apply push-
button) has not been sent yet to the equipment (requested connection).
• Yellow (Link to IDU ...). The channel is used for a connection, composed by a protected NBUS
channel and another channel, applied on the equipment (real connection). The connection is
sent in preferential mode to the IDU of the second nodal element.
The labels of the elements (To IDU...) in the Preferential Nodal Link area and in the key below
change depending on how the nodal element, which the user is connected to, has been defined:
Node A, Node B or Node C (parameter Nodal ID - see Fig.44).
Here below an example is reported.

To display the connections of the equipment in table format
2. Select the List tab.
The tab displays the existing connections. Fig.94 shown an example.
If the List tab is not available, the list is empty.
Fig.94 List tab (Cross Connection contextual area)
(2)
Not selected Connections

connection list (1)
Selected
connection
(3)
Fig.94 notes
(1) Every connection is assigned a row, where is pointed out in the column:
• Name. Name of the connection.
On the creation of the connection, a default name is assigned which can be modified later by
the user. The format of the default name is the following:
<Channel> / <Linked Ch.>
The values which Channel and Linked Ch. can assume are the same listed in the next para-
graph.
• Channel and Linked Ch. Channels composing the connection:
• Expansion 16xE1 <E1 number>. E1 channel of the expansion (equipment IduBoard
Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1).
• Expansion 32xE1 <E1 number>. E1 channel of the expansion (equipment IduBoard
Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1).
• Expansion STM-1 <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of STM-1 stream.
If the management of two STM-1 streams is active, the STM-1 stream which the
channel refers to will be specified:
• Expansion STM-1 [1] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the first STM-1
stream.
• Expansion STM-1 [2] <TUG3-TUG2-TU12>. VC-12 channel of the second STM-
1 stream.
• NBUS... <E1 number>. E1 channel of Nodal Bus.
The available NBUS values change according to the equipment nodal configuration.
The detail is pointed out in Tab.8.
• Radio Permanent E1 <E1 number>. High priority radio E1 channel.
• Radio Extra E1 <E1 number>. Low priority radio E1 channel.
Remember that the connection is a bidirectional path. The table considers a possible direc-
tion of the connection (Channel -> Linked Ch.) only for clarity of explanation.

• Type. Type of connection:
• Standard. Connection of Tributary-Tributary, Tributary-Radio or Auto-Loop (loop of a
tributary channel on itself) type.
• Pass-Through. Connection of Auto-Loop type (loop of a radio channel on itself).
The list does not points out the pre-configured connections.
(2) When the heading of a column is selected, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanu-
merical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow is displayed.
On the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow is displayed) an so on.
(3) Push-button:
• Select All. It selects all the connections present in the list.
• Deselect All. It deselects all the connections present in the list.
• Delete Selected. It deletes the selected connections.
To execute a Tributary-Radio connection
Operation available only for equipment with the radio (see Fig.44)
All the connections executed by the user are single connections. The only exceptions are the connections
where a protected NBUS channel is involved.
In this case, when the user executes a single connection, the matrix automatically executes the protection
connections creating, as fact, a protected connection.
The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1 in protected nodal configuration.
The Cross Connection Manager window opens (see Fig.93).
3. Select the Tributary-Radio option.
4. Set, in the Tributary box, the tributary stream you wish to use for the connection.
5. Select the unused channel on tributary side (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) and drag-and-drop
it on the unused channel on radio side (Radio Permanent E1/Radio Extra E1)
The two channels are linked by a blue line and the name assigned by default to the connection is dis-
played.
To modify the name of the connection go to pag.276.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.7).
The confirmation makes effective all the changes on the cross-connection matrix.
To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
All the connections executed by the user are single connections. The only exceptions are the connec-
tions where a protected NBUS channel is involved.
The protected Nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1 in protected nodal configuration.

3. Select the Tributary-Tributary option.
4. Set, in the 1st Trib and 2nd Trib box, the tributaries streams you wish to use for the connection.
The list contains all the available tributaries with the exception of the tributary set in the other …Trib
box.
5. Select the unused tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary channel.
It is possible to select two channels of two different tributaries or of the same tributary.
played.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the equipment type
and on the equipped tributary streams (see Tab.7).

To delete one or more connections
To delete one or more Tributary-Tributary and/or Tributary-Radio connections (Cross Connec-

tion Manager window)
3. Select a channel of the Tributary-Tributary and/or Tributary-Radio connection you wish to delete and
drag-and-drop it over the trash icon.
The connection is deleted.
4. Repeat the step 3 to delete all the wished connections.

To delete an Auto-Loop in the Cross Connection Manager window, use the procedure To disable an
Auto-Loop (pag.276).
To delete one or more connections (List tab)
2. Select the List tab (see Fig.94).
3. Select ( ) the connections you wish to delete.

Press Select All to select all the connections present in the window.
4. Press Delete Selected and confirm.
To enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop)

3. Double click on the unused tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or radio channel
(E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) for which you wish to execute the auto-loop.
The Auto Loop <channel> window is displayed.
4. Select the Enabled option.

5. Press Ok.
A blue line, which closes in loop on the selected channel, and the name assigned by default to the con-
nection are displayed.

To disable an Auto-Loop
3. Double click on the on the tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or on the radio
channel (E1 Permanent/E1 Extra) with auto-loop enabled (light blue box) for which you wish to disable
the auto-loop.
The Auto Loop <channel> window is displayed.
4. Select the Disabled option.
5. Press Ok.
The channel changes from used to free (light green box).

To verify/modify the connection label
To verify/ modify the name of a connection (Cross Connection Manager window)
3. Select one of the channels that form the connection.

The connection line is displayed and, next to it, its name in a yellow rectangle (see Fig.93).
4. To modify the name of the connection, select the rectangle.
The Cross Connection Label window opens.
The parameters Current Value and New Value point out the current name of the connection.
5. Set the new name in the New Value field: alphanumeric string of, at most, 45 characters.
To verify the name of the connections (List tab)
2. Select the List tab.

The column Name displays, for each connection, the relevant name (see Fig.94).

To execute an E1 NBUS <-> E1 connection (ALplus node)
Operation available and meaningful only if the equipment ALCplus2 with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod.
2xSTM-1 16E1 belongs to a three-elements protected ALplus node composed by AL IDU plus equipment
(parameter Node Type: ALplus, Nodal Type: 3 Element, Nodal Protection: Protected - see Fig.44).
In this particular configuration, for the connections involving a NBUS channel (single connections which are
automatically protected by the matrix - see pag.277) it is necessary to set the element of the ALplus node
which you wish to send the connection to in preferential mode.
3. Select the Tributary-Tributary or Tributary-Radio option.
4. Set the NBUS stream and the tributary or the Radio stream you wish to use for the connection setting
the parameters present in the View area.
5. Select, in the Preferential Nodal Link area, the element of the node (option To IDU...) which you wish
to send the connection to in preferential mode.
6. Select the unused NBUS tributary channel and drag-and-drop it over a different unused tributary/radio
channel.
played.

Cross connection matrix (more info)
For ALCplus2 equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E1, a TDM matrix is available for the cross-connection of the E1 channels.
The number of E1 channels available for the connections changes depending on the type of equipment and
on the equipped tributary streams. The detail is pointed out in Tab.7.
Connection Type
The TDM matrix manages the following types of connection:
• Tributary-Radio. Single connection between a tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/

E1 NBUS) and a radio E1 (Radio Permanent E1 or Radio Extra E1).
• Tributary-Tributary. Single connection between two different tributary channels (E1 expan-
sion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS).
• Auto-Loop. Loop of a tributary channel (E1 expansion/VC-12 STM-1/E1 NBUS) or a radio E1
channel (Radio Permanent E1 or Radio Extra E1) on itself.
In case of equipment without radio (radio unequipped - see Fig.44) the connection of type Tributary-
Radio is not available.
The TDM matrix can manage single and protected connections.

All the connections executed by the user are single connections.
Only exceptions are the connections (Tributary-Radio, Tributary-Tributary) involving a protected NBUS
channel.
The protected TDM nodal Bus is available in ALCplus2 equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod.
2xSTM-1 16E1 in protected nodal configuration.

Display of the cross-connections
The user can display the cross-connections existing in an equipment as graphic or as table.
In the first case, the tributary and radio streams are graphically displayed in a window (Cross Connection
Manager window).
When a channel involved by a connection is selected, a line is displayed representing the connection. The
edges of the line point out the channels composing the connection (see Fig.93).
In the second case, a table is displayed with the list of the existing cross-connections (List tab).
Each row of the table represents a connection where the name, the edge channels and the connection type
are pointed out (see Fig.94).
Here below the operations which can be performed in the two displays:
• GRAPHICAL display (Cross Connection Manager window):
• To verify the connections of the equipment (one at a time)
• To execute a Tributary-Radio connection
• To execute a Tributary-Tributary connection
• To delete one or more connections
• To enable the loop of a channel (Auto-Loop)
• To disable an Auto-Loop
• To verify/modify the name of a connection
• TABLE display (List tab):
• To verify the connections of the equipment
• To delete one or more connections at the same time
• To verify/modify the name of the connections
Creation of a cross-connection
All the connections in the TDM matrix must be created by the user (see pag.274, pag.274, pag.275). It is
possible to create a connection only in the graphical display (Cross Connection Manager window - Fig.93).
Manual deletion of the cross-connections
It is possible to delete one or more cross-connections from the graphical display of the connections or from
the table display (see pag.275).
In both cases, the connections removed in a type of display are automatically removed even from the other
type.
Automatic deletion of the cross-connections
The following operations automatically delete the connections where the (tributary or radio) stream, object
of the change, is terminated:
• Configuration change of the STM-1 stream (STM-1 MST Mode parameter - see Fig.44). Passage
from the:
• 1+0, 1+1 MSP, 2 x (1+0) MST or 1+1 MSP No ALS option to the None and vice versa.
• 1+0, 1+1 MSP or 1+1 MSP No ALS option to the 2 x (1+0) MST and vice versa.
• Configuration change of the TDM nodal Bus configuration (see Fig.44):
• Node Type parameter. Passage from the ALCplus2 node or ALplus node option to the No
Node.
• Nbr of TDM Elements parameter. Passage from 1÷8 option to the No Elements.
• TDM Nodal Bus Protection parameter (ALCplus2 node). Passage from the Not Protected
option to the Protected and vice versa.
• Nodal Protection parameter (ALplus node). Passage from the Not Protected option to the
Protected and vice versa.
• Radio configuration change (Radio A parameter - see Fig.44).
Passage from the 1+0, 1+1 Hot Standby or 1+1 Freq. Div option to the Unequipped and vice
versa.
• Configuration change of the E1 Radio - Permanent channel.
All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the number of
high priority E1 channels (Permanent TDM Traffic) (see Fig.46).

• Configuration change of the E1 Radio - Extra channel.
All those operations, executed in the Modulation & Capacity tab, which decrease the maximum
number of low priority E1 channels (Extra TDM Cap) (see Fig.46).
All the operations, executed in the tab Extra TDM Priority, which change the order used to dis-
card the dynamic E1 channels (Extra TDM Cap) from the adaptive modulation (see Fig.49).
Tab.7 Ports of the cross-connection matrix
Equipment Ports of the cross-connection matrix

ALCplus2 Port Stream Configuration Availability
IduBoard The equipment is not provided with the cross-connection matrix

IduBoard
The equipment is not provided with the cross-connection matrix
Exp. 16E1
E1 tributaries of
Expansion 32xE1 32 E1 channels Always available
the expansion
Port/channels available when the
Expansion STM-1 STM-1 63 VC-12 channels management of one STM-1 is ac-
tive (see Fig.44)
Expansion STM-1 [1] STM-1 63 VC-12 channels Port/channels available when the
management of 2 STM-1 is active
IduBoard Expansion STM-1 [2] STM-1 63 VC-12 channels (see Fig.44)
Exp 2xSTM-1 Port/channels available when the
32E1 (1) Radio x E1
Radio Permanent E1 equipment is provided with radio
(high priority E1 x = Value of the parameter Per-
(Radio-A) (see Fig.44) and the value x is
channels) manent TDM Traffic (see Fig.46). greater than 0
y E1
Radio y = Value of the parameter Extra
Radio Extra E1 equipment is provided with radio
(low priority E1 TDM Cap. relevant to the ACM
(Radio-A) (see Fig.44) and the value y is
channels) profile with the highest number greater than 0
of E1 (see Fig.46) (2).
E1 tributaries of
Expansion 16xE1 16 E1 channels Always available
the expansion
Expansion STM-1 STM-1 63 VC-12 channels management of one STM-1 is ac-
tive (see Fig.44)
Expansion STM-1 [1] STM-1 63 VC-12 channels Port/channels available when the
management of 2 STM-1 is active
Expansion STM-1 [2] STM-1 63 VC-12 channels (see Fig.44)
IduBoard
The available NBUS ports change according to the equipment nodal
Exp. Nod. NBUS... Nodal Bus
configuration. The detail is pointed out in Tab.8.
2xSTM-1
16E1 (1) Port/channels available when the
Radio x E1
Radio Permanent E1 equipment is provided with radio
(high priority E1 x = Value of the parameter Per-
(Radio-A) (see Fig.44) and the value x is
channels) manent TDM Traffic (see Fig.46). greater than 0
y E1
Radio y = Value of the parameter Extra
Radio Extra E1 equipment is provided with radio
(low priority E1 TDM Cap. relevant to the ACM
(Radio-A) (see Fig.44) and the value y is
channels) profile with the highest number greater than 0
of E1 (see Fig.46) (2).
(1) The E1 channels of the base board (tributaries A and B) and the A and B channel Radio Extra E1 are
not available in matrix for the realization of connections because these channels are already used for the
following pre-configured connections:
• Trib. A <-> A Radio Extra E1
• Trib. B <-> B Radio Extra E1
The pre-configured connections cannot be modified or deleted.
(2) The order used to display the Extra E1 Radio channels depends on the priority defined by the user (see
Fig.49).

Tab.8 NBUS ports of the cross-connection matrix
TDM nodal NBUS ports - Cross-connection matrix

Nodal system
bus
configuration NBUS port Stream Configuration
protection
No Node - - - -
NBUS 1 [1..63] 63 E1 channels (1÷63)
Nodal Bus 1
NBUS 1 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64÷126)
Not protected
NBUS 2 [1..63] 63 E1 channels (1÷63)
ALCplus2 node Nodal Bus 2
NBUS 2 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64÷126)
(1)
NBUS 1 [1..63] Protected Nodal Bus 1 63 protected E1 channels
Protected
(2)
NBUS 2 [1..63] Protected Nodal Bus 2 63 protected E1 channels
NBUS 1 [1..63] 63 E1 channels (1÷63)
Nodal Bus 1
NBUS 1 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64÷126)
Not protected
NBUS 2 [1..63] 63 E1 channels (1÷63)
ALplus node Nodal Bus 2
NBUS 2 [64..126] 63 E1 channels (64÷126)
(3)
NBUS [1..63] Protected Nodal Bus 63 protected E1 channels
Protected
(4)
NBUS [64..126] Protected Nodal Bus 63 protected E1 channels
(1)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (1÷63) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of 63 E1
channels (64÷126) of the Nodal Bus 1.
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group (E1-1) is protected by the first channel of
the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group (E1-2) is protected by the second channel
of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(2) The first group of 63 E1 channels (1÷63) of the Nodal Bus 2 is protected by the second group of 63 E1

The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group (E1-1) is protected by the first channel of
the second group (E1-64); the second channel of the first group (E1-2) is protected by the second channel
of the second group (E1-65) and so on.
(3)
The first group of 63 E1 channels (1÷63) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the first group of 63 E1
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-1) is
protected by the first channel of the first group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-1); the second channel
of the first group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-2) is protected by the second channel of the first group
of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-2) and so on.
(4)
The second group of 63 E1 channels (64÷126) of the Nodal Bus 1 is protected by the second group of
63 E1 channels (64÷126) of the Nodal Bus 2.
The protection is hard-wired: the first channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-64) is
protected by the first channel of the second group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-64); the second channel
of the second group of the Nodal Bus 1 (NBUS 1 - E1-65) is protected by the second channel of the second
group of the Nodal Bus 2 (NBUS 2 - E1-65) and so on.

RADIO
At the choice of Radio option, the program displays the following commands:
• Radio Branch... (pag.282). It manages the radio parameters.
The option Radio is available only for equipment provided with radio (see Fig.44).

Radio Branch

The option Radio Branch... is available only for equipment provided with radio (see Fig.44).
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Radio Branch 1A command.
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration are present the Radio Branch 1A (branch 1 radio parameters)
and Radio Branch 2A (branch 2 radio parameters) commands.
The Radio Branch… command manages the radio parameters.

In detail, it is possible to verify/modify:
• RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment (pag.282)

• Modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only) (pag.284)
• Operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter) (pag.284)
• Operation of the RT power supply (RT PSU) (pag.284)
• Resolution of the received power (Measurements Resolutions) (pag.285)
• Resolution of the transmitted power (Measurements Resolutions) (pag.285)
• Functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control) (pag.285)
• Maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx value) (pag.287)
• Intervention threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Threshold on local Prx) (pag.287)
• To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for eve-
ry ACM profile (pag.287)
To verify/modify the RF channel on which it is tuned the transmitter of the equipment
This operation does NOT automatically modify also the RF channel of the remote equipment.
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Radio > Radio Branch command.
The Radio Branch contextual area opens.
The Tx Frequency Selector parameter points out the RF channel (see Fig.95).
2. To change the parameter, use the UP/DOWN push-buttons to increase/decrease the RF channel.
The RF channel can be modified at steps of 10 channels at a time (if the COARSE is present) or at steps
of 1 channel at a time (if the COARSE is not present).
Press Mode to activate/deactivate the display of the word.
The frequency values change according to the equipment connected with the program.

Fig.95 Settings tab (Radio Branch contextual area)
RF channel
expressed as
channel number
and relevant
frequency (1)
Modulation Operating status

status of the of the trasmitter
RF carrier (2) (4)
Resolution of the
Operating status
power received (Prx)
of the RT power
and trasmitted (Ptx)
supply (3)
(5)
Fig.95 notes
(1) If it is pointed out the wording UNAVAILABLE. Reason: Outdoor Unit Hardware Failure, check that
the connection cable between the IDU section and the ODU one is not failure or missing.
The word COARSE points out the granularity: if the word is displayed, the RF channel can be mod-
ified at steps of 10 channels at a time, while if the word is not present, the value can be modified
at steps of 1 channel at a time. To activate/deactivate the display of the word, use the Mode push-
button.

• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.

• On. The RT power supply is on.
• Off. The RT power supply is off.

• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
(5) Box:
• Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equipment
(Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx value
corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of
the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.
• Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equip-
ment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value
corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of the
transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.

To verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier

In 1+1 Hot Stand-by configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
The Carrier Only parameter points out the modulation status of the RF carrier (see Fig.95).

• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message is displayed warning
that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.

The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the operation of the transmitter
The Tx Transmitter parameter points out the operation of the transmitter (see Fig.95).

• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message is displayed warning

The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the operation of the RT power supply
The RT PSU parameter points out the operation of the RT power supply (see Fig.95).

• On. The RT power supply is on.
• Off. The RT power supply is off.
3. Press Apply.

Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message is displayed warning

The deactivation of the RT power supply activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the power supply of RT is active, independently from the previous setting.
To verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration, the setting of a value for the resolution of the Prx relevant to
a branch automatically modifies also the value of the Prx resolution of the other branch.
The Prx parameter points out the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received
by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change) (see Fig.95).
2. To change the parameter set, into the box, the wished value.
To verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration, the setting of a value for the resolution of the Ptx relevant to
a branch automatically modifies also the value of the Ptx resolution of the other branch.
The Ptx parameter points out the resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted
by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change) (see Fig.95).
2. To change the parameter set, into the box, the wished value.
To verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC
2. Select the Powers tab.

In the Tx Power Control area the functioning status of the ATPC is pointed out (see Fig.96).
• Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx value cursor).
• Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
signal at reception. The intervention thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see
pag.287). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see pag.287).

Fig.96 Powers tab (Radio Branch contextual area)
Maximum
output power
value at the
Operating transmitter
status of the (2)
ATPC device
(1) ATPC
regulation
value (3)
Intervention
threshold of
the ATPC (4)
(5)
Fig.96 notes

• Manual, the ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
• Automatic, the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
(2) The parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in automatic
one.
(3) This parameter defines the range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in dB) with respect to the cur-
rent value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper limit of the range.
(4) Cursor:
• High: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the
transmitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher
than the set threshold value
• Low: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to increase the trans-
mitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the
set threshold value.
(5) Press the push-button to display the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile. In detail, in the column:
• Active Modulation. ACM profile.
• Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
• RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.

To verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by system configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.

The Max Ptx value parameter points out the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Ptx nom-
inal value) (see Fig.96).
3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.
To verify/modify the intervention threshold (High/Low) of the ATPC device
In 1+1 Hot Stand-by system configuration the change is automatically done also on the other branch.
In 1+1 Freq. Div. system configuration the changes, to be active, must be set in both branches.

In the ATPC Threshold on local Prx area the intervention threshold of the ATPC is pointed out (see
Fig.96):
3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value. In detail, the parame-
ter:
• High: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the trans-
mitted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set
threshold value.
• Low: <current value> dBm. Intervention threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmit-
ted power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set
threshold value.
To display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/recep-

tion for every ACM profile
3. Press View Current ATPC Pow.

The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile is displayed. In detail, in
the column:
• Active Modulation. ACM profile
• Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
• RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.

Fig.97 Table resuming the transmitted/received power for every ACM profile

MAINTENANCE
At the choice of Maintenance option, the program displays the following commands:
• Lan Statistics (pag.290). It manages the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from
the Ethernet ports (display of all the counters subdivided by ports).
• Lan Stat. Summary (pag.293). It manages the main counters of the packets/bytes in input/
output from the Ethernet ports (contemporary display of the main counters for each port).
• OAM-FM Domain (pag.295). It manages the OAM-FM Domain which an equipment belongs to.
• OAM-FM MA/MEP (pag.305). It manages the maintenance points of the OAM-FM Domain and
allows monitoring the path of a VLAN by using the CCM, LBM and LTM messages.
• S/N Meas (pag.316). It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).
• Fade Margin (pag.317). It manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin).
• PRBS (pag.321). It manages the PRBS device.
• Radio Loop (pag.324). It manages the radio loops.
• Radio Switch A (pag.328). It manages the radio switch.
The commands S/N Meas., Fade Margin, Radio Loop and Radio Switch A are available only for
equipment provided with radio (see Fig.44).
The command OAM-FM MA/MEP is available only if a OAM-FM Domain has been defined for the equip-
ment (see Fig.103).

Lan Statistics
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System*
* The reset of the counters result can be executed only by users Station Operator and System.
The Lan Statistics command manages the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ether-
net ports.
• To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports (pag.290)
• To reset the counters’ results (pag.292)
To verify the counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from the Ethernet ports
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Lan Statistics command.
The Lan Statistics contextual area opens.
2. Select the port, whose counters you wish to verify.

Under the selected port, the list of the relevant counters is displayed.
The counters of only one port at a time can be displayed.
Notes relevant to the counters.

The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32.
The counters are in compliance with the specification RFC 2819.
The Total Bytes Received counter, differently from what specified in RFC 2819, does not include the
bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet Size.
Fig.98 Lan Statistics contextual area
Counter
name
Counter
value (2)
Use the
scrolling bar
to display
all the
counters
Counters
of a port
list (1)
Select the
port, which
you wish to
verify the
counters

Fig.98 notes
(1) Counter:
• Dropped Frames. Total number of events (frames) in which packets were dropped by the
probe due to lack of resources.
This value is not necessarily the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only
the number of times that this condition occurred after the exhaustion of the memory re-
sources; the packets can be discarded also for other causes.
• Total Bytes Received. Total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) re-
ceived on the network.
This value includes 4 FCS octects.
• Total Frames Received. Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets,
and multicast packets) received.
• Broadcast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to
the broadcast address.
This does not include multicast packets.
• Multicast Frames Received. Total number of good packets received that were directed to a
multicast address.
This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
• CRC Align Errors. Total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and n
(parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-inte-
gral number of octets (Alignment Error).
• Undersize Frames. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and
were otherwise well formed.
• Oversize Frames. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max
Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets and were otherwise well formed.
• Fragments. Total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had
either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
• Jabbers. Total number of packets received that were longer than n (parameter Max Packet
Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets, and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence
(FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number
of octets (Alignment Error).
• Collisions. The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this EthLannet segment.
• Frames 64 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) received and
transmitted that were 64 octets in length.
• Frames 65 to 127 Oct. [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of packets (including bad packets) re-
ceived and transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
• Frames 1024 to max pck size [Sent+Rec.]. Total number of transmitted and received pack-
ets with a length greater than 1024 octects (incorrect packets included).
• Late Collisions. Evaluation relevant to the total number of collisions detected in this EthLan-
net segment, after the transmission of more than 512 bits from the beginning of TXEnable.
• Valid Bytes Received. Total number of received bytes relevant to correct packets. This coun-
ter is increased once for every data octet of good packets (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast)
received.
• Bytes Sent. Number of transmitted bytes.
This counter is increased once for every data octet of a transmitted good packet.
• Valid Frames Received. Number of received correct frames.
This counter is increased once for every good packet (Unicast + Multicast + Broadcast) re-
ceived.

• Frames Sent. Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for every trans-
mitted good packet.
• Out Multicast Frames. Number of Multicast frames sent. This counter does not include Broad-
cast packets.
• Out Broadcast Frames. Number of Broadcast frames sent.
• Out Unicast Frames. Number of Unicast frames sent. This is given by: Frames Sent - Out
Multicast Frames - Out Broadcast Frames.
• In Pause Frames. Number of good Flow Control frames received.
• Out Pause Frame. Number of Flow Control frames sent.
(2) The value of the each counter refers to the moment when the relevant port is opened or the con-
textual area Lan Statistics is updated.
To update the data, press Refresh.
To reset the counters’ results
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Lan Statistics command.
The Lan Statistics contextual area opens (Fig.98).
2. Press Reset and confirm.

All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.

Lan Stat. Summary
Curr. Profile Monitor, Read Only, Read and Write, Station Operator, System*
* The reset of the counters result can be executed only by users Station Operator and System.
The Lan Stat. Summary command manages the main counters of the packets/bytes in input/output from
the Ethernet ports.
• To verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports (pag.293)
• To reset the counters’ results (pag.294)
To verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary command.
The Lan Stat. Summary contextual area opens where the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet
ports is displayed (Fig.99).
Notes relevant to the counters.

The depth of the events stored by each single counter is equal to 2E32.
The counters are in compliance with the specification RFC 2819.
The Byte Rx (Total Bytes Received) counter, differently from what specified in RFC 2819, does not in-
clude the bytes belonging to packets of sizes greater than the Max Packet Size.
Fig.99 Lan Stat. Summary contextual area
Ports
of the
Switch
(1)
Main
counters
list (2)
Counter
name
Counter
value
for each
port (3)
Fig.99 notes
(1) The presence, next to the name of a port of the Switch, of the wording:
• (Brx), points out that the Spanning Tree protocol is enabled for the specific port (see Fig.68
for the external port and Fig.78 for the internal port).
The value x points out the Bridge which it belongs to.

• (Elpx), points out that the Ethernet line protection of equipment is enabled for the specific
port (only internal ports - see Fig.69).
The value x points out the protection group.
• (ElpNx), points out that the Ethernet line protection of node is enabled for the specific port
(only external ports - see Fig.69).
The value x points out the protection group.
• (Trkx), points out that the Trunking mode is enabled for the specific port (see Fig.70 for the
external ports and Fig.79 for the internal port).
The value x points out the aggregation group.
(2) Counter:
• Byte Rx (Total Bytes Received). Total number of octets of data (including those in bad pack-
ets) received on the network. This value includes 4 FCS octects.
• Frm Rx (Total Frames Received). Total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast
packets, and multicast packets) received.
• Bytes Tx (Bytes Sent). Number of transmitted bytes. This counter is increased once for every
data octet of a transmitted good packet.
• Frm Tx (Frames Sent). Number of transmitted frames. This counter is increased once for
every transmitted good packet.
• Drop Frm. (Dropped Frames). Total number of events (frames) in which packets were
dropped by the probe due to lack of resources. This value is not necessarily the absolute
number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also
for other causes.
• CRC Err. (CRC Align Errors). Total number of packets received that had a length of between
64 and n (parameter Max Packet Size, it can be set to 1522 or 2048) octets with bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) and an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a
non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
(3) The value of each counter refer to the moment when the contextual area Lan Stat. Summary is
opened or updated.
To update the data, press Refresh.
To reset the counters’ results
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Lan Stat. Summary command.
The Lan Stat. Summary contextual area opens (Fig.99).
2. Press Reset and confirm.

All the counters of all the Ethernet ports are set to zero.

OAM-FM Domain

The description of the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality, implemented in the equipment managed by WEB
LCT, is at pag.296.
The OAM-FM Domain command manages the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment.

In details it is possible:
• To verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment (pag.304)
• To define an OAM-FM Domain for an equipment (pag.304)
• To remove the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment (pag.304)
If the OAM-FM Domain command is not available, this means that the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
is not enabled for the equipment. Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling.
To verify the functionalities enabled select the Features Management command (pag.146).
ALCplus2 equipment manages a single Domain.
The name or the level of an OAM-FM Domain associated to an equipment cannot be modified. In order to
modify one or both the parameters, it is necessary to remove the current Domain and to define a new one.

OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in equipment managed by WEB LCT
The OAM (Operations, Administration and Maintenance) Ethernet functionality represents the set of proc-
esses, activities, rules, etc. which allow managing the operation, the monitoring and the fixing of troubles
in the Ethernet network.
These services are defined by the following reference specifications, which you must refer to for the de-
tailed description of the OAM Ethernet functionality:
• ITU-T Recommendation Y.1731 - OAM Functions and Mechanisms for Ethernet based Networks.
• IEEE Standard 802.1ag - IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks – Virtual
Bridged Local Area Networks – Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault Management.
Among the above mentioned specifications, ALCplus2 equipment implement the functionality relevant to
Connectivity Fault Management (CFM).
This functionality has the purpose to monitor, in a Layer-2 Ethernet network, the end to end availability of
a service (implemented by a VLAN) and to monitor, in case of out-of-service, tools (LoopBack and Link
Trace) helping the operator in the analysis of the trouble.
In detail, through WEB LCT application of ALCplus2, it is possible:
• To define the network segment to monitor:

• To define the OAM-FM Domain (pag.296) of maintenance (name and level).
• To define, for each VLAN (service) configured on the equipment, the maintenance points neces-
sary to diagnostic the connection troubles within a maintenance Domain:
• To define, for every service (VLAN), a Maintenance Association (MA - pag.297) to mon-
itor.
• To define the end points to monitor the maintenance area (MEP - pag.297).
• To define the intermediate monitoring points of the maintenance area (MIP - pag.298).
• To manage, for every local MEP, the relevant table of Remote MEPs (pag.299) (RMep table).
• To manage the Continuity Check Messages (CCM - pag.300) which allow monitoring end-to-end
a service instance (VLAN) pointing out any interruption.
• To manage the LoopBack Messages (LBM - pag.301) which, after the detection of a fault, allow
isolating the point where the fault occurred.
• To manage the Link Trace Messages (LTM - pag.302) which allow tracing the path followed by
an OAM-FM packet between two different MEPs within the same VLAN.
Here below a brief description of the above mentioned OAM-FM elements is reported together with their
management in ALCplus2 equipment.
Moreover, an example of configuration of an OAM-FM maintenance Domain for a set of ALCplus2 equipment
is reported (VLAN creation, Domain, maintenance points, etc.) (see pag.302).
OAM-FM Domain
The term OAM-FM Domain defines a network or a part of a network owned and managed by a single entity
(operator) and where the connection troubles can be managed.
The OAM-FM Domain is characterized by a name and a layer.

The name identifies the Domain.
The layer is used to define the hierarchical relationship among domains. Greatest is the Domain, highest
will be the layer. In fact, the layer corresponds to a value from 0 to 7, where 0 represents the lowest layer
(lowest priority) and 7 the highest layer (higher priority).
All the other entities defined by OAM refer to the Domain: MA (MIP) (pag.297 - pag.298) and MEP
(pag.297).
ALCplus2 equipment manages a single OAM-FM Domain.

The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in any ALCplus2 equipment you wish to belong to the same OAM-
FM maintenance segment (see pag.304).
Once an OAM-FM Domain has been defined, its name or layer cannot be changed. To do this, the Domain
must be removed and a new one must be created with the new values.
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one VLAN exists, which one MA has been defined for.
This Domain is transparent as regards the OAM-FM messages with higher priority (messages to/from the
higher domains), while stops all the messages with lower priority (messages to/from lower domains).
MA
The term MA (Maintenance Association) identifies the service (VLAN) you wish to monitor.
Then, a Maintenance Association is coupled to an user-defined VLAN; creating a MA means enabling the
control of the specified VLAN.
Within a specific OAM-FM Domain, there are as many MAs as the VLANs the user wishes to monitor.
ALCplus2 equipment manages one MA per each single VLAN.

On an equipment the definition of a MA can be executed by the user, through a specific command (see
pag.308), or by the system, once the user has defined a MEP (see pag.308).
The definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic definition
of a MIP (pag.298) per every single port of the Switch which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
Once a MA has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, the MA must be removed from the
VLAN and a new MA must be created with the new values.
The removal of a MA involves even the automatic removal of the MEP, if present, from the VLAN.
MEP
The term MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines the entity, associated to a specific service instance (VLAN),
representing the end point of a MA (pag.297).
MEP can generate and terminate OAM-FM messages regarding the fault management and the performance
monitoring.
In fact, MEP is the entity set for the control of the service (VLAN) as, within the OAM-FM maintenance seg-
ment, the set of MEPs created in the end points of a VLAN allows controlling the correct end to end oper-
ation of the VLANs.
The control is achieved by means of the periodic transmission, by each MEP, of the CCM (pag.300) mes-
sages and of the control of the reception of the same messages by the Remote MEPs (pag.299).
ALCplus2 equipment manages a single MEP per each MA (VLAN) and a maximum of 32 MEPs (32 MA/
VLAN).
MEP must be defined only in ALCplus2 equipment acting as end points of the same VLAN (see pag.308).
The definition of a MEP for a VLAN involves even the automatic definition of the MA, if this has not been
already done.
The definition of a MEP requires the setting of:
• A numeric identifier, which must be univocal within the network for the specific VLAN.
• The name of the relevant MA (only if not already defined).
• The time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check messages (CCM).
Once MEP has been created, the transmission of the CCM messages is disabled. They must be
enabled by the user (see pag.310).
• The port of the Ethernet Switch, where you wish to map the MEP, and the direction to which you
wish to send the CCMs:
• Direction UP ( ). The CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered
port to the other ports of the Switch interested by the considered VLAN.
• Direction DOWN ( ). The CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.

Once a MEP has been defined, its configuration cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MEP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new configuration.
The removal of a MEP involves event the automatic removal of the relevant MA from the VLAN.
ALCplus2 equipment, for every single MEP, manages the following alarms:
• MEP Fail - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
The alarm becomes active when at least one of the remote MEPs present in the RMep table of
the specific local MEP is in status Start or Failed (see Fig.105).
The activation of this alarm is pointed out even in the contextual area OAM-FM ME/MEP (see
Fig.104).
• MEP Configuration Mismatch - OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config.
Mismatch Alarm.
The alarm becomes active when the local MEP receives at least one CCM message, containing
configuration data different from those set for the local MEP itself, from one of the remote MEPs.
With configuration data we mean: Domain name, MA name, CCM interval.
When this alarm is active, the remote MEP, which has raised the alarm, cannot be enabled in
the RMep table.
Fig.100 OAM-FM functionality - Maintenance points
Domain: Test
A.1 MEP 10
A.2 A.3 MEP 11
A.4
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
VLAN Id: 20
A 2 MA: Vlan 20
2 A A 2 2 A
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
A.5 A.6 A.7

Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1
2 A A 2 2 A
3 3 3
4 4 4
MEP 12
MIP
The term MIP (Maintenance Intermediate Point) defines a passive entity, associated to a specific service
instance (VLAN).
MIPs are defined on transit equipment for the monitored VLAN, intermediate among the end MEPs
(pag.297).
MIP can reply to the LoopBack (LBM - pag.301) messages, sent in unicast by a MEP (MAC Address), and
to the Link Trace (LTM - pag.302) messages, sent by a MEP, but it cannot generate requests of LoopBack
and Link Trace towards other MIP or MEP.
MIP is defined by the operator in ALCplus2 equipment which acts as intermediate points of the same
VLAN and the same OAM-FM maintenance segment.
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA (see pag.308).
In fact, the definition of a MA within a VLAN for which a MEP is not defined, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every single port of the Switch for which the specific VLAN is enabled.
Once a MA/MIP has been defined, its name cannot be changed. To do this, remove the MA/MIP from the
VLAN and create a new one with the new name.

Remote MEPs
The term Remote MEP (Maintenance End Point) defines entities which represent the other end points (re-
mote points) of a VLAN with respect to the local MEP.
Example
Referring to Fig.100, if you are connected by WEB LCT to equipment A.1, the local MEP will be MEP 10
while the remote MEPs will be MEP 11 and MEP 12.
Otherwise, if you are connected by WEB LCT to equipment A.4, the local MEP will be MEP 11 while the
remote MEPs will be MEP 10 and MEP 12.
A table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) is associated to every local MEP (then to every MA/VLAN).
The system records, in this table, the remote MEPs from which the local MEP waits for a CCM (pag.300)
message.
If the CCM message does not arrive within a timeout period equal to 2,5 CCM interval set for the local MEP,
the remote MEP is set to status Failed and the relevant alarm is activated (OAM-FM MA:... MEP Id:... Fail
Alarm).
Example
Referring to Fig.100, if you are connected by WEB LCT to equipment A.1, MEP 11 and MEP 12 will be
recorded in the RMep table (relevant to MEP 10).
The transmission of CCM messages is enabled at intervals of 10 sec between a transmission and the
next one.
If, after 25 sec. (2,5 times the CCM interval), MEP 10 does not receive a CCM message, for example
from MEP 11, in the RMep table MEP 11 will be set to status Failed and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Vlan 20
MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm will be activated, pointing out that a Remote Mep in Failed is present in the RMep
table of the local MEP 10.
The remote MEP remains in status Failed until the local MEP receives a valid CCM message from the
remote MEP or the user removes the remote MEP from the table.
The recording of remote MEPs in the RMep table consists of two parts: the entry in the table and the ena-
bling of the remote MEP (operation necessary so that the remote MEPs are acknowledged as valid end
points by the local MEP).
The entry of MEP in the table takes place:
a. AUTOMATICALLY, after the reception of the first CCM sent by a remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table points out the identifier of the remote MEP and the MAC Ad-
dress of the equipment which the remote MEP belongs to.
The enabling for this type of remote MEPs must be executed manually by the operator (see
Fig.101).
b. MANUALLY, after a command of the operator, who adds the remote MEP.
For these remote MEPs, the table points out the identifier of the remote MEP (provided by the
operator) while the MAC Address is set to zero.
The enabling for this type of MEP takes place automatically when the equipment receives the
first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
When the first CCM is received, the field MAC Address gets the value of the MAC Address of the
remote equipment, source of CCM.
The status of a remote MEP is pointed out in the table by the parameter MEP State and can be:
• Start. Initial status of the remote MEP after its (automatic or manual) insertion in the table or
status assumed by remote MEP after it has been disabled.
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one change depending on the
type of insertion of the MEP in the RMep table (automatic or manual) as depicted in Fig.101.
• Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches from the status Start after an enabling command or at
the reception of the first CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP, if previously recorded
by the operator (see Fig.101).
The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Conn and the conditions which
cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.101.
• Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when the local MEP does not receive (for a period of 2,5
times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP, as described at the be-
ginning of the chapter.

The operations a user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Failed and the conditions
which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another one are depicted in Fig.101.
After the (automatic or manual) insertion of a remote MEP in the table, it can be removed only manually
by the operator.
In WEB LCT, the RMep table of a local MEP can be displayed only after the local MEP has been associated
to a VLAN (see pag.308).
Fig.101 OAM-FM - Management of the status of the Remote MEPs in the RMep table
The remote MEP is automatically inserted The remote MEP is manually

in RMep table when the local MEP receives the inserted in the RMep
first CCM message sent by remote MEP table by the operator (1)
Remote MEP status Remote MEP status

Start Start
The local MEP
The user The user The user
receives the
disables the disables the disables the
first CCM sent
remote MEP remote MEP remote MEP
by the remote
(3) (2) (3)
MEP

Conn. Conn.
The user
Local MEP does deletes the
Local MEP Local MEP does Local MEP
not receive the remote MEP
receives not receive the receives
CCMs from (4)
again the CCMs from remote again the
remote MEP
CCMs from MEP anymore CCMs from
anymore
remote MEP remote MEP
Failed Failed
The user deletes The user deletes

the remote MEP (4) the remote MEP (4)
Removal of remote MEP Removal of remote MEP

from RMep table from RMep table
Fig.101 notes
(1) To insert a remote MEP in the RMep table (pag.311)
(2) To enable a remote MEP in the RMep table (pag.312)
(3) To disable a remote MEP of the RMep table (pag.312)
(4) To remove a remote MEP from the RMep table (pag.312)
CCM
The term CCM (Continuity Check Message) defines the messages which constantly monitor the path of the
service instance pointing out the connection troubles.
CCMs are multicast messages sent by a MEP entity to the other MEP entities belonging to the same MA
(Remote MEPs - pag.299).
Moreover, CCMs are unidirectional messages (do not need a reply) and are periodically sent.
Within a MA which n MEPs belongs to, every MEP periodically sends a CCM in multicast; every MEP waits
to periodically receive n-1 CCMs.
The missed reception of a CCM by a MEP means the presence of a fault in the path of the service instance
(VLAN).

When a MEP does not receive a CCM message, it goes to status Failed: this status is notified to the other
MEPs setting the field RDI (Remote Defect Indicator) present in the sent CCM message.
In this way, all the MEP entities know the existence of a fault along their own path.
The CCM management in ALCplus2 equipment is strictly bound to the MEP management.
In fact, the configuration parameters of the CCM messages must be set when MEP is created. In detail, the
user is required to define:
• The time interval used for the transmission of CCMs (CCM interval).
For a correct operation of the CCM messages, the CCM interval must be the same for all the
MEPs of the same VLAN.
• The direction you wish to send the CCM messages to.
Once the MEP has been defined, the enabling of the transmission of CCMs is required.
Then, the user can disable and enable again the transmission of the CCM messages at his wish (see
pag.310).
The configuration parameters of the relevant (interval and direction) cannot be modified. To do this, re-
move the MEP from the VLAN and create a new one with the new values.
In ALCplus2 equipment, the CCM messages (OAM-FM packets) are routed on the VLANs only if the control
of Tag VLan Id is active (parameter Ingress Filtering Check - set value Fallback or Secure - see Fig.66).
In the CCM messages sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets) is used as:

• Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3x with x from 0 to 7 ac-
cording to the layer of OAM-FM Domain
• Source address (Source MAC address): physical address of the equipment which has generated
the CCM message (MAC Address associated to the management LAN port of the controller).
LBM
The term LBM (LoopBack Message) defines the LoopBack messages which, once a fault has been detected
through the CCM (pag.300) messages, allow isolate the point where the fault has occurred.
The operation modalities of OAM-FM LoopBack is similar to IP ping.
From a MEP an OAM-FM packet is sent in unicast with a request of Echo Request (LoopBack Message) to a
MIP or MEP belonging to the same MA. The MEP waits for the relevant reply Echo Reply (Loopback Replies)
sent in unicast from the remote maintenance point.
The missed reply to a LBM message points out the presence of a fault between the MEP which has sent the
message and the maintenance point which has not replied to the message.
The LBM messages are sent after a command from operator (see pag.313).
The transmission of LoopBack messages requires the setting of:
• The local MEP, which you wish to send the messages from.
• The remote maintenance point, belonging to the same Domain and the same MA of the local
MEP, which you wish to send the messages to. The setting of a:
• MEP can be done choosing the MEP in the RMep table or setting the MAC Address of the
equipment where the remote MEP is defined.
• MIP can be done setting the MAC Address of the equipment where MIP is defined.
• Number of messages (OAM-FM packets - Echo Request) you wish to send in sequence with a
single sending confirmation (minimum 1 maximum 5).
At the end of the operation, a statistics is available with the number of sent packets (Sent messages), the
number of received correct packets (Valid), the number of packets received out of sequence (Out Of Order)
and the number of packets received with unknown format (Bad Msdu) (see Fig.106).
ALCplus2 equipment, in the LBM messages sent in unicast, uses as:

• Destination address (Destination MAC address): physical address of the addressee of the Loop-
Back message.
the LoopBack message.

LTM
The term LTM (Link Trace Message) defines the Link Trace messages which allow determining the path
covered by an OAM-FM packet between the end-points of a service instance (VLAN).
The operating modality of OAM-FM Link Trace is similar to TraceRoute IP.
A Link Trace message is sent in multicast from a MEP (local) to a remote MEP, whose physical address must
be known.
In the Link Trace messages, the TTL (Time To Live) field, which points out the number of equipment of the
specific OAM-FM Domain the packet can pass through before being declared expired, is properly config-
ured.
The LTM messages are captured by all the MEPs-MIPs installed on the same VLAN on the equipment
touched to reach the destination MEP.
Every MEP-MIP, once the message has been intercepted, decreases the TTL field, replies to the originating
MEP with an unicast message and re-transmits the LTM message to the destination MEP.
This operation is repeated until the packet arrives to the addressee remote MEP.
At the end of the operation, the local MEP has acquired the list of the physical addresses (MAC Address) of
the equipment where the Link Trace messages have passed.
The LTM messages, to trace the path between two different MEPs of the same VLAN, are sent after a com-
mand by operator (see pag.314).
To trace a path, the operator must set the two path ends:
• Local MEP.
• Remote MEP. This setting can be done choosing the MEP from the RMep table or setting the MAC
Address of the equipment whose remote MEP has been defined.
The remote MEP, to make the operation being successful, must be in status Conn. (see Fig.101).
Then the operator must send the LTM message (Run Test).
At the end of the operation, the Link Trace (see Fig.107) will contain the list of the MAC Addresses of the
MIPs-MEPs crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the origin MEP.
The LTM messages are sent in multicast (OAM-FM packets), use as:
• Destination address (Destination MAC address): 01-80-C2-00-00-3y with y from 8...0xF ac-
cording to the layer of the OAM-FM Domain.
the Link Trace message.
Example of configuration of a OAM-FM maintenance Domain for a set of ALCplus2 equipment
Fig.101 shows an example of configuration of a maintenance OAM-FM area among four ALCplus2 equip-
ment (A.1, A.2, A.3 and A.4). This area is used to monitor the end to end availability of VLAN 20.
Fig.102 OAM-FM - Example of configuration of a maintenance area
Domain: Test
A.1 MEP 10
A.2 A.3 MEP 11
A.4
Switch Switch MIP Switch Switch
1 1 1 1
A 2 2 A A 2 2 A
3 3 3 3
4 VLAN Id: 20 4 4 4
MA: Test 20

The steps to execute, through the WEB LCT application on every single equipment, are the following:
1. Configure the VLAN with identifier 20 on the 4 equipment (see pag.197).

The VLAN must be operating, so beyond being created it is necessary:
• To execute the suitable physical connections.
• To activate the Ethernet ports involved by the VLAN (see Fig.64 - parameter Rate Control).
• To configure properly the transit of the messages in input from the Ethernet port (see Fig.66/
Fig.76 - parameter Port Based VLAN).
• To activate the control of Tag VLan Id (see Fig.66 - parameter Ingress Filtering Check).
2. Define the OAM-FM Domain (pag.296) with name Test (see pag.304 ) and layer equal to 5.
The OAM-FM Domain must be defined in every equipment of the Domain Test and the name and the
layer of the Domain must be the same for all the equipment.
3. Associate the MA (pag.297) with name Test 20 (see pag.308 ) to the VLAN.
The MA must be associated to VLAN 20 in every equipment of Domain Test and the name of MA must
be the same for all the equipment.
4. Define the MEPs (pag.297) (see pag.308 ) in the following way:

• Only for equipment A.1, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
• Identifier: 10
• CCM Interval: 10 sec.
• Ethernet port: LAN 3
• Direction of CCMs: Down ( ) - The CCM (pag.300) messages are sent in output from
LAN 3.
• Only for equipment A.4, associate a MEP with the following characteristics to VLAN 20:
• Identifier: 11
• CCM Interval: 10 sec.
• Ethernet port: LAN 1
• Direction of CCMs: Down ( ) - Messages will be sent in output from LAN 1.
5. Enable the transmission of CCM messages for the MEPs created in the previous step (see pag.310).
After some seconds, the RMep table (see Remote MEPs - pag.299) relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1)
records the MEP 11 in status Start and the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm becomes
active.
Differently, the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4) records the MEP 10 in status Start and
the alarm OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm becomes active.
6. In RMep tables, enable the remote MEPs (see pag.312).
In the RMep table relevant to MEP 10 (equipment A.1), the remote MEP 11 changes to status Conn and
the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 10 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
In similar mode, in the RMep table relevant to MEP 11 (equipment A.4), the remote MEP 10 changes
to status Conn and the OAM-FM MA: Test 20 MEP Id: 11 Fail Alarm alarm becomes inactive.
The configuration of the maintenance area depicted in Fig.101 is completed and the end to end monitoring
of VLAN 20 is active.
At this point, when a fault is detected (activation of the alarm OAM-FM... Fail Alarm) or in order to execute
checks on the OAM-FM path, it is possible to use the LTM (pag.302) messages to verify the path of the
VLAN or, when the Fail alarm is detected, it is possible to use the LBM (pag.301) messages for the detec-
tion of the interruption point of the VLAN.

To verify the characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM Domain command.
The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens where the name and level of the OAM-FM Domain of the
equipment are displayed (see Fig.103).
Fig.103 OAM-FM Domain contextual area
OAM
domain
name
(1) OAM
domain
level (2)
Fig.103 notes
(1) If the Domain field is empty and available for the setting, this means that no OAM-FM Domain is
defined for the equipment.
In this condition even the parameter Level is available for the modification.
(2) Value:
To define an OAM-FM Domain for an equipment
The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens (see Fig.103).
2. Into the Domain box, type the OAM-FM Domain name of the equipment (alphanumeric string with min-
imum 1 and maximum 45 characters).
3. Move the cursor Level over a number between 0 and 7 according to the priority level you wish to assign
to the OAM-FM Domain (0: lowest priority, 7: highest priority).
4. Press Create.
The equipment is associated to the set OAM-FM Domain.
In the options list, the command the OAM-FM MA/MEP (see pag.305) command is displayed below
the OAM-FM Domain command.
To remove the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment
An OAM-FM Domain cannot be removed if at least one MA (pag.297) is present (see Fig.104).
The OAM-FM Domain contextual area opens (see Fig.103).

The equipment is not associated to an OAM-FM Domain any more.
In the options list, the OAM-FM MA/MEP (see pag.305) command is removed.

OAM-FM MA/MEP

The description of OAM-FM Ethernet functionality implemented in the equipment managed by WEB LCT
is at pag.296.
The OAM-FM MA/MEP command manages the maintenance point of OAM-FM Domain, which the equip-
ment belongs to, and allows monitoring the path of a service instance (VLAN) by using the Continuity Check
(CCM), LoopBack (LBM) and Link Trace (LTM) messages.
• To verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (pag.305)
• To associate a MA to a VLAN (pag.308)
• To associate a MEP to a VLAN (pag.308)
• To remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN (pag.309)
• To enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP (pag.310)
• To verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table) (pag.310)
• To insert a remote MEP in the RMep table (pag.311)
• To enable a remote MEP of the RMep table (pag.312)
• To disable a remote MEP from the RMep table (pag.312)
• To remove a remote MEP from the RMep table (pag.312)
• To send one or more LoopBack (LBM) messages to a remote MIP/MEP (pag.313)
• To trace the path, through the LTM messages, between the local MEP and a remote MEP of the
same VLAN (pag.314)
The OAM-FM MA/MEP command is available only if an OAM-FM Domain has been defined for the
equipment (see Fig.103).
The definition of a MIP takes place after the definition of the MA.
In fact, the definition of a MA in a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic def-
inition of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
To verify the status of the VLANs as regards the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > OAM-FM MA/MEP command.
The OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area opens, pointing out the status of the VLANs in relation to the
OAM-FM Ethernet functionality (see Fig.104).

Fig.104 OAM-FM MA/MEP contextual area
List Not
of the selected
VLANs VLAN
(1)
Selected
VLAN
(2)
(3)
Fig.104 notes
(1) Every VLAN is represented by a rectangle whose characteristics are described here below.
VLAN which a MA and a MEP is associated to

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(f)
(g) (h) (i) (j) (k)
VLAN which a MA is associated to

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(f)
(g)
VLAN which no MA is associated to

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)
(f)
a. VLAN identifier.
b. VLAN name.
c. Port of the Ethernet Switch.

The colour of the box, relevant to every port, represents the status of the port as regards the
specific VLAN and the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality:
• Blue ( ). The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the specific VLAN (port in status Tagged or Unmodif - see note d.).

• Green ( ). The port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to
that of the specific VLAN (see note d.). Moreover a MEP (pag.297) is associated to the
port.
• Light blue ( ). The port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID
equal to that of the specific VLAN.
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is connected to other node elements
by Ethernet nodal Bus, the external ports LAN 1 and LAN 2 will be always in this status
when not available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.
d. Status of the port as regards the transit of packets with VLan ID equal to that of the VLAN:
• ----, the port is not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the virtual Lan.
• Tagged, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of the
virtual Lan. To the packets without Tag, in output from this port, is automatically added
the Tag composed by the information:
• Of priority; the value is defined in the box Priority of the origin port of the
packet itself.
• Of Vlan ID which corresponds to the default Vlan ID (Default Vid box) of the
origin port of the packet.
• Unmodif, the port is enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that of
the virtual Lan. The tag 802.1Q (priority and VLAN identifier) are not removed or added
to the packets in output from the port.
e. This field, meaningful only for the Ethernet ports where a MEP is mapped (ports represented by
the green box - see note c.), points out the direction where the CCM (pag.300)messages are
forwarded:
• Direction UP ( ). The CCM messages are sent as they were in input from the considered
port to the other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
• Direction DOWN ( ). The CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
This field is empty for the ports which a MEP is not associated to (blue and light blue ports).
f. This area points out if a MA/MEP is associated to the VLAN. In detail, if word present is:
• MA... A MA (pag.297) is associated to the VLAN (VLAN which the control of the service
instance is active for - intermediate maintenance point).
• MA... + MEP... A MA and a MEP (pag.297) are associated to the VLAN (VLAN which the
control of the service instance is active for - end maintenance point).
• Unbound. No MA/MEP is associated to the VLAN (VLAN which the control of the service
instance is not active for).
g. Name of the MA associated to the VLAN.
h. Identifier of the MEP associated to the VLAN.
i. Status and interval of transmission of CCM (pag.300) messages.

The status is pointed out by the check-box located after the wording CCM. Check-box:
• Active ( ). The transmission of CCM messages is enabled
• Inactive ( ). The transmission of CCM messages is not enabled.

The transmission interval is displayed after the check-box. Wording:
• 1 s. 1 second.
• 10 s. 10 seconds (default value).
• 1 min. 1 minute.
• 10 min. 10 minutes.
j. Wording:
• Lbm. Select this to display the window for the management of LoopBack (Lbm - pag.301)
messages.
• Ltm. Select this to display the window for the management of Link Trace (Ltm - pag.302)
messages.
• Rmep. Select this to display the table of Remote MEPs (pag.302) (RMep table).
k. The led color points out the status of the remote MEP present in the RMep table of the specific
local MEP.

In detail, if the led is:
• Red. At least one of the remote MEPs, present in the RMep table, is in status Start or
Failed (see Fig.105).
This condition is signalled even by the activation of the alarm OAM-FM MA:<MA name>
MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Fail Alarm
• Green. All the remote MEPs, present in the RMep table, are in status Conn. (see Fig.105)
or the RMep table is empty.
(2) Only one VLAN at a time can be selected.
(3) Push-button:
• Bind MA. Creates a MA.
• Bind MEP. Creates a MEP.
• Unbind. Removes the MA and/or the MEP associated to the VLAN.
The availability of the push-buttons depends on the status of the selected VLAN.
If a MA or a MEP is associated to the VLAN, only the Unbind push-button will be available. On the
other hand, if no MA or MEP is associated to the VLAN, the Bind MA and Bind MEP push-buttons
will be available.
To associate a MA to a VLAN
ALCplus2 equipment manages a MA for every single VLAN.

A MA can be associated to a VLAN even during the creation of a MEP (see pag.308).
The definition of a MA for a VLAN, which a MEP is not defined for, corresponds to the automatic
definition of a MIP for every Switch port which the specific VLAN is enabled for.
The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP opens (see Fig.104).
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MA (pag.297) to.
3. Press Bind MA.
The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays the area MA Binding - VLAN <VLAN identifier> (<VLAN
name>).
4. Set, in the box MA Name, the name you wish to assign to the Maintenance Association (alphanumeric
string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN to which you are assigning the MA. This name
can be changed at one’s wish.
5. Press Ok and confirm.

The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays again the list of the VLANs and, for the selected VLAN,
the MA just created is pointed out.
To associate a MEP to a VLAN
ALCplus2 equipment manages a single MEP per MA/VLAN and the maximum number of MEP
is 32.
2. Select the VLAN which you wish to associate the MEP (pag.297) to.
A MEP can be associated to a VLAN which a MA has not been associated to yet or to a VLAN which a
MA is already associated to. In this last case, the port of the Ethernet Switch which the MEP will be

associated to, will be automatically converted from intermediate maintenance point (MIP) to end main-
tenance point (MEP).
3. Press Bind MEP.

The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays the area MEP Binding - VLAN <VLAN identifier> (<VLAN
name>).
4. Set, in the box MEP ID, the identifying number you wish to assign to MEP (value between 1 and 8191).
The system suggests, in the box, the identifying number of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP
to. This value can be changed at one’s wish.
The identifying number of MEP must be univocal in the network for every specific VLAN.
5. Set, in the box MA Name, the name you wish to assign to the MA (pag.297) which MEP belongs to (al-
phanumeric string of minimum 1 and maximum 20 characters).
The system suggests, in the box, the name of the VLAN which you are assigning the MEP to. This name
can be changed at one’s wish.
If a MA has been already assigned to the VLAN (see pag.308), the parameter will be already set and
cannot be changed.
6. Set, in the box CCM Interval, the time interval used for the transmission of the continuity check mes-
sages (CCM - pag.300):
• 1 s. 1 second.
• 10 s. 10 seconds (default value).
• 1 min. 1 minute.
• 10 min. 10 minutes.
Remember that, for a correct operation of the continuity check, the set CCM interval must be the
same for the MEPs of the same VLAN.
7. Select, in the area CCM Mapping & Direction, the Ethernet port where you wish to map the MEP and
the direction where you wish to send the CCM messages.
The format used to represent the port is the same described in Fig.104.
When a port is selected, the box representing the port changes from blue to green and the transmission
direction of the messages is displayed:
• Direction UP ( ). CCM messages are sent, as they were in input from the considered port, to
the other Switch ports involved by the considered VLAN.
• Direction DOWN ( ). CCM messages are sent in output from the selected port.
In order to change the transmission direction of the messages, select the arrow. The arrow changes
direction each time is selected.
The ports of the Ethernet Switch not enabled to the transit of the packets with VLan ID equal to that
of the specific VLAN cannot be selected (disabled port - example ).
If the equipment belongs to an ALCplus2 node and is connected to other elements of the node through
Ethernet nodal Bus, the external ports LAN 1 and LAN 2, even if enabled to the transit of the packets,
cannot be selected because not available for the OAM-FM Ethernet functionality.

The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays again the list of VLANs and, for the selected VLAN, the
MA and/or MEP just created.
To remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN
2. Select the VLAN to which you wish to remove the MA (pag.297)/MEP (pag.297).
3. Press Unbind and confirm.

In the contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP, for the selected VLAN, the MA/MEP indication is removed.

To enable/disable the transmission of CCM messages for a MEP
Operation available only if a MEP is associated to the VLAN (see Fig.104).
2. Select the VLAN which a MEP is associated to.

The transmission status of the CCM (pag.300) messages is pointed out by the check-box CCM:
• Check-box active ( ). The transmission of CCM messages is enabled.
• Check-box inactive ( ). The transmission of CCM messages is disabled.
3. To modify the status, select the check-box CCM and confirm.

At each selection/confirmation, the check-box assumes the status complementary to the previous one
(if the check sign is present, it is removed and vice versa).
To verify the table of remote MEPs (RMep table)
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the local MEP whose relevant list of Remote MEPs (pag.299) you
wish to display.
3. Select the option Rmep relevant to the selected VLAN.

The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays the area Rem. MEPs - VLAN <VLAN identifier> (<VLAN
name>) - MEP <MEP identifier> (<MA name>) where the table of remote MEPs is pointed out (see
Fig.105).
Fig.105 OAM-FM MA/MEP - Rem. MEPs contextual area
(2)
Selected
remote
List of the
MEP (3)
remote
MEPs (1)
Not
selected
remote
MEP
(4)
Fig.105 notes
(1) Every line represents a remote MEP.

For every remote MEP, is displayed in the column:
• MEP ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.
• MAC Address. MAC address (Media Access Control) of the equipment where the remote MEP
is present.

The field value equal to zero means that remote MEP has been manually inserted by the op-
erator and local MEP has not received a CCM message from the specific remote MEP yet (see
Fig.101).
• MEP State. Status of the remote MEP:
• Start. Initial status of the remote MEP just after its insertion (automatic or manual)
in table or status assumed by the remote MEP after its disabling.
• Conn. Status the remote MEP reaches after an enabling command or after the first
CCM message sent by the specific remote MEP.
• Failed. Status the remote MEP reaches when local MEP does not receive (along a pe-
riod of 2,5 times the CCM interval) a CCM message from the specific remote MEP.
The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start, Conn. or Failed
and the conditions which cause the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are
depicted in Fig.101.
• RDI State. Alarm status of the remote MEP acquired from the field RDI (Remote Defect In-
dicator) present in the CCM (pag.300) messages.
This field is meaningful for the remote MEPs in status Conn.
In detail, the value:
• Active. The remote MEP is alarmed.
• Not active. The remote MEP is not alarmed.
(2) When you select the heading of the first column or of the column MAC Address, the rows of the table
are sorted in increasing alphanumerical order with respect to the considered column and the arrow
is displayed.
At the next selection, the rows are sorted in decreasing order (the arrow is displayed) and so on.
(3) Button:
• Add MEP. It adds a Remote MEP in the table.
• Cross Check. It enables a Remote MEP.
• Remove. It removes a Remote MEP from the table.
• Refresh. It updates the information present in the table.
• Cancel. It returns to the contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP (see Fig.104).
To insert a remote MEP in the RMep table
wish to display.

name>) - MEP <MEP identifier> (<MA name>) (see Fig.105).
4. Press Add MEP.

The Rem. MEPs... area displays the box MEP ID.
5. Set, in the box MEP ID, the identifying number you wish to assign to the remote MEP (value between
1 and 8191).
The identifying number of a MEP must be univocal in the network for each specific VLAN.

A row with the new remote MEP in status Start is added to the RMep table.
The operations the user can execute when a remote MEP is in status Start and the conditions causing
the passage of the remote MEP from a status to another are depicted in Fig.101.
The MAC Address of the remote MEPs inserted by the operator is set to value zero.

To enable a remote MEP of the RMep table

Operation meaningful only for the remote MEPs automatically inserted in the RMep table (see Fig.101).
wish to display.

4. Select ( ) the remote MEPs in status Start you wish to enable.
5. Press Cross Check and confirm

The status of the selected remote MEPs changes from Start to Conn.
If the operation is not executed (the status of the remote MEP continues to be Start) and the alarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<local MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm is active, this means
that the considered remote MEP has raised or has contribute to raise the alarm because one of its con-
figuration parameters (Domain name, MA name or CCM interval) is different from the corresponding
parameter set for the local MEP.
Align the configuration of remote MEP with that of the local MEP and repeat this procedure to enable
the remote MEP.
To disable a remote MEP of the RMep table
wish to display.

4. Select ( ) the remote MEPs in status Conn. you wish to disable.

The status of the selected remote MEPs changes from Conn. to Start.
To remove a remote MEP from RMep table
wish to display.

4. Select ( ) the remote MEPs in status Failed or Start (see Fig.101) you wish to remove.

The selected remote MEPs are removed from the RMep table.

To send one or more LoopBack messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the MEP from which you wish to sent the LBM (pag.301) mes-
sage.
3. Select the option Lbm relevant to the selected VLAN.

The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays the area Lbm - VLAN <VLAN identifier> (<VLAN name>)
- MEP <MEP identifier> (<MA name>) (see Fig.106).
4. Set the maintenance point, which you wish to send the LBM message, in one of the following modes:
• Select the option Use found MEP.
Select, in the list Found MEP(s), the remote MEP which you wish to send the LBM message to.
• Select the option Use MAC address.
Set, in the box MAC Address, the physical address of the equipment where there is the remote
MEP or the MIP which you wish to send the LoopBack message to.
5. Set, in the box Messages to send, the number of LoopBack messages you wish to send (value between1
and 5).
6. Press Run Test and confirm.

During the operation, the box:
• Test Status displays the wording Running.
• Sent messages displays the progress of the number of sent messages (meaningful if a value
different from 1 is set in the box Messages to send).
At the end of the operation, the box/area:
• Statistics points out the statistics of the LBRs messages (LoopBack Replies - LBM messages re-
ceived by the maintenance point as reply to the sent LBM messages) (see Fig.106).
• Test Status displays the test result (see Fig.106).
• Sent messages points out the number of sent LBM messages.
Fig.106 OAM-FM MA/MEP - Lbm contextual area
LBM
messages
to send
LBM messages
sent
RMep
table
(1) LBM messages
received from
remote MIP/
MEP as response
to the sent LBM
(2) messages (3)
Test
status (4)
(5)
Fig.106 notes
(1) Each row represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:
• ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.

• MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.
• State. Status of remote MEP.
The description of the status of remote MEP is the same depicted in Fig.105.
The RMep table is available only when the option Use found MEP is selected.
(2) In these fields it is possible to enter the physical address of the equipment containing the remote
MEP which you wish to send the LoopBack message to.
The fields are available only when the option Use MAC address is selected.
(3) Parameter:
• Valid. Number of received valid packets.
• Out Of Order. Number of packets received out of sequence.
• Bad Msdu. Number of received packets with unknown format.
(4) Box with colour/wording:

• Yellow - Running. Test in progress.
• Green - OK. Test completed with positive result: the maintenance point has correctly replied
to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local MEP.
• Red - Failed. Test completed with negative result: the maintenance point has not correctly
replied to the LBM messages (OAM-FM packets) sent by the local MEP.
(5) Button:
• Refresh. It updates the information.
• Run Test. It starts the transmission of LBM messages.
To trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of
the same VLAN
2. Select the VLAN to which is associated the MEP from which you wish to sent the LTM (pag.302) mes-
sages to trace the path between the local MEP and a remote MEP of the same VLAN.
3. Select the option Ltm relevant to the selected VLAN.

The contextual area OAM-FM MA/MEP displays the area Ltm - VLAN <VLAN identifier> (<VLAN name>)
- MEP <MEP identifier> (<MA name>).
The area Link Trace points out, if available, the last traced Link Trace.
4. Set the remote MEP, which you wish to send the LTM messages to, in one of the following modes:
• Select the option Use found MEP.
Select, in the RMep table, the remote MEP in status Conn. which you wish to send the
LTM messages to.
If you select a MEP in status Start or Failed, the operation is refused.
• Select the option Use MAC address.
Set, in the box MAC Address, the physical address of the equipment containing the remote MEP
which you wish to send the Link Trace messages to.
5. Press Run Test and confirm.

At the end of the operation, the area Link Trace displays the list of the MAC Addresses of MIP-MEP
crossed to reach the remote MEP with the indication of the distance in Hops from the source MEP.

Fig.107 OAM-FM MA/MEP - Ltm contextual area
(2)
RMep
table (1)
Physical address
Maintenance and identifier of
points present set remote MEP
between local which the Link
MEP and set Trace refers to
remote MEP
(3)
(4)
Fig.107 notes
(1) Each row represents a remote MEP. For each remote MEP is displayed in the column:
• ID. Identifier of the remote MEP.
• MAC Address. MAC address of the equipment where the remote MEP is present.
• State. Status of remote MEP.
The description of the status of remote MEP is the same depicted in Fig.105.
The RMep table is available only when the option Use found MEP is selected.
(2) In these fields it is possible to enter the physical address of the equipment containing the remote
MEP which you wish to send the Link Trace message to.
The fields are available only when the option Use MAC address is selected.
(3) Table with the identifiers of the RMeps which has replied to the LTM message. Column:
• [RMep] MAC. Type of maintenance point, identifier (only for MEPs) and physical address of
the equipment where the maintenance point is present. In detail:
• [*] <physical address>. Intermediate maintenance point (MIP) and MAC address of
the equipment where MIP is present.
• [<identifier>] <physical address>. End maintenance point (MEP), relevant identifier
and MAC address of the equipment containing the MEP.
• Hops. Position of the specific maintenance point with respect to the local MEP:
• 1. First maintenance point after the local MEP.
• 2. Second maintenance point after the local MEP.
• 3. Third maintenance point after the local MEP and so on.
(4) Button:
• Refresh. It updates the information.
• Run Test. It start sending the LTM messages.

S/N Meas
Command available only for equipment provided with radio (see option Radio A - Fig.44).
The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.
To verify the measure of the S/N ratio
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > S/N Meas command.
The S/N Meas. contextual area opens.
The S/N parameter points out the value of the S/N measure (see Fig.108).
Fig.108 S/N Meas. contextual area
Value of the
S/N measure
(1)
Fig.108 notes
(1) The measure is always in progress and the value is updated at regular intervals.
The period between an update and the next one is displayed by the clock present in the Events List
area (pag.35) of the WEB LCT page. If you wish to update the value immediately, press Refresh.
For the equipment in 1+0 configuration is present the Branch 1A area.
For the equipment in 1+1 configuration are present the Branch 1A (branch 1 S/N measure) and
Branch 2A (branch 2 S/N measure) areas.

Fade Margin

The Fade Margin command manages the calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin).
• To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (pag.317).
• To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for the calcu-
lation of the Fade Margin (pag.319).
For more information about the Fade Margin go to pag.320.
To execute the calculation of the link margin and check/delete the results (Fade Mar-
gin)
The operation is traffic affecting.

In order to execute the operation, it is necessary that:
• The remote equipment is inserted in the list of the remote equipment of the local equipment,
and it is configured as Remote Link (equipment type) (see pag.57).
If more equipment configured as Remote Link are present in the remote equipment list, the ap-
plication will automatically acknowledge as remote equipment the FIRST equipment of Remote
Link type present in the list, even if this one is not physically connected, with respect to the local
equipment, to the other side of the radio link.
In the remote equipment list, the equipment are sorted in increasing order by their IP address.
• The user is connected to both the terminals (local and remote) with profile System or Station
Operator.
• In both the terminals, the re-timing modulation is not active (see pag.164).
• In both the terminals, there is not active alarms, except for the following:
• Alarms of group ETH LAN, P.M..., Plug-in module, STM-1 (see pag.349).
• Common group: Equip Manual Operation, MNGT/1 cable Fail, MNGT/2 cable Fail, RMON
Alarm...
• LIM group: Local... Alarm Synthesis, REMOTE LIM Radio... Alarm Synthesis, IDU Board
Trib... Rx AIS Alarm, ... Signal loss Alarm, ...Re-Timing Alarm.
• Radio group: ...PRBS Fail Alarm, ...Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode
• RT group: ...RT Rx Power Low Alarm, ...RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis, ...RT LOCAL
ODU Alarm Synthesis, ...Rx Active Status, ...Tx Active Status
• SETS group: IDU Sets... Drift Alarm, IDU Sets... LTI Alarm, IDU Sets Free Running Sta-
tus.
• SNTP group: SNTP servers lost Alarm.
During the operation:
• In the WEB LCT page of the local terminal, it is not possible to change the context (the selection
of the commands is forbidden).
• In both the terminals, the manual operation Fade Margin evaluation active is active.
The messages that can be displayed during the operation are reported at pag.319.
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Fade Margin command.
The Fade Margin contextual area opens (see Fig.109).

If the Fade Margin command is not available, this means that the calculation of the link margin is not
enabled for the equipment. Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling. To
verify the functionalities enabled select the Features Management command (pag.146).
2. Type the expected value of Fade Margin into the Fade M. box.
This value is normally present in the document related to the branch calculation (for example in LER -
Link Engineering Report).
3. A control on the typed value and the Ptx value, stored into the controller of the equipment, is executed.
If the difference between the two value is greater of the maximum capacity of the fader internal to the
equipment, the message Max available attenuation … dB. An external attenuator is required. Continue
anyway? is displayed.
In this case, it is necessary to use an external attenuator and type, in the Ext. Att. box, the value of
attenuation externally provided, otherwise the calculation will be executed on the basis of the attenu-
ation made available by the equipment.
4. Press Start.
The calculation of the link margin is started.
The label of the Start button changes to Abort, whose choice stops the operation.
The Current Ptx area indicates, step by step, the lowering of the transmission level.
The Status box displays the progress of the operation as messages.
For the 1+1 systems, the calculation is executed using the transmitter active at the moment of the start
of the measure and relevant to both the remote receivers (see pag.320).
At the end of the check, the message Step <value> of <value> completed. Continue? is displayed on
each single branch. Press:
• No, if you wish to stop the procedure.
• Yes, if you wish to continue.
The display of the message Procedure Completed points out that the operation has been executed suc-
cessfully.
5. Press View Log File to display the power levels and the calculations executed by the system during
the calculation of the link margin.
The WEB FadeMarginViewLog page opens.
If you wish:
• To save the result, it is necessary to select and copy them into a text editor.
• To delete the result, press Reset Log File and confirm.
If the results of the Fade Margin are not deleted, at the next activation of the calculation of the
link margin (selection of the Start push-button) the data will be added to those already present.
Fig.109 Fade Margin contextual area
Expected value IP address

of Fade Margin (SNMP agent)
to be inserted of the local
before the hop equipment
calculation
Attenuation IP address
value, to be (SNMP agent)
inserted of the remote
before the hop equipment
calculation,
if you use an
external
attenuator
At the end of
the operation,
this area
displays the
results of
the hop
calculation (1)

Fig.109 notes
(1) Column:
• Current Step. Transmitter and the receiver (radio link) which the results of the operation are
referred to.
• Real F.M. (dB). Fade Margin value, recalculated considering the really measured character-
istics of the equipment.
• Real Fade Margin Ver. Fade Margin value verified by the procedure (it is the result of the
procedure).
Messages displayed during the execution of the Fade Margin
Message:
• Local equipment is not probably logged or Check local login
The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator.
Execute the login (pag.30).
• Check remote login
The user is not connected to the local equipment with profile System or Station Operator.
Execute the login (pag.30).
• Local equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure can’t go on
The local equipment has at least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade
Margin.
Verify the active alarms (see pag.35) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms.
• Remote equipment has one or more alarms. The procedure can’t go on
The local equipment has at least one alarm active that does not allow the execution of the Fade
Margin.
Verify the active alarms (see pag.35) and operate on the equipment to clear these alarms.
• Remote equipment is unreacheable...
The remote equipment is unreachable.
Restore the connection or wait for the restore of the connection.
• Fade Margin Procedure active on this equipment
The calculation of the link margin is already in progress.
• Adaptive modulation is active on local equipment. Turn it off and restart procedure
In the local terminal the adaptive modulation is active.
Disable the adaptive modulation (see pag.167).
• Remote Link Not Found!
In the remote equipment list there is not an equipment configured as Remote Link (equipment
type).
Add the remote equipment to the list (see pag.59).
To verify the values of the power parameters stored into the equipment and used for
the calculation of the Fade Margin
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Fade Margin command.
The Fade Margin contextual area opens (see Fig.109).
If the Fade Margin command is not available, this means that the calculation of the link margin is not
enabled for the equipment.
Some functionalities of the equipment are available after the enabling. To verify the functionalities en-
abled select the Features Management command (pag.146).
2. Press View Tables.

The FadeMarginTablesLog page WEB is opened where the parameters stored in the controller of the
local equipment are saved.

Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin) (more info)
With calculation of the link margin, we mean the calculation of the difference between the level normally
received by the equipment and the level received on the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm.
The operation is automatically executed by the program using the parameters set by the user (expected
value of Fade Margin and possible external fading) and the power parameters (Ptx, rated Ptx, etc.) stored
in the equipment during the test of the equipment itself.
The calculation is executed on the radio link composed by the equipment which the Fade Margin contextual
area is referred to (local equipment) and by the equipment located on the other end of the link (remote
equipment).
For the system in:

• 1+0, only the measure Tx1\Rx1 is executed, using the operating and attenuated PTx correc-
tions.
• 1+1 Hot Stand By, the calculation is executed on both the branches: first the operation is exe-
cuted on the working Tx branch and both the remote receivers, then the program forces the
switch in transmission and repeats the operation in such a way to calculate the link margin for
all the possible Tx/Rx combinations: Tx1-Rx1, Tx1-Rx2, Tx2-Rx1, Tx2-Rx2.
The measure is executed using the operating and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of
the corresponding branch.
During the measurement phases, the stand-by transmitter is automatically set to status Off and
then set in status On at the end of the specific operation.
• 1+1 Frequency Diversity, the measures Tx1\Rx1 and Tx2\Rx2 are executed, using the operating
and attenuated PTx corrections and the alarms of the corresponding branch.
• Local equipment 1+0 - remote equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy, the measures Tx1 local\Rx1 remote
and Tx1 local\Rx2 remote are executed.
• Local equipment 1+1 Hot StandBy - remote equipment 1+0, the measure Tx local working\Rx1
remote and, after the switch on the local terminal, the measure Tx local working\Rx1 are exe-
cuted.
When the calculation is activated, the Ptx level of the local equipment is automatically faded by 1dB at a
time. For each single fading, the Ptx value and the possible alarms are stored to a file. The Ptx level is
faded step by step until the activation of the Rx Quality Low Alarm on the remote terminal.
Before activating the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed (he operations are
executed only if the parameters are not in the indicated condition):
• In the local terminal the operation of the device for the automatic control of the transmitted
power (ATPC) is forced to manual.
• In both the terminals, the value of 1800 seconds is set as timeout for the manual operations.
At the end of the calculation, the following operations are automatically executed:
• The level of power transmitted by the local equipment is reported to the initial value (before the
activation of the calculation).
• In the local terminal the ATPC device is reported to the initial operating modality (before the
activation of the calculation).
The restore of the initial values of the above mentioned parameters is automatically executed even after
an interruption of the procedure.

PRBS

The PRBS command manages the PRBS device.

• To verify the PRBS measure status (pag.321)

• To activate/reset the PRBS measure (pag.322)
• To deactivate the PRBS measure (pag.322)
• To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure (pag.322)
• To enable/disable the E1 signal used for the measure (pag.322)
To verify the PRBS measure status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > PRBS command.

The PRBS contextual area opens.
The Start/Stop parameter points out the PRBS measure status (see Fig.110).
Fig.110 PRBS contextual area
Number of errors
detected from
the start of the
measure
Status and
Dynamically updated transitions
BER value during of the
the measure “...PRBS Fail
Alarm” (1)
Time (expressed in
day/hours/minute/
seconds) range after
the measure active
Activation
Type of pattern
status of the
used for the
measure (2)
measure (3)
Status of the
E1 signal used for
Tributary
the measure (4)
used for the
measure (5)
Fig.110 notes
(1) Box:
• Sync Loss Alarm. The colour of box points out the status of the alarm:
• Green. The alarm is not active.
• Red, orange, yellow or light blue. The alarm is active and has, respectively, severity
Critical, Major, Minor or Warning.
• Fail Alarms. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start of the meas-
ure.

• Start-Reset. The PRBS measure is active.

• Stop. The PRBS measure is deactivated.

• Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used as pattern for the measure.
• 2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.
• 2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used as pattern for the measure.

• Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream.
• Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or
of the expansion (1÷16 or 1÷32).
(5) The value is meaningful only if the Enable option in the E1 Signal area is active.
To activate/reset the PRBS measure

The PRBS contextual area opens (see Fig.110).
2. In the Start/Stop area, select the Start-Reset option.

The measure will be active until the user does not stop it.
To deactivate the PRBS measure

The PRBS contextual area opens (see Fig.110).
2. In the Start/Stop area, select the Stop option.
To verify/modify the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure

The Test Pattern parameter points out the type of PRBS pattern used for the measure (see Fig.110).

• Fixed Word (AIS). A predefined fixed word is used for the measure.
• 2 ^ 15-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
• 2 ^ 23-1. The indicated algorithm is used for the measure.
To enable/disable the used E1 signal for the measure

The E1 Signal parameter points out the status of the used E1 signal for the measure (see Fig.110).

• Disable. The PRBS is not physically connected to any stream/data channel.
• Enable. The PRBS is connected to one of the 2Mbit/s tributary of the IDU board (A or B) or of
the expansion (1÷16 or 1÷32).
The enabling of the E1 signal used for the measure determinates also the connector (2Mbit/s
tributary), which a measurement instrument can be connected to for the control of the error rate
by means of the PRBS functionality.
3. ONLY if the enabled the E1 signal, set the tributary in the 2 Mbit/s Selection box.
If a value is not available, the relevant tributary is used as T12 synchronism in output (see Fig.53).

Only if the option Enable is selected, a message is displayed informing that the set tributary is imme-
diately enabled to the use and then a message is displayed warning you are executing a forcing and
displaying the current setting of the timeout.

Enabling of the E1 signal activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on the forcing is inactive independently from the previous setting.
If the message Operation fail! ...Wrong user profile! is displayed, check that the user profile can enable
the tributary.

Radio Loop

Reading/Writing Read and Write, Station Operator, System
The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops.

• To verify the radio loops status (pag.324)
• To activate a radio loop (pag.325)
• To deactivate a radio loop (pag.325)
• To execute the test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN (pag.325)

• Radio loops go to pag.326.
• Test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN go to pag.326.
To verify the status and to activate/deactivate the base band loops go to pag.190.
To verify the radio loops status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Loop command.
The Radio Loop contextual area opens
The Loop Branch... parameter points out the current status of the loops (see Fig.111).
Fig.111 Radio Loop contextual area
(2)
Loops
list (1)
Fig.111 notes
(1) Each loop is coupled with an option.

When the option is selected, it points out that the loop is activated, while when it is selected the
Loop OFF option, it points out that there is not any activated loop.

(2) For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment in
configuration 1+1, there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop Branch 2 (loops
branch 2) areas.
To activate a radio loop

The activation of the radio loop can affect the traffic. For more information go to pag.326.
The Radio Loop contextual area opens (see Fig.111).
2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically dis-
ables the preceding one.
3. Press Apply.
timeout.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.
To deactivate a radio loop
The Radio Loop contextual area opens (see Fig.111).
2. Select the Loop OFF option present in the Loop Branch… area, relevant to the loop that you want to
deactivate.
To execute the test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN
1. Operation available and meaningful only for equipment provided with ODU ASN. For more information
go to pag.326.Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Loop command.
The Radio Loop contextual area opens.
2. Select the RF Loop option.
3. Press Apply.
timeout.

The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.
In the Radio Loop contextual area the progression and the result of the test is displayed as shown in
Fig.112.
5. Select the Loop OFF option.

Fig.112 Radio Loop contextual area (ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN)
Test
status
(1)
(2)
Fig.112 notes
(1) The Test Loop bar, during the execution of the test, shows the progression of the operation.
The status of the test is pointed out by the box and the wording on the right side of the bar. In detail:
• White box - no wording. Test to execute.
• White box - wording Running. Test in progress.
• Green box - wording Passed. Test executed correctly (ODU operating).
• Red box - wording Fail. Test failed (ODU faulted).
• Red box - wording Interrupted. Test interrupted by the system.
Possible cause: the set timeout of the MAN OP is lower than the time for the execution of the
test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that of execution of the test.
(2) For the equipment in configuration 1+0, it is present the Loop Branch 1 area. For the equipment in
configuration 1+1, there are present the Loop Branch 1 (loops branch 1) and Loop Branch 2 (loops
branch 2) areas.
Radio loop (more info)
In the 1+0 systems, the activation of the radio loop affects the traffic.
In the 1+1 systems, the activation of the radio loop on the active branch affects the traffic. The activation
of the radio loop on the stand-by branch does not affects the traffic. However, in this case, before executing
the loop, the receiver must be forced to the active branch (see pag.328).
Anyway, before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set
(see pag.134). If the timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the
switch-off/switch-on of the equipment or the equipment reset.
Test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN (more info)
The ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN of old generation was not provided with the RF loop, because not
designed to execute a loop in accordance with the specifications of emission of the spurious signals.

The ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN of new generation (ODU unit with Part. Number GE8xxx - see
Fig.36) is provided with an internal diagnostics functionality, based on a loop executed in preset operating
condition in such a way to verify the transceiver functionality.
The execution of the test is independent from the type of traffic (TDM, Ethernet, hybrid) and does not need
any external measurement tools.
At the end of the test, the result of the diagnosis is displayed (see Fig.112): test executed correctly (ODU
operating), test failed (ODU faulted).
The test is a manual operation (MAN OP), so its execution is subjected to the timeout of the manual oper-
ations (see Fig.37).
If the timeout:
• Is enabled, at the end of the test the condition of Loop RF is preserved until the expiry of the
duration of the MAN OP unless it is removed immediately at the end of the test, as described in
the specific procedure.
• Is not enabled, at the end of the test it is necessary to remove the condition of Loop RF, as de-
scribed in the specific procedure.
If the test is interrupted by the system (see Fig.112), a possible reason could be that the set timeout was
lower than the execution time of the test. It is suggested to set the timeout to a value greater than that
of execution of the test.
In case of redundant systems, the activation of the test on the stand-by branch involves the degradation
or the loss of the connection of the working branch, because even on this one the same modulation is
(mandatory) set.
In detail, with:
• ACM enabled: reduction of the traffic to the test profile.
• ACM disable: loss of traffic.
In case of systems configured with constant peak (see Fig.46), it is ensured that the rated power of the
connection is not exceeded during the execution of the test.

Radio Switch A

Command available only for equipment provided with the radio in protected configuration (see option
Radio A - Fig.44).
The Radio Switch A command manages the radio switch.

• To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches (pag.328)
• To modify the management of the switching at reception (Rx Forced Switch) (pag.329)
• To modify the management of the switching at transmission (Tx Forced Switch) (pag.329)
• To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential) (pag.330)
• To modify the Wait Time parameter (pag.330)
• To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration
(pag.330)
For more information about the radio switch go to pag.330.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the radio switches
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Maintenance > Radio Switch A command.
The Radio Switch A contextual area opens displaying the status and the radio parameters of the radio
switch (see Fig.113).
Fig.113 Radio Switch A contextual area
Mode used to manage, Mode used to manage,

into the systems in into the systems in
1+1 configuration, the 1+1 configuration, the
switching at reception switching at transmission
between the service between the service
branch and the branch and the
reserve one (1) reserve one (1) (3)
Mode used to manage,

into the systems in
1+1 configuration,
the function of
preferential branch
for the service
at transmission
(2) (3)
Wait Time
The choice of this period (4)
push-button allows to
force the switch on the
preferential branch
without await the expire
of the Wait Time period

Fig.113 notes

• Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms.
• Branch-1. The equipment is forced to use the branch 1 for the service.

• Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not
use a branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
• Branch-1. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment use the
branch 1.
branch 2.
(3) Tx Preferential and Tx Forced Switch parameters are available only for the equipment in isofrequen-
tial configuration 1+1. For the heterofrequential configuration 1+1, the parameters are not availa-
ble because the two branches (1 and 2) transmit at the same time because the selection of the
signal is executed at reception.
(4) Time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch
between the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
To modify the management of the switching in reception (Rx Forced Switch)
The Radio Switch A contextual area opens.
The Rx Forced Switch parameter points out the management of the switching in reception (see
Fig.113).

• Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch… option) a message is displayed warning

Forcing the switching activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned on
again, the functioning of the switch is an automatic one without taking into account the preceding set-
ting.
To modify the management of the switching in transmission (Tx Forced Switch)
The Tx Forced Switch parameter points out the management of the switching in transmission (see
Fig.113).

• Auto. The switching is automatically managed according to the presence of the alarms (normal
functioning mode of the equipment).
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Branch… option) a message is displayed warning

ting.
To modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission (Tx Preferential)
The Tx Preferential parameter points out the management of the preferential branch in transmission
(see Fig.113).

• Auto. Without the presence of alarms (that cause the switching), the equipment does not use a
branch in a preferential manner with respect to the other one.
branch 1.
branch 2.
To modify the Wait Time parameter
The Wait Time parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.113).
2. To change the parameter, type the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 150 sec.
To force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time ex-
piration
The Radio Switch A contextual area opens (see Fig.113).
2. Press Reset.
Radio switch (more info)
The radio switches (reception and transmission), for the ALCplus2 equipment in protected configuration,
generally operate in automatic mode: the equipment executes a switch when specific alarms raises on the
operating radio branch.

The user can manage the radio branch executing some forcing operations and enabling the preferential
branch.
Forcing a radio branch to operate (switch in reception and switch in transmission)
This function foresees the user can force a radio branch to operate independently from alarms which can
be active (see pag.328/pag.329).
This function must not be used for the normal operation of the radio switch in reception and/or transmis-
sion. It is a maintenance operation and remains active until when the user deactivates it or the timeout
period of the manual operation expires (if set).
Preferential radio branch (switch in transmission)
This function provides the choice of a branch to be used in a preferential way in transmission when there
are not alarms that cause the switching (see pag.330).
In fact, when the switching is automatically managed by the controller, it executes the switching when on
the branch on service there are present some specific alarms.
When the alarms have been reset, the controller does not execute again the switching. While, if it has been
set a preferential branch when the operator resets the alarms, if the branch on service is not the prefer-
ential one, the controller executes the switching and it uses for the service the branch set by the operator
as the preferential one (naturally if the branch does not have any alarms).
Besides a time period can be defined (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the non-preferential
branch before being restored to the preferential branch, in such a way to avoid the continue switch between
the two branches in case of fleeting alarms.
For instance, suppose that an alarm occurs causing the switch of the service from the preferential branch
to the other branch. When the alarm clears, the preferential branch is not immediately restored to service
but postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the same alarm
has not occurred again on the preferential branch. At the end of the Wait Time period, if the alarm has not
occurred again, the service is restored to the preferential branch. Otherwise, the switch is delayed by other
n seconds, during which the controller verifies that the same alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the user can force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time
period expiration (see pag.330).

SWITCH
Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the STM-1 stream and/or protection of the nodal
configuration is active (see Fig.44).
At the choice of Switch option, the program displays the following commands:
• STM-1 (pag.333). It manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream.
• Nodal Bus (pag.337). It manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.

STM-1

Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 expansion when the protection of the STM-1 stream is active (MSP mode - see
Fig.44).
The STM-1 command manages the switch of the protected STM-1 stream.
• To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch (pag.333)
• To modify the management of the STM-1 switch (pag.334)
• To modify the logic of the STM-1 switch (pag.335)
• To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential (pag.335)
• To force the switch on the preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expira-
tion (pag.335)
For more information about the STM-1 switch go to pag.336.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > STM-1 command.

The STM-1 contextual area opens.
In the Switch Status area the status and the configuration parameters of the STM-1 switch is pointed
out (see Fig.114).
Fig.114 STM-1 contextual area
Main Secondary
stream: stream:
STM-1 1 STM-1 2
Operating
status of
the switch Management
(1) modality of
the switching
logic (3)
Management
mode of the
primary STM-1
stream as
preferential
(4) Management
modality of
Value of the the switch (2)
Wait Time
parameter (5)

Fig.114 notes
(1) As displayed in the legend, the active STM-1 stream is pointed out by the green box while the stand-
by STM-1 stream by the yellow box.
(2) Option:
• Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal op-
eration of the switch).
• Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1 stream.
• Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is never
executed, independently from the type of alarm that can raise.
• Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
(3) Option:
• Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment,
which commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.
• Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.
(4) Option:
• Not revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> sec-
ondary) the secondary STM-1 stream remains active even when the alarms that caused the
switch clear.
• Revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1 stream.
(5) Wtr Time. Period (expressed in minutes) during which a non alarm condition must persist on the
main stream so that the service is restored on it.
To modify the management of the STM-1 switch

The parameter MSP Protection points out the management mode of the STM-1 switch (see Fig.114).

• Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal opera-
tion of the switch).
• Lock Out. The equipment is forced to use the primary STM-1 stream.
• Forced. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch will be never
executed, independently from the type of alarm which can raise.
• Manual. The equipment is forced to use the secondary STM-1 stream: the switch is executed
only in case of alarms of type Signal Fail or Signal Degrade.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the Lock Out, Forced or Manual option) a message is
displayed warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.

ting.

To modify the logic of STM-1 switch

The Direction parameter points out the modality of management of the logic of the STM-1 switch (see
Fig.114).

• Unidirectional. The switch logic (MSP protection) is managed at level of local equipment, which
commands the switch without notifying this situation to the remote equipment.
• Bidirectional. The switch logic is managed at Link level: the local equipment agrees the switch
with the remote equipment.
To set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential

The parameter Protection Mode points out if the primary STM-1 stream is set as preferential (see
Fig.114).

• Not revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is not preferential: after a switch (primary -> second-
ary) the secondary STM-1 stream remains active even when the alarms that caused the switch
clear.
• Revertive. The primary STM-1 stream is preferential: after a switch (primary -> secondary),
when the alarms clear, the primary stream is restored as active STM-1 stream.

The Wtr Time (Min)parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.114).
2. To change the parameter, set the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 minutes.
To force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time
expiration

The STM-1 contextual area opens (see Fig.114).
2. Press Wtr Clear.
The main stream, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.

STM-1 switch (more info)
The ALCplus2 equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. 2xSTM-1 32E1 or IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1
16E can be configured by the user to operate with the STM-1 stream disabled, enabled or protected (see
pag.158).
When the user enables the protection of the STM-1 stream (MSP mode - Multiplex Section Protection) even
the management of the STM-1 switch is enabled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating STM-1 stream.
STM-1 switching criteria
When the STM-1 switch operates in automatic mode, the user can set one of the following switching logics:
• Unidirectional Logic. Only the local alarms are considered among the criteria which determine
the switch.
• Bidirectional Logic. The local equipment agrees the switch of the STM-1 stream with the remote
equipment: both the local and the remote alarms are considered among the criteria which de-
termine the switch.
Forcing of the STM-1 stream to operation
This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary STM-1 stream to op-
erate, independently from the alarms which could be active (see pag.334).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the STM-1 switch. It is a maintenance oper-
ation and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation
expires (if set).
Preferential primary STM-1 stream
This function foresees the choice of the primary STM-1 stream to use in preferential mode when there are
not alarms which determine the switch (see pag.335).
In fact, when the switch operates in automatic mode, the equipment executes the switch when specific
alarms raises on the STM-1 streams in service.
When the alarms clear, the controller does not execute the switch again.
If the primary STM-1 stream is set as preferential, when the switch is executed, if the STM-1 stream in
service is not the primary, the controller executes the switch and uses the primary STM-1 stream for the
service (naturally if the stream is not alarmed).
Moreover it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the not pref-
erential (secondary) STM-1 stream before this returns to the preferential (primary) STM-1 stream, in such
a way to avoid the continue switch between the two STM-1 streams in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm raises which determines the switch of the service from the primary STM-
1 stream to the secondary. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately restored on the primary
(preferential) STM-1 stream, but this is postponed by n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the con-
troller verifies that the alarms has not raised again on the preferential STM-1 stream. At the end of the
Wait Time period, if the alarm has not raised again, the service is restored on the primary STM-1 stream.
On the contrary, the switch is postponed by other n seconds during which the system verifies the alarm
has not raised again and so on.
In any moment the operator can force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait
Time period expiration (see pag.335).

Nodal Bus

This command is available only for ALCplus2 equipment with IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E1 ex-
pansion when the protection of the Nodal Bus is active (see Fig.44).
The Nodal Bus command manages the switch of the protected Nodal Bus.
• To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch (pag.337)
• To modify the management of the nodal switch (pag.338)
• To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time ex-
piration (pag.338)
For more information about the nodal switch go to pag.339.
To verify the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal switch
1. Select the Equipment Menu > Switch > Nodal Bus command.
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens, where the status and the configuration parameters of the nodal
switch is pointed out (see Fig.115).
Fig.115 Nodal Bus contextual area
Value of the
Wait Time
parameter (1)
Press this push-

button to force
the switch on the
preferential NBUS
connection
without await the
expire of the
Wait Time period
Management
modality of
the switch (2)

Fig.115 notes
(1) Wtr Time. Period (expressed in seconds) during which a non alarm condition must persist on the
preferential NBUS connection so that the service is restored on it.
(2) Option:
• Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal op-
eration of the switch).
• NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.
• NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
To modify the management of the nodal switch
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens.
The Forced Switch parameter points out the management mode of the nodal switch (see Fig.115).
• Auto. The switch is automatically managed according to the presence of alarms (normal opera-
tion of the switch).
• NBUS1. The equipment is forced to use the primary Nodal Bus.
• NBUS2. The equipment is forced to use the secondary Nodal Bus.
3. Press Apply.
Only if you are forcing the switching (selection of the NBUS1 or NBUS2 option) a message is displayed
warning that you are executing a forcing and displaying the current setting of timeout.

ting.
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens.
The Wtr Time (s) parameter points out the value of Wait Time (see Fig.115).
2. To change the parameter, set the time interval wished: value comprised between 0 and 12 seconds.
To force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait
Time expiration
The Nodal Bus contextual area opens (see Fig.115).
2. Press Wtr Clear.
The primary Bus, after the clearing of the alarms that caused the switch, is immediately used for the
service. The Wtr Time period is considered elapsed.

Nodal switch (more info)
The ALCplus2 equipment with expansion IduBoard Exp. Nod. 2xSTM-1 16E can be configured by the user
to operate with the Nodal Bus disabled, enabled or protected (see pag.155).
When the user enables the protection of the Nodal Bus even the management of the nodal switch is ena-
bled.
The switch generally operates automatically: the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms raise
on the operating Nodal Bus.
Forcing of the Nodal Bus to operation
This function foresees the possibility for the user to force the primary or secondary Nodal Bus to operate,
independently from the alarms which could be active (see pag.338).
This operation must not be used for the normal operation of the nodal switch. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until when the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires
(if set).
Preferential NBUS (Nodal Bus) connection
When the user executes a single connection, which involves a protected NBUS channel, the matrix auto-
matically executes the protection connection creating, in fact, a protected connection.
In this case, the connection created by the user is the preferential connection (preferential NBUS connec-
tion) while the connection created by the matrix is the protection connection (protection NBUS connection).
When the switch operates in automatic modality, the equipment executes the switch when specific alarms
are present on the working NBUS connection.
When the alarms clear, the controller, if the working NBUS connection is not the preferential one, executes
the switch and uses the preferential NBUS connection to work (of course if alarms are not present on the
connection).
In this condition it is possible to define a time period (Wait Time) during which the service is kept on the
not preferential NBUS connection before this returns to the preferential NBUS connection, in such a way
to avoid the continue switch between the two connections in case of fluctuating alarms.
For example, suppose an alarm occurs causing the switch from the preferential NBUS connection to the
protection one. When the alarm clears, the service is not immediately switched to the preferential NBUS
connection, but postponed of n seconds (Wait Time period), during which the controller verifies that the
alarm on the preferential NBUS connection has not occurred again. At the end of the Wait Time period, if
the alarm has not occurred again, the switch takes place. Otherwise, the switch is postponed of other n
seconds, during which the system verifies that the alarm has not occurred again and so on.
In any moment the operator can force the switch on preferential Nodal Bus without waiting for the Wait
Time period expiration (see pag.338).

USER INPUT
At the choice of User Input option, the program displays the following commands:
• Local User Input (pag.341). It manages the local user input.

• Remote User Input (pag.344). It manages the remote user input.

Local User Input

The Local User Input command manages the local user input configuration.
• To verify the local user input status (pag.341)

• To verify/modify the name of a local user input (pag.342)
• To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input (pag.342)
• To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input (pag.342)
For more information on the enabling of the user input alarms go to pag.343.
To verify the local user input status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Local User Input command.
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the status of the local user inputs is pointed out
(see Fig.116).
Fig.116 Local User Input contextual area
User input
User input name
status (1)
Rest
Status/ condition
seriousness of the user
of the alarm input (2)
created at
the activation
of the user
input (3)
Fig.116 notes
(1) The colour and the wording inside the box point out the status of the local user input:
Colour Wording Status
Green Inactive User input alarm not activated

Green Active User input status signal activated
Light blue Active User input alarm activated and with Warning severity level
Yellow Active User input alarm activated and with Minor severity level
Orange Active User input alarm activated and with Major severity level
Red Active User input alarm activated and with Critical severity level

(2) Option:
• Normally Open. The user input is considered active when its terminal is referred to ground.
• Normally Close. The user input is considered active when its terminal is open.
(3) Option:
• Disable. The alarm is disabled.
• Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
• Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
To verify/modify the name of a local user input
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the name of the local user inputs is pointed out (see
Fig.116).
2. To change the name of a user input type, into the relevant text box, an alphanumeric string with min-
imum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
To verify/modify the rest condition of a local user input
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the rest condition of the local user inputs is pointed
out (see Fig.116).
2. To change the rest condition of a user input set, into the Input Operation box, the option:
• Normally Open. The user input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is referred to ground.
• Normally Close. The user input will be considered active (creation of the alarm event) when its
terminal is open.
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a local user input
The Local User Input contextual area opens, where the status/severity of the alarms of the local user
inputs is pointed out (see Fig.116).
2. To change the status/severity of a user input set, into the Severity box, the option:
• Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the user input.
• Status, to:
• Enable the alarm created at the activation of the user input.
• Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
• Warning, to:
• Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to an alarm with
Warning level.
• Minor, to:
Minor level.

• Major, to:
Major level.
• Critical, to:
Critical level.
Enabling the user input alarms (more info)
Disabling an user input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not recorded in the equip-
ment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as the
alarm has never occurred.
On the other hand, enabling an user input alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is recorded
in the equipment controller and communicated to the management program which displays it in the current
alarms and in the alarm history.

Remote User Input

The Remote User Input command manages the remote user input configuration.
• To verify the remote user input status (pag.344)

• To change the name of a remote user input (pag.345)
• To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input (pag.345)
It is not possible to modify the rest condition of the remote user input. The rest condition is set only
locally.
For more information about the enabling of the user input alarms go to pag.343.
To verify the remote user input status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Input > Remote User Input command.
The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the status of the remote user inputs is pointed
out (see Fig.117).
Fig.117 Remote User Input contextual area
User input
User input name
status (1)
Status/
seriousness
of the alarm
created at
the activation
of the user
input (2)
Fig.117 notes
(1) The colour and the wording inside the box display the status of the remote user input:
Green Inactive User input alarm not activated
Green Active User input status signal activated
Light blue Active User input alarm activated and with Warning severity level
Yellow Active User input alarm activated and with Minor severity level
Orange Active User input alarm activated and with Major severity level
Red Active User input alarm activated and with Critical severity level

(2) Option:
• Disable. The alarm is disabled.
• Status. The alarm is enabled; its severity is equivalent to a status signalling.
• Warning, Minor, Major, Critical. The alarm is enabled; its severity is respectively of level
Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.
To change the name of a remote user input
The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the name of the remote user inputs is pointed
out (see Fig.117).
2. To change the name of a remote user input type, into the relevant text box, an alphanumeric string
with minimum 1 and maximum 31 characters.
To enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity level of a remote user input
The Remote User Input contextual area opens, where the status/severity of the alarms of the remote
user inputs is pointed out (see Fig.117).
2. To change the status/severity of a user input set, into the Severity box, the option:
• Disable, to disable the alarm created by the activation of the user input.
• Status, to:
• Couple, with the input signal to the user input, a severity equivalent to a status signal.
• Warning, to:
Warning level.
• Minor, to:
Minor level.
• Major, to:
Major level.
• Critical, to:
Critical level.

USER OUTPUT

The User Output command manages the user output configuration.

• To verify the user output status (pag.346)

• To verify/modify the user output name (pag.347)
• To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of each user output (pag.347).
• To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output (pag.347).
• To enabled the forced activation of the relays contacts from operator (pag.348).
• To force the user output activation (pag.348).
• To remove the forcing of the user output (pag.348).
To verify the user output status
1. Select the Equipment Menu > User Output command.

The User Output contextual area opens, where the status of the user outputs is pointed out (see
Fig.118).
Fig.118 User Output contextual area
User output
User output name
status (1)
Signal
coupled to
the user
output (2)
Functioning
mode of
the relay
contacts (3)
The choice of
The choice of this push-button
this push-button allows forcing the
allows changing activation of the
the configuration relay contacts
parameters of relevant to a
the selected user output
user output (if it is available)
Fig.118 notes
(1) The colour/wording inside the box display the status of the user output:
Green Inactive User output not activated
Red Active User output activated (relay contacts activated)

(2) Option:
• Forced by Op. + label of the R.H. push-button Force. The UO is enabled to force the activa-
tion by operator.
• Forced by Op. + label of the R.H. push-button Unforce. The UO is activated after the forcing
by operator.
• Unmapped. No signal is associated to UO.
• Mapped. One or more signals are associated to UO (group of alarms and/or user input).
In order to verify the detail of the signals, press Mapping.
(3) Option:
• Open. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts
are closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
• Close. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts
are open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
To verify/modify the name of an user output

The User Output contextual area opens, where the name of the user outputs is pointed out (see
Fig.118).
2. To change the parameter type, into the text box, an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maxi-
mum 31 characters.
To verify/modify the functioning mode of the relay contacts of an user out-

put

The User Output contextual area opens, where the operating modality of the relay contacts of the user
outputs is pointed out (see Fig.118).
2. To change the parameter set, into the Active State box, the option:
• Open. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
closed (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are open
• Close. With absence of signal (alarm or user input or manual forcing), the relays contacts are
open (rest condition), with presence of signal the contacts are closed.
To verify/modify the signals coupled to the user output

The User Output contextual area opens, where the signals associated to the user output (UO) are point-
ed out (see Fig.118).
2. To change the parameter set, into the Linked to box, the Map option.
3. Press Mapping.
The Mapping window opens.
4. To activate the check-box of the:

• Alarm Synthesis box, to associate the group of alarms, which a specific severity level corre-
sponds to, to the UO. Select the wished severity level or the levels:
• Alarm Synthesis Warning. Alarms, which the Warning severity corresponds to.
• Alarm Synthesis Minor. Alarms, which the Minor severity corresponds to.

• Alarm Synthesis Major. Alarms, which the Major severity corresponds to.
• Alarm Synthesis Critical. Alarms, which the Critical severity corresponds to.
• Radio Branch box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms (ODU).
Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
• Radio Branch Local Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch of
the ODU section of the local equipment.
• Radio Branch Remote Odu <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the specific radio branch
of the ODU section of the remote equipment.
Signals available only for equipment with the radio equipped (see Fig.44).
• Radio Equipment box, to associate to the UO the group of local or remote equipment alarms
(IDU). Select the group or the groups of wished alarms:
• Radio Equipment Local Lim A. Alarms relevant to LIM section of the local equipment.
• Radio Equipment Remote Lim <radio branch>. Alarms relevant to the LIM section of the
remote equipment connected with the specific radio branch.
• User Input box, to associated to the UO one or more local (User Input …) and/or remote (User
Input Remote…) user inputs. Select the wished user inputs.
The selection of a signal is indicated by the check sign inside the box and by the change of colour of
the relevant name: from black to blue. Its deactivation removes the check sign and the colour becomes
black again.
The selection/deselection of a group automatically selects/deselects all the relevant signals.
5. Press OK.
To enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator

The User Output contextual area opens (see Fig.118).
2. Into the Linked to box, set the Forced by Op. option.
To force the user output activation
The user output has to be enabled for the forcing by operator (wording Forced by Operator into the
State field - UO status box green, wording Inactive - see Fig.118). If it is not enabled, it is necessary to
enable it (see pag.348).

2. Press Force. The push-button is replaced by the Unforce push-button.
The user output will remain activated until the removal of the forcing (see pag.348).
To remove the forcing of the user output

2. Press Unforce. The push-button is replaced by the Force push-button.

The Unforce push-button is present when the forcing of the UO is active (wording Forced by Oper-
ator into the State field - UO status box red, wording Active - see Fig.118).

ALARMS LIST
Tab.9 points out the list of the alarms relevant to the ALCplus2 equipment.
The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment. In detail:
• Equipment
• User input
• Common
• Eth Lan
• LIM
• Node
• P.M. G.828
• P.M. G.829 B1
• P.M. G.829 B2-M1
• P.M. Rx Power
• P.M. Tx Power
• P.M. VC12 G.828
• P.M. ACM
• Plug-in module
• Radio
• RIM
• RT
• SETS
• SNTP
• STM-1
• Unit
• Vc4
• Vc12
For each alarm, the wording present in the Event List area of the WEB LCT page (see Fig.10) and the word-
ing present in the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual area (see Fig.38) are displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm dis-
played in the Event List area, represent a variable.
The symbol “-“means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Configuration contextual ar-
ea.

Tab.9 - Alarms list
Events List alarms Alarm Severity Configuration

Equipment
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor -
Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning -
User input
User Input - <UI number> <UI name> Alarm Status -
Common
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side AIS Alarm radioEquipE1G.704LineLimAAisAlarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Line side Fail Alarm radioEquipE1G.704LineLimAFailAlarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Radio side AIS Alarm radioEquipE1G.704RadioLimAAisAlarm
[<radio branch label>] E1-<E1 number> G.704 Radio side Fail Alarm radioEquipE1G.704RadioLimAFailAlarm
Communication EOC (E1/Stm1) Data Link Alarm radioEquipEoc(E1/Stm1)Alarm
Equip Manual Operation equipManualOperation
Fan Alarm radioEquipFanAlarm
MNGT/1 cable Fail equipMngt1CableFailAlarm
MNGT/2 cable Fail equipMngt2CableFailAlarm
RMON Alarm <alarm description> equipRmonAlarm
WAKE UP Manager IP address: <IP address> -
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Communication Radio EOC Data Link Alarm radioEquipEOCRadioLinkAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Local-Remote Terminal Setup Mismatch Alarm radioEquipLocalRemoteSetupMismatchAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rescue Setup Active Alarm radioEquipRescueSetupActiveAlarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Fail Alarm OamFmMepFailAlarm
OAM-FM MA:<MA name> MEP Id:<MEP identifier> Config. Mismatch Alarm OamFmMepConfigurationMismatchAlarm
Eth Lan
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Loss Forwarding Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLossForwarding
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Loss of Signal Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLoss
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Master-Slave Configuration fault Alarm ethLanPhyMasterSlaveConfigurationFault
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Physical Coding Sublayer Sync Alarm ethLanPhySync
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm ethLanPhyAutoNegotiation
IDU <Lan-1, Lan-2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Link Aggregation LACP protocol down ethLanPhyLagLacpProtocolDown
LIM
IDU Board LIM Temperature radioEquipLimTemperatureAlarm
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] - Rx AIS Alarm ppiRxAisAlarm
IDU Board Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] - Signal loss Alarm ppiLosAlarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Demodulator Fail Alarm radioBranchDemodulatorFailAlarm
IDU BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Modulator Fail Alarm radioBranchModulatorFailAlarm
LIM BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] ODU-IDU Communication fail Alarm radioBranchRtOduIduCommAlarm
Local [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis radioEquipLocalLimAlarmSynthesis
REMOTE LIM Radio <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Alarm Synthesis radioEquipRemoteLimAlarmSynthesis
IDU Trib.-<tributary number> - [<tributary label>] Re-Timing Alarm ppiE1SynchAlarm
Node
Node <bus number> Signal loss Alarm nodeLinkLosAlarm
Node <bus number> Loss of frame Alarm nodeLinkLofAlarm
Node <bus number> MS AIS Alarm nodeLinkMsAisAlarm
Node <bus number> Check identifier Alarm nodeLinkCheckAlarm
Ethernet Nodal Configuration Mismatch <Lan1, Lan2, Lan1&Lan2 o Nodal Config. Parameters> nodeEthConfigMismatchAlarm
P.M. G.828
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MEsAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSepAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSesAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HEsAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSepAlarm

P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSesAlarm
P.M. G.828-<measure type>(1) UAS Alarm pmG828-UASAlarm
P.M. G.829 B1
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-15MSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-24HEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-24HSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829RstB1-24HSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm pmG829RstB1-UASAlarm
P.M. G.829 B2-M1
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MEsFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSepFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 15M cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-15MSesFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt ES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HEsFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SEP-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSepFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) 24H cnt SES-FE thr. cross Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-24HSesFEAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-BIDI Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASBIDIAlarm
P.M: G829-B2&M1 <measure type>(1) UAS-FE Alarm pmG829MstB2-M1-UASFEAlarm
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlt2sAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlt3sAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts4Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts5Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm
P.M. RT-<1A, 2A> TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm
P.M. VC12 G.828
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MEsAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt ES-FE thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MEsFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSepAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SEP-FE
thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSepFEAlarm

P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSesAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 15M cnt SES-FE
thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path15MSesFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HEsAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt ES-FE thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HEsFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSepAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SEP-FE
thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSepFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES thr.
cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSesAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 24H cnt SES-FE
thr. cross Alarm pmG828Vc12Path24HSesFEAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-BIDI Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASBIDIAlarm
P.M: VC12-IDU Board STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> G.828 UAS-FE Alarm pmG828Vc12PathUASFEAlarm
P.M. ACM
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-128QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 15M counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-8PSKAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-Alarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 128QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-128QAMAlarm
P.M. ACM-<Radio 1A, Radio 2A> 24H counter 8PSK threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-8PSKAlarm
Plug-in module
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Fail Alarm plug-inModuleAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Loss of Signal Alarm plug-inLosAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Mismatch Alarm plug-inModuleMismatchAlarm
IDU Board <Stm-1 1, Stm-1 2, Lan-3, Lan-4> Plug-in module Status plug-inStatusChange
Radio
[<radio branch label>] PRBS Fail Alarm radioEquipPrbsFailAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification radioEquipReducedCapacityAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Id. Alarm radioEquipLinkIdAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Link Telemetry Fail Alarm radioEquipLinkTelemetryFailAlarm
RADIO <1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Transmitter Switch on Remote Terminal BER radioEquipTxFailCheckAlarm
RADIO SWITCH 1A [<radio branch label>] Reserve Radio Branch Selected in Revertive Mode radioEquipRevertiveAlarm
RIM
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] REMOTE RIM Alarm Synthesis radioBranchRemoteRimAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Open Alarm radioBranchCableOpenAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] IDU-ODU Cable Short Alarm radioBranchCableShortAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] LOCAL RIM Alarm Synthesis radioBranchLocalRimAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RIM Power Supply Alarm radioBranchRimPsuFailAlarm
RT
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT IDU-ODU Communication fail Alarm radioBranchIduOduCommunicationAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT If Fail Alarm radioBranchRtIfFail

BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT LOCAL ODU Alarm Synthesis radioBranchLocalOduAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT REMOTE ODU Alarm Synthesis radioBranchRemoteOduAlarmSynthesis
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Vco Fail Alarm radioBranchRtVcoFail
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Rx Power Low Alarm radioBranchRxPowerLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] RT Tx Power Alarm radioBranchTxPowerAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx If Out Alarm radioBranchRxIfOutalarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Alarm radioBranchRxQualityLowAlarm
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Quality Low Warning radioBranchRxQualityLowWarning
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Rx Active Status radioBranchRxActiveStatus
BRANCH-<1A, 2A> [<radio branch label>] Tx Active Status radioBranchTxActiveStatus
SETS
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Active Status timingSynkActiveStatus
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> Drift Alarm timingSynkDriftAlarm
IDU Sets <name of the synchronism signal> LTI Alarm timingSynkLossAlarm
IDU Sets Free Running Status timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus
IDU Sets Holdover Status timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus
BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm timingGeneratorT0FailAlarm
SNTP
SNTP servers lost Alarm sntpClientUnicastServerLost
STM-1
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Excessive Ber Alarm stm1B2ExcessiveBerAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> B2 Signal Degrade Alarm stm1B2SignalDegradeAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> J0 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm stm1J0TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Frame Alarm stm1LofAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Loss of Signal Alarm stm1LosAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Ais Alarm stm1MsAisAlarm
IDU Stm1-<1, 2> Ms Rdi Alarm stm1MsRdiAlarm
Unit
<unit name> Unit Fail Alarm unitFailAlarm
<unit name> Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm unitHwMismatchAlarm
<unit name> Unit Missing Alarm unitMissingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Not Responding Alarm unitNotRespondingAlarm
<unit name> Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm unitSwMismatchAlarm
Vc4
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 AU-4 AIS Alarm vc4Au4AisAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 AU-4 Loss of Pointer Alarm vc4Au4LossPointerAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 B3 Excessive Ber Alarm vc4B3ExcessiveBerAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 B3 Signal Degrade Alarm vc4B3SignalDegradeAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 J1 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm vc4J1TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 RDI Alarm vc4HpRdiAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm vc4SignalLabelMismatchAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC4 Unequipped Alarm vc4UnequippedAlarm
IDU-Stm1-<1, 2> VC-4 Loss Of Multiframe Alarm vc4LossOfMultiframeAlarm
Vc12
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Excessive BER Alarm vc12ExcessiveBerAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 RDI Alarm vc12RdiAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Degrade Alarm vc12SignalDegradeAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Signal Label Mismatch Alarm vc12SignalLabelMismatchAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Trace Identifier Mismatch Alarm vc12TraceIdentifierMismatchAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU LOP Alarm vc12TuLopAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 TU Path AIS Alarm vc12TuPathAisAlarm
STM-1 <1, 2> - VC-12 - <TUG3-TUG2-TU12> Vc12 Unequipped Alarm vc12UnequippedAlarm
(1)
Refer to pag.62

OPERATIONS LIST
A
ACL
Add/remove a rule from the IP Access Control List .................................................................. 48
Enable/disable the use of the IP Access Control List ................................................................ 48
Verify the rules used by the IP Access Control List .................................................................. 47
Activate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ...............................................149
Activation status of the autonegotiation between the roles of the line synchronism, verify/modify .....206
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................164
Alarm/status signals, save to file ..............................................................................................106
Alarms status of a VC-12, verify ...............................................................................................266
ATPC
Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................285
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................287
Auto negotiation for the external port, restart the procedure ........................................................205
B
Behaviour of the external port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ...................................208
Behaviour of the internal port towards the packets in output, verify/modify ....................................231
Belonging of the equipment to a node, verify/modify ...................................................................159
Branches functional status, verify .............................................................................................. 28
C
Calculation of the link margin (Fade Margin), execute ..................................................................317
Characteristics of the equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify .................132
Communication ports, verify/modify .......................................................................................... 41
Communication stack
Modify .............................................................................................................................127
Verify ..............................................................................................................................127
Connection cost of the external port (STP/ELP), verify/modify ......................................................214
Connection cost of the internal port (STP), verify/modify .............................................................236
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the external port, verify/modify .....................208
Control of Tag Vlan Id on the messages in input from the internal port, verify/modify ......................231
Control status of the J0 Trace Identifier byte (STM-1), verify/modify .............................................250
Control status of the J1 Trace Identifier byte (VC-4), verify/modify ...............................................257
Control status of the J2 Trace Identifier byte (VC-12), verify/modify .............................................264
Current status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify ..............................................................220
Current status of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify ...............................................................252
D
Deactivate the collection of the statistic counters for an Ethernet port ...........................................149
Default Vid value of the external port, verify/modify ...................................................................207
Default Vid value of the internal port, verify/modify ....................................................................229
Delete one or more connections ...............................................................................................275
Disable an Auto-Loop ..............................................................................................................276
Display the connections of the equipment in graphic format .........................................................267
Display the enabling/disabling status of the collection of the statistic counters of the equipment Ethernet

ports ....................................................................................................................................148
Display the values of statistical counters of an Ethernet port ........................................................149
E
E1 tributary
Activate/deactivate the loop ................................................................................................246
Activate/deactivate the use .................................................................................................245
Verify the status ................................................................................................................244
Verify/modify the label .......................................................................................................245
ELP for the external port, enable/disable ...................................................................................216
Emptying algorithm of the packets present in the output queue, verify/modify ...............................193
Enable manually the laser transmission (Lan3, Lan4 - optical) ......................................................222
Enable manually the laser transmission (STM-1 - optical int.) .......................................................254
Enable the closing of a channel on itself (Auto-Loop) ...................................................................275
Enable the new functionalities ..................................................................................................147
Enabling of Spanning Tree at level of ALCplus2 node, verify/modify ..............................................160
Enabling of the alarms
Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................137
Verify ..............................................................................................................................136
Enabling of the switch in transmission, verify/modify ..................................................................173
Enabling status of the auto negotiation and, if the auto negotiation is inactive, the operation modality and
the transmission speed used by the external port, verify/modify ...................................................204
Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses in the MAC Address Table for the external
port, verify/modify .................................................................................................................205
Enabling status of the automatic learning of the MAC Addresses in the MAC Address Table for the internal
port, verify/modify .................................................................................................................229
Enabling status of the external port, verify/modify ......................................................................201
Enabling status of the flow control of the external port, verify/modify ............................................204
Enabling status of the internal port, verify/modify .......................................................................228
Enabling status of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify/modify ..................................................221
Enabling status of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify/modify ...................................................253
Enabling status of the LLF modality of the external port, verify/modify ..........................................218
Equipment configuration
Save to file .......................................................................................................................106
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 28
Equipment connection status, verify ........................................................................................... 28
Equipment firmware
Switch the functioning of the memory benches ......................................................................125
Update .............................................................................................................................124
Verify the version ..............................................................................................................123
Equipment functional status, verify ............................................................................................ 28
Equipment identifier
Modify .............................................................................................................................. 39
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 28
Equipment login/monitor status, verify ....................................................................................... 28
Equipment properties (type, MIB version, identifier, addresses, reference date/time), verify .............. 38
Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 40
Equipment software reset .............................................................................................39, 47, 128
Equipment type, verify ............................................................................................................. 28
Eth Type value in the S_Tag QinQ field, verify/modify .................................................................193
Ethernet Line Protection
Verify the status of the external ports ..................................................................................241
Execute a Tributary-Radio connection .......................................................................................274
Execute a Tributary-Tributary connection ...................................................................................274
Execute an E1 NBUS E1 connection (AlPlus/3 Element/Protected) ................................................277
Execute the login of the user .................................................................................................... 30
Execute the logout of the user .................................................................................................. 31
Execute the test "laser functioning status" (Lan3, Lan4 - optical) ..................................................223

Execute the test "laser functioning status" (STM-1 - optical int.) ...................................................255
Execute the test (RF Loop) for the ALCplus2 equipment with ODU ASN ..........................................325
F
Fade Margin results, delete ......................................................................................................317
Fade Margin results, verify ......................................................................................................317
Forwarding of the trap of the alarm
Enable/disable ..................................................................................................................137
Verify ..............................................................................................................................136
Functionalities enabled for the equipment, verify ........................................................................146
H
Hysteresis of the LLF modality, verify/modify .............................................................................194
I
Identifier of the equipment in the ALCplus2 node, verify/modify ...................................................160
Identifier of the equipment in the ALplus node, verify/modify .......................................................161
Input synchronism sources
Enable/disable the use .......................................................................................................178
Force the use ....................................................................................................................180
Set a source as preferential ................................................................................................180
Set the E1 tributary used as synchronism source for T2/T3 2 ..................................................181
Set the source type used as synchronism for STM-1/NODAL A (T0) or STM-1/NODAL B (T0) ........181
Verify the alarms status .....................................................................................................181
Verify/modify the use priority ..............................................................................................180
Interface type of the external port (Lan3, Lan 4), verify/modify ....................................................206
Intervention threshold of the B2 Excessive BER alarm (STM-1), verify/modify ................................252
Intervention threshold of the B2 Signal Degrade alarm (STM-1), verify/modify ...............................251
Intervention threshold of the B3 Excessive BER alarm (VC-4), verify/modify ..................................259
Intervention threshold of the B3 Signal Degrade alarm (VC-4), verify/modify .................................258
Intervention threshold of the VC12 Excessive BER alarm (VC-12), verify/modify .............................263
Intervention threshold of the VC12 Signal Degrade alarm (VC-12), verify/modify ............................262
Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of the external port, verify/modify ......................................203
IP address of remote users, set ................................................................................................144
IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment, modify ............................................................... 39
L
Lan Statistics
Reset the counters’ results ......................................................................................... 292, 294
Verify the counters ............................................................................................................290
Verify the summary of the main counters of the Ethernet ports ................................................293
Link identification number, verify/modify ...................................................................................168
Local user input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................342
Name, verify/modify ..........................................................................................................342
Rest condition, verify/modify ..............................................................................................342
Status, verify ....................................................................................................................341
Logout of a user, force ............................................................................................................140
Loop on line side of the external port, activate/deactivate ............................................................219
Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ......................................................................168

M
MAC Address Table
Reset the table ..................................................................................................................193
Verify/modify the aging time of the MAC addresses stored in the table .....................................191
Management of STM-1 streams, verify/modify ............................................................................159
Management of synchronisation, verify/modify ...........................................................................158
Manual Operations Timeout, verify/modify .................................................................................135
Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (external port), verify/modify .........................211
Mapping of the priority (802.1p) inside the Tag VLan (internal port), verify/modify .........................234
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ....................................................287
Maximum size of the accepted packet, verify/modify ...................................................................193
Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................284
N
Network password and timeout, modify .....................................................................................143
Nodal switch
Force the switch on the preferential NBUS connection without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ....
338
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................338
Modify the Wait Time parameter ..........................................................................................338
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................337
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................337
Number of E1 streams assigned to an ACM profile (low priority streams), verify/modify ...................168
Number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with Ethernet nodal Bus, verify/modify .....159
Number of elements of the ALCplus2 node interconnected with TDM nodal Bus, verify/modify ...........161
Number of equipment of the ALplus node, verify/modify ..............................................................162
Number of high priority E1 streams, verify/modify ......................................................................168
O
OAM
VLAN, verify the status as regards the OAM Ethernet functionality ............................................305
OAM-FM
Associate a MA to a VLAN ...................................................................................................308
Associate a MEP to a VLAN ..................................................................................................308
Characteristics of the OAM-FM Domain of an equipment, verify ................................................304
Disable a remote MEP of the RMep table ...............................................................................312
Enable a remote MEP of the RMep table ................................................................................312
Enable/disable the CCM messages for a MEP .........................................................................310
Insert a remote MEP in RMep table ......................................................................................311
OAM-FM Domain of an equipment, define .............................................................................304
OAM-FM Domain of an equipment, remove ...........................................................................304
Remove a MA/MEP from a VLAN ..........................................................................................309
Remove a remote MEP from RMep table ...............................................................................312
Send one or more Loop Back messages (LBM) to a remote MIP/MEP ........................................313
Trace the path, through the LTM messages, between local MEP and remote MEP of the same VLAN ...
314
Verify the table of the remote MEPs (RMep table) ..................................................................310
Operating modality of the line synchronism (role), verify/modify ..................................................205
Operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................167
Verify ..............................................................................................................................164
Operation of the RT power supply, verify/modify ........................................................................284
Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................284
Operations executed by the users, save to file ............................................................................106
Operations list stored into the equipment controller, delete ..........................................................109
Output queue of a packet according to its Tag 802.1p, verify/assign .............................................194

P
Password and timeout of the NMS5UX user (CEM password), change .............................................144
Password and timeout of the System user, modify ......................................................................143
PM
Activate a measure ........................................................................................................ 68, 72
Activate all measures in a group ........................................................................................... 68
Change the type of the displayed counters (ACM Radio A) ........................................................ 95
Change the type of the displayed parameters (G828..., G829...) ............................................... 72
Change the type of the displayed parameters (RxPwr Radio) ...................................................101
Change the type of the displayed parameters (TxPwr Radio) ...................................................104
Deactivate a measure .................................................................................................... 68, 72
Deactivate all measures in a group ....................................................................................... 69
Display the results of the measurements ............................................................................... 69
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio A) ............................................. 98
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms ................................................................................... 72
Reset the values of the records (daily and primary) ................................................................. 72
Set the 2Mbit/s tributary used for the measure ....................................................................... 86
Set the thresholds (ACM Radio A) ......................................................................................... 95
Set the thresholds (G828 E1...) ............................................................................................ 85
Set the thresholds (G828 Radio) ........................................................................................... 81
Set the thresholds (G828 STM-1 Vc12) .................................................................................. 91
Set the thresholds (G829 MstB2M1 STM-1) ............................................................................ 77
Set the thresholds (G829 RstB1 STM-1) ................................................................................ 73
Set the thresholds (RxPwr Radio) ........................................................................................101
Set the thresholds (TxPwr Radio) .........................................................................................104
Verify the status of the measurements .................................................................................. 67
Ports through which the messages in input from the external port, enable/disable ..........................209
Ports through which the messages in input from the internal port, enable/disable ...........................232
Power profile of the RF transmitter, verify/modify .......................................................................167
PRBS
Activate/reset the measure .................................................................................................322
Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................322
Measure status, verify ........................................................................................................321
Pattern type used for the measure, verify/modify ..................................................................322
Used E1 signal for the measure, enable/disable .....................................................................322
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the external port to the output queue, verify/
modify ..................................................................................................................................210
Priority criterion used to associate the packets in input from the internal port to the output queue, verify/
modify ..................................................................................................................................233
Priority of the dynamic E1 stream (Extra TDM Cap.), verify/modify ...............................................169
Priority of the external port (STP/ELP), verify/modify ..................................................................213
Priority of the internal port (STP), verify/modify .........................................................................236
Protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALCplus2 node, verify/modify ............................................161
Protection of the nodal Bus TDM in the ALplus node, verify/modify ................................................162
Q
Queue to which the packet must be assigned to depending on its PTOS/DSCP field (level 3),
verify/modify .........................................................................................................................195
R
Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................174
Radio configuration, verify/modify ............................................................................................155
Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................325
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................325
Radio parameters, verify .......................................................................................................... 28
Radio switch
Force the switch on the preferential branch without waiting for the Wait Time expiration .............330

Modify the management of the switching in reception .............................................................329
Modify the management of the switching in transmission ........................................................329
Modify the preferential branch for the service at transmission ..................................................330
Verify the configuration parameters of the switches ...............................................................328
Verify the switches status ...................................................................................................328
Reference band/modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................167
Verify ..............................................................................................................................164
Remote element list
Remove an equipment ........................................................................................................ 60
Remote equipment list
Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 58
Add an equipment .............................................................................................................. 59
Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 59
Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 58
Reset ................................................................................................................................ 60
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 57
Remote user input
Enable/disable the alarm and to define the severity ...............................................................345
Status, verify ....................................................................................................................344
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................285
Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................285
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .......................................................................... 127, 128
Restore Factory Default of the Ethernet Switch ...........................................................................193
Re-timing the E1s set for the contemporary transport of traffic and synchronisation ........................183
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last operation of con-
figuration restore (configuration revert) ....................................................................................131
RF channel, verify/modify ........................................................................................................282
Running Default Gateway
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 52
Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 52
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 50
Running Routing Table
Add an element .................................................................................................................. 51
Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 51
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 50
S
S/N measure, verify ...............................................................................................................316
Save the equipment configuration, the alarm/status signals and the operations executed by the users to
file .......................................................................................................................................106
Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ...................................................130
SD memory card
Automatic equipment restart from SD memory in case of replacement of IDU unit .....................117
Automatic update of the equipment sw from SD memory ........................................................118
Copy the equipment sw from SD memory to controller (Sw Dwl SD) .........................................120
Delete the configuration data and/or the equipment sw from SD memory .................................119
Disable the automatic equipment restart from SD memory (data + sw) ....................................120
Disable the deletion of the equipment sw present in the standby memory bench after an automatic sw
update from SD memory ....................................................................................................120
Force the restore, from SD memory to controller, of the configuration data and of the equipment sw .
120
Status and configuration, verify ................................................................................... 115, 119
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J0 Trace Identifier (STM-1), verify/modify ....250
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J1 Trace Identifier (VC-4), verify/modify ......258
Sequence of characters transmitted and/or received as J2 Trace Identifier (VC-12), verify/modify .....265
Severity level of the alarm
Modify .............................................................................................................................138
Verify ..............................................................................................................................136
Signal Label value (VC-12), verify ............................................................................................265

Signal Label value (VC-4), verify/modify ....................................................................................260
Signals (Events List)
Filter the list ...................................................................................................................... 36
Verify the current filters ...................................................................................................... 36
Signals stored into the equipment controller, delete ....................................................................109
SNTP functionality
Activate ...........................................................................................................................111
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................111
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................111
Spanning Tree Protocol
Verify the MAC Address of a bridge ......................................................................................241
Verify the status of the ethernet ports ..................................................................................239
Verify/modify the Forward Delay interval ..............................................................................239
Verify/modify the maximum lifetime of the BPDU packets .......................................................239
Verify/modify the priority of a bridge ....................................................................................241
Verify/modify the transmission interval of the BPDU packets ...................................................239
Verify/modify the version ...................................................................................................238
Start-up of the WEB LCT application
From browser .................................................................................................................... 19
From SCT/LMT ................................................................................................................... 25
Status of the external port in relation to the ELP, verify ...............................................................214
Status of the external port in relation to the STP, verify ...............................................................211
Status of the external port in relation to the Trunking mode, verify ...............................................216
Status of the internal port in relation to the STP, verify ...............................................................234
Status of the internal port in relation to the Trunking mode, verify ................................................237
Status of the local/remote synchronization protocol, verify/modify ................................................173
Status of the STM-1 alarms, verify ............................................................................................251
Status of the STM-1 loops (line/inner side), verify/modify ............................................................250
Status of the STM-1 stream, verify/modify .................................................................................248
Status of the VC-4 alarms, verify ..............................................................................................258
STM-1 switch
Force the switch on preferential STM-1 stream without waiting for the Wait Time expiration ........335
Modify the switch management ...........................................................................................334
Set the primary STM-1 stream as preferential .......................................................................335
Switch logic (modify) .........................................................................................................335
Verify the configuration parameters .....................................................................................333
Verify the switch status ......................................................................................................333
Stored Default Gateway
Delete ............................................................................................................................... 56
Set/modify ........................................................................................................................ 56
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 54
Stored Routing Table
Add an element .................................................................................................................. 55
Remove one or more elements ............................................................................................. 56
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 54
STP for the external port, enable/disable ...................................................................................213
STP for the internal port, enable/disable ....................................................................................236
T
T and N parameters, verify/modify ...........................................................................................174
T0 synchronisation
Force the status ................................................................................................................182
Verify the alarms status .....................................................................................................182
T12 synchronisation
Manage the output of synchronism (T12) on tributary A/B and define the interface (output/input) of
tributary A/B ....................................................................................................................182
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile,
display ..................................................................................................................................287
Table summarizing the radio transport, display ...........................................................................166

Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ..............................................................172
Timeout used for the update of all the information present in the WEB LCT page, verify/modify ......... 30
To display the connections of the equipment in table format .........................................................273
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ...............................130
Transit of the packets of the ports of the local Ethernet switch to/from the ports of the Ethernet switch of
the other elements of the ALCplus2 node, verify/modify ..............................................................162
Transmission mode of the laser (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify/modify ............................................222
Transmission mode of the laser (STM-1 - optical int.), verify/modify .............................................254
Transmitter Switch on Remote... alarm, reset ............................................................................174
Trunking for the external port, enable/disable ............................................................................218
Trunking for the internal port, enable/disable .............................................................................237
Type of laser module (Lan3, Lan4 - optical), verify ......................................................................221
Type of laser module (STM-1 - optical int.), verify ......................................................................253
U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify .......................................................................168
User list
Add a user ........................................................................................................................142
Delete a user ....................................................................................................................143
Modify a user ....................................................................................................................142
Verify ..............................................................................................................................141
User output
Enable the forced activation of the relays contact from operator ..............................................348
Force the activation ...........................................................................................................348
Functioning mode of the relay contacts, verify/modify ............................................................347
Remove the forcing ...........................................................................................................348
Signal coupled, verify/modify ..............................................................................................347
Status, verify ....................................................................................................................346
User profile, verify ................................................................................................................... 28
Users connected to the equipment, verify ..................................................................................139
V
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the external port which, in output, the Tag
is added to, verify/modify ........................................................................................................211
Value to insert in the field 802.1p of the packets in input from the internal port which, in output, the Tag
is added to, verify/modify ........................................................................................................234
Values of the Ptx parameters stored in the equipment controller and used for the calculation of the Fade
Margin, verify ........................................................................................................................319
Verify/modify the connection label ............................................................................................276
Vid of the external port to the default value, force ......................................................................209
Vid of the internal port to the default value, force .......................................................................232
VLan
Create a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................197
Delete a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................199
Modify a virtual Lan ...........................................................................................................198
Verify the existing virtual LANs ............................................................................................196
W
Wake Up functionality
Activate ...........................................................................................................................112
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................113
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................112
WEB LCT
Update .............................................................................................................................126
Verify the version ........................................................................................................ 30, 125

PARAMETERS LIST
Numerics Collisions .................................................291

CRC Align Errors ............................... 291, 294
2Mb/s EOC, communication port .................. 45 CRC Err ...................................................294
802.1p Priority Management ......................194 Curr. Profile .............................................. 28
Current Ptx Set ........................................318
Current Step ............................................318
A
Current user profile ................................... 28
ACM Engine .............................................167
ACM Radio A (PM) ..................................... 93 D
Active Manual Operation ............................134
Agent IP Address ....................................... 39 Default Gateway ....................................... 53
Alarm ...................................................... 36 Default Priority ................................. 211, 234
Alarm Threshold .......................................174 Default Vid ...................................... 207, 230
ATPC Delay ......................................................196
ATPC Regulation ..................................286 Direction .................................................335
ATPC Threshold on local Prx ..................287
Max Ptx value .....................................287 Drop Frm ................................................294
Tx Power Control .................................285 Dropped Frames ............................... 291, 294
ATPC Threshold on local Prx .......................287 DSCP ......................................................196
Automatic Shutdown .................................222
Automatic Shutdown (STM-1 - optical int.) ..254 E
Available Remote Element List .................... 24
Conn. Status ........................................ 24
E1 Retiming .............................................183
Equipment ID ...................................... 24
IP Address ........................................... 24 E1 Signal ................................................322
Radio Direction .................................... 24 Egress Priority Policy .................................193
Station ................................................ 24 Elapsed Time ...........................................321
ELP
LAN-1 ................................................242
B LAN-2 ................................................242
LAN-3 ................................................242
B2 Excessive BER Threshold (STM-1) ..........252 LAN-4 ................................................242
B2 Signal Degrade Threshold (STM-1) .........251 Role ...................................................242
B3 Excessive BER Threshold (VC-4) ............259 Status ................................................242
Version ..............................................242
B3 Signal Degrade Threshold (VC-4) ...........258
Equipment Bench Status ...........................123
Bandwidth & Modulation ............................167
Equipment configuration ............................. 28
BER ........................................................321
Equipment connection status ...................... 28
Branches functional status .......................... 28
Equipment Date/Time ................................ 38
Broadcast Frames Received .......................291
Equipment functional status ........................ 28
Byte Rx ...................................................294
Equipment ID ........................................... 38
Bytes Sent ...................................... 291, 294
Equipment identifier .................................. 28
Bytes Tx .................................................294
Equipment login/monitor status ................... 28
Equipment radio parameters ....................... 28
C Equipment Software Restart ....................... 38
Equipment Software Version ......................123
Cable crossover .......................................203
Equipment Type ................................... 28, 38
Carrier Only .............................................284
Errors .....................................................321
CEM Password .........................................144
Ethernet IP Address ................................... 39
Check Period ...........................................174

Ethernet Switch H
802.1p Priority Management .................194
Egress Priority Policy ............................193
Hello Time ...............................................239
LLF Hysteresis .....................................194
MAC Addr. Aging Time .........................191 Help Web Server ....................................... 11
Max Packet Size ..................................193 HW Version (equipment hardware) .............132
QinQ ETH Type ....................................193
Ethernet, communication port ..................... 42
Ethernet/OSI Address Relation I
Gosip .................................................. 39
IP Address ........................................... 39 ID ........................................................... 28
Excessive BER Threshold (VC-12) ...............263 In Pause Frames ......................................292
Expected Trace ................................ 249, 258 Ingress Filtering Check ...................... 208, 231
Expected Type (equipment hardware) .........132 Interface Type .........................................206
External Atten. .........................................318 Internal Source ........................................177
Extra TDM Cap .........................................168 IP ...........................................................127
IP Over OSI, communication port ................ 45
IP v4 DSCP ..............................................196
F
IP v6 DSCP ..............................................196
Factory Default ................................ 127, 128
Fade Margin ............................................318 J
Current Ptx Set ...................................318
Current Step .......................................318
J0 Trace Identifier (STM-1)
External Atten. ....................................318
Fade Margin ........................................318 Expected Trace ...................................249
Received Trace ....................................249
Local IP ..............................................318
Sent Trace ..........................................249
Real Fade Margin .................................318
Real Fade Margin Ver. ..........................318 Trace Type .........................................250
Remote IP ..........................................318 J1 Trace Identifier (VC-4) ..........................257
Expected Trace ...................................258
Fail Alarms ..............................................321
Received Path Trace .............................258
Flow Control Full Dplx/ Sent Trace ..........................................258
Back Pressure Half Dplx ............................204
J2 Trace Identifier (VC-12) ........................264
Force Default VID ............................. 209, 232 Expected Trace ...................................265
Force Version ...........................................238 Received Path Trace .............................265
Forced Switch ..........................................338 Sent Trace ..........................................265
Forward Delay .........................................239 Jabbers ...................................................291
Fragments ...............................................291
Frame Egress Mode .......................... 209, 231 L
Frames 1024 to max pck size .....................291
Frames 128 to 255 Oct. ............................291 LAN 1 ............................................. 200, 242
Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ............................291 LAN 1,2 - 3,4 (electrical int.)
Cable crossover ...................................203
Frames 64 Oct. ........................................291
M/S Autoneg. ......................................206
Frames 65 to 127 Oct ...............................291 Master/Slave ......................................205
Frames Sent .................................... 292, 294 LAN 1,2,3,4
Frm Rx ...................................................294 802.1Q
Frm Tx ....................................................294 Default Vid ....................................207
Force Default VID ...........................209
FTP, protocol ............................................ 11 Frame Egress Mode .........................209
Ingress Filtering Check ....................208
Port Based VLAN ............................209
G ELP
Role ..............................................215
G828 E1 Line Side (PM) ............................. 83 SPT/ELP ........................................216
G828 E1 Radio Side (PM) ........................... 87 Status ...........................................215
Version .........................................215
G828 Radio (PM) ....................................... 79
Flow Control Full Dplx/
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 (PM) ........................ 75 Back Pressure Half Dplx ........................204
G829 RstB1 STM-1 .................................... 70 Line Loop ...........................................219
LLF ....................................................218
MAC Learning ......................................205

Priority LAN-3 .....................................................240
Default Priority ...............................211 LAN-4 .....................................................240
Priority ..........................................210
Rate Control .......................................201 Laser Control (STM-1 - optical int.) .............252
Speed/Duplex .....................................204 Late Collisions ..........................................291
STP LCT PPP, communication port ...................... 43
Role ..............................................212
Level ......................................................304
SPT/ELP ........................................213
Status ...........................................212 Link identification number .........................168
Version .........................................212 LLF .........................................................218
STP/ELP
LLF Hysteresis ..........................................194
Path Cost ......................................214
Priority ..........................................213 Local IP ...................................................318
Trunk Local Link ID ............................................168
Partner Id ......................................217 Lower Modulation .....................................168
Rx Pck Cnt .....................................217
Status ...........................................217
Trunk ............................................218 M
Tx Pck Cnt .....................................217
LAN 2 ............................................. 200, 242 M/S Autoneg. ...........................................206
LAN 3 ............................................. 200, 242
MAC Addr. Aging Time ..............................191
LAN 3,4
MAC Address ..................................... 39, 241
Interface Type ....................................206
MAC Learning .................................. 205, 229
LAN 3,4 (optical)
Laser Control Manual Operation .....................................180
Automatic Shutdown .......................222 Manual Operation Timeout .........................134
Module Type ..................................221 Manual Switch .........................................180
Transmitter Control .........................221
Master/Slave ...........................................205
LAN 4 ............................................. 200, 242
Max Age ..................................................239
Lan Stat.Summary
Max Packet Size .......................................193
Byte Rx ..............................................294
Bytes Tx ............................................294 Max Ptx value ..........................................287
CRC Err ..............................................294 Module Type ............................................221
Drop Frm ...........................................294
Module Type (STM-1 - optical int.) ..............253
Frm Rx ...............................................294
Frm Tx ...............................................294 MSP Protection .........................................334
Lan Statistics Multicast Frames Received .........................291
Broadcast Frames Received ..................291
Bytes Sent .........................................291
Collisions ............................................291 N
CRC Align Errors ..................................291
Dropped Frames ..................................291 Nbr of Eth. Elements .................................159
Fragments ..........................................291
Nbr of TDM Elements ................................161
Frames 1024 to max pck size ................291
Frames 128 to 255 Oct .........................291 Network Password ....................................143
Frames 256 to 511 Oct. ........................291 NODAL 1 (T0) ..........................................177
Frames 512 to 1023 Oct .......................291 NODAL 2 (T0) ..........................................177
Frames 64 Oct. ...................................291
Frames 65 to 127 Oct. .........................291 Nodal ID .................................................161
Frames Sent .......................................292 Nodal Port Based VLan ..............................162
In Pause Frames .................................292 Nodal Protection .......................................162
Jabbers ..............................................291
Nodal switch
Late Collisions .....................................291
Forced Switch .....................................338
Multicast Frames Received ....................291
Wtr Clear ...........................................338
Out Broadcast Frames ..........................292
Wtr Time ............................................338
Out Multicast Frames ...........................292
Out Pause Frames ...............................292 Nodal Type ..............................................162
Out Unicast Frames .............................292 Node Element ID ......................................160
Oversize Frames .................................291
Node Type ...............................................159
Total Bytes Received ............................291
Total Frames Received .........................291
Undersize Frame .................................291
Valid Bytes Received ............................291
O
Valid Frames Received .........................291
OAM
LAN-1 .....................................................240
Domain ..............................................304
LAN-2 .....................................................240

Level .................................................304 Port Based VLAN .............................. 209, 232
OAM-FM ..................................................296 Port Configuration
Continuity Check Message - CCM ...........300 2Mb/s EOC
Domain ..............................................296 EOC ............................................... 45
Link Trace Message - LTM .....................302 IP Address ...................................... 45
Loop Back Message - LBM .....................301 IP NetMask ..................................... 45
Maintenance Association - MA ...............297 IP Unnumbered ............................... 45
Maintenance End Point - MEP ................297 PPP Mode ....................................... 45
Maintenance Intermediate Point - MIP ....298 Signal input .................................... 45
Remote MEP (RMep) ............................299 Ethernet
RMep table .........................................299 In band management ....................... 43
OSI ........................................................127 IP Address ...................................... 42
IP NetMask ..................................... 42
Out Broadcast Frames ...............................292
MNGT/x Alarm Sev .......................... 43
Out Multicast Frames ................................292 MNGT/x Enable ............................... 43
Out Pause Frames ....................................292 IP Over OSI
EOC ............................................... 46
Out Unicast Frames ..................................292
EOC 2Mbit Side ............................... 46
Oversize Frames ......................................291 EOC Radio Side 1A ........................... 46
Gosip Address ................................. 46
IP Address ...................................... 45
P IP NetMask ..................................... 46
Routing .......................................... 46
Par Part Num (equipment hardware) ...........132 Signal input .................................... 46
LCT PPP
Part Number (equipment hardware) ............132
IP PPP Address ................................ 43
Partner Id ...............................................217 IP PPP NetMask ............................... 43
Path Cost ........................................ 214, 236 IP Unnumbered ............................... 44
PC Date/Time ........................................... 38 PC IP Address ................................. 44
Radio 1A
Performances ........................................... 67 IP Address ...................................... 44
Permanent Login ......................................144 IP NetMask ..................................... 44
Permanent TDM Traffic ..............................168 IP Unnumbered ............................... 44
PPP Mode ....................................... 44
PM
ACM Radio A ........................................ 93 PPP, protocol ............................................ 11
G828 E1 Line Side ................................ 83 PRBS
G828 E1 Radio Side .............................. 87 BER ...................................................321
G828 Radio ......................................... 79 E1 Signal ............................................322
G828 STM-1 - Vc12 .............................. 89 Elapsed Time ......................................321
G828 STM-1 - Vc12 (PM) ....................... 89 Errors ................................................321
G829 MstB2M1 STM-1 ........................... 75 Fail Alarms .........................................321
G829 RstB1 STM-1 ............................... 70 Start/Stop ..........................................321
RxPwr Radio ........................................ 99 Sync Loss Alarm ..................................321
TxPwr Radio .......................................102 Test Pattern ........................................322
Port ........................................................228 Precedence ..............................................196
Port A ............................................. 228, 240 Priority .......................210, 213, 233, 236, 241
802.1Q Protection Mode .......................................335
Default Vid ....................................230
Force Default VID ...........................232 Prx resolution ..........................................285
Frame Egress Mode ........................231 PTOS/DSCP
Ingress Filtering Check ....................231 Delay .................................................196
Port Based VLAN ............................232 DSCP .................................................196
MAC Learning .....................................229 IP v4 DSCP .........................................196
Port ...................................................228 IP v6 DSCP .........................................196
Priority Precedence .........................................196
Default Priority ...............................234 Queue Pri ...........................................196
Priority ..........................................233 Reliab ................................................196
STP Throug ...............................................196
Path Cost ......................................236 Value .................................................196
Priority ..........................................236 Ptx resolution ..........................................285
Role ..............................................235
Status ...........................................235
STP ..............................................236 Q
Version .........................................235
Trunking
QinQ ETH Type ........................................193
Trunk ............................................237
Queue Pri ................................................196

R SNTP
Main Server IP Address ........................111
Polling Interval ....................................111
RADIO (T0) .............................................177
Polling Retries .....................................111
Radio 1A, communication port .................... 44 Polling Timeout ...................................111
Radio A ...................................................156 Reserve Server IP Address ....................111
Radio Branch Label ...................................174 Source ....................................................181
Radio switch Source E1 ...............................................181
Reset .................................................330 Speed/Duplex ..........................................204
Rx Forced Switch .................................329
Start/Stop ...............................................321
Tx Forced Switch .................................329
Tx Preferential ....................................330 Status .................212, 215, 217, 235, 240, 242
Wait Time ...........................................330 Status Control ..........................................182
Rate Control ............................................201 Status signal ............................................. 36
Real Fade Margin ......................................318 STM-1 (T0) ..............................................177
Real Fade Margin Ver. ...............................318 STM-1 1 (T0) ...........................................177
Real Type (equipment hardware) ................132 STM-1 2 (T0) ...........................................177
Received Path Trace .................................258 STM-1 MST Mode .....................................159
Received Trace ........................................249 STM-1 switch
Reliab .....................................................196 Direction ............................................335
MSP Protection ....................................334
Remote Element Table ............................... 60 Protection Mode ..................................335
Remote equipment list ............................... 60 Switch Status ......................................333
Remote IP ...............................................318 Wtr Clear ...........................................335
Wtr Time (Min) ....................................335
RF channel ..............................................282
STM-1/NODAL A (T0) ................................177
Role .......................... 212, 215, 235, 240, 242
STM-1/NODAL B (T0) ................................177
Routing Table ........................................... 52
Stored Default Gateway ............................. 54
Routing Table (Running) ............................. 53
Stored Routing Table ................................. 54
Routing Table (Stored) ............................... 53
STP ........................................................236
RT PSU ...................................................284
Force Version ......................................238
Running Default Gateway ........................... 50 Forward Delay .....................................239
Running Routing Table ............................... 50 Hello Time ..........................................239
LAN-1 ................................................240
Rx Forced Switch ......................................329
LAN-2 ................................................240
Rx Pck Cnt ..............................................217 LAN-3 ................................................240
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................172 LAN-4 ................................................240
RxPwr Radio (PM) ...................................... 99 MAC Address ......................................241
Max Age .............................................239
Port A ................................................240
S Priority ...............................................241
Role ...................................................240
Status ................................................240
S/N ........................................................316 Version ..............................................240
SCT/LMT .................................................. 11 STP Mode ................................................160
SD memory card STP/ELP .......................................... 213, 216
Automatic data restore from SD ............116
Automatic SW download from SD ..........116 Switch Status ..........................................333
EC serial number .................................116 Sync Enable .............................................158
EC system version ...............................116 Sync Loss Alarm .......................................321
Not running Sw delete ..........................116
Synchronisation
Status ................................................116
E1 Retiming ........................................183
SW system version ..............................116
Internal Source ...................................177
Type ..................................................116
Manual Operation ................................180
Sent Trace ...................................... 249, 258 Manual Switch .....................................180
Serial Number (equipment hardware) .........132 NODAL 1 (T0) .....................................177
Signal Degrade Threshold (VC-12) ..............262 NODAL 2 (T0) .....................................177
RADIO (T0) ........................................177
Signal Label (VC-12) .................................265 Source ...............................................181
Signal Label (VC-4) ..................................260 Source E1 ...........................................181
Expected Label ....................................259 Status Control .....................................182
Received Signal Label ..........................259 STM-1 (T0) .........................................177
Sent Label ..........................................259 STM-1 1 (T0) ......................................177

STM-1 2 (T0) ......................................177 Read Only ..........................................141
STM-1/NODAL A (T0) ...........................177 Station Operator .................................142
STM-1/NODAL B (T0) ...........................177 System ..............................................145
T0 .....................................................177 User Force Logout ....................................140
T2/T3 1 ..............................................177
User list ..................................................145
T2/T3 2 ..............................................177
TE LAN-3 ............................................177
TE LAN-4 ............................................177
Timing Synk Priority .................... 178, 180 V
Trib. A ...............................................182
Trib. B ...............................................182 Valid Bytes Received .................................291
Synchronization Setup Protocol ..................173 Valid Frames Received ..............................291
System Password .....................................143 Value ......................................................196
Version ......................212, 215, 235, 240, 242
WEB LCT ............................................. 15
T VLan
Label .................................................197
T0 ..........................................................177 Lan1 ..................................................197
T2/T3 1 ..................................................177 Lan2 ..................................................197
T2/T3 2 ..................................................177 Lan3 ..................................................197
Lan4 ..................................................197
Tagged ...................................................197 Port A ................................................197
TDM Nodal Bus Protection ..........................161 Tagged ..............................................197
TE LAN-3 ................................................177 Unmodified .........................................197
Untagged ...........................................197
TE LAN-4 ................................................177
VLan ID .............................................197
Test Pattern ............................................322 VLan ID ..................................................197
Throug ....................................................196
Timeout, user ..........................................142
Timing Synk Priority ......................... 178, 180
W
Total Bytes Received ......................... 291, 294
Wait Time ...............................................330
Total Frames Received ...................... 291, 294
Wake Up trap
Transmitter Control ..................................221 Disable ..............................................113
Trib. A ....................................................182 Enable ...............................................113
Trib. B ....................................................182 Gosip Address .....................................113
NE Location ........................................113
Trunk .....................................................218 NMS IP Address ...................................113
Trunking .................................................237 Timeout .............................................113
Tx Forced Switch ......................................329 WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU, application ............. 14
Tx Frequency Selector ...............................282 WEB Lct Console ....................................... 11
Tx Pck Cnt ...............................................217 WEB LCT version ......................................126
Tx Power Constant Peak Mode ....................167 Wtr Time ......................................... 335, 338
Tx Power Control ......................................285
Tx Power Mode ........................................165
Tx Preferential .........................................330
Tx Switch Control .....................................173
Tx Transmitter .........................................284
TXPwr Radio (PM) .....................................102
Type ........................................................ 28
U
Undersize Frames .....................................291
Unmodified ..............................................197
Untagged ................................................197
Upper Modulation .....................................168
User
NMS5UX .............................................145
Read and Write ...................................142

ASSISTANCE SERVICE
For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU ALS Series Equipmen PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU ALS Series Equipmen PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

WEB LCT

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 11

WEB LCT ALCPLUS2 IDU PAGE ............................................................................................... 27

MAIN MENU ........................................................................................................................... 37

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 1

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 2

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 3

EQUIPMENT MENU ............................................................................................................... 152

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 4

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 5

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 6

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 7

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 8

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 9

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 349

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 354

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 362

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 368

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 10

The WEB LCT application can be started:

• From browser (see Fig.1).

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

• The equipment configuration: radio configuration, capacity, modulation, RF channels, tributar-

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 11

Remote equipment Local equipment

Controller Controller Browser

Remote equipment Local equipment

Controller Controller Browser

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 12

Remote equipment Local equipment

Controller Controller SCT/LMT

Remote equipment Local equipment

Controller Controller NE management SCT/LMT

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 13

In this guide, to make the writing easier, the wording:

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 14

• Select the About tab.

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 15

Maximum number of... Limit

Equipment into the remote equipment list 100

Stations into the remote equipment list 30

Users (WEB LCT, SCT/LMT and NMS5UX) contemporarily connected to 2

Signals into the Events List area 400

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 16

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 17

WEB LCT can be run:

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 18

The following procedure requires that:

To open the WEB LCT page from browser (Ethernet connection)

1. If not already active, run WLC program (see relevant documentation).

3. Type in the address box:

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 19

1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the USB cable.

To open the WEB LCT page from browser (serial connection)

1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the serial cable.

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 20

6. Execute one of the following operations:

1. Connect the equipment to one’s PC by means of the modem.

4. Select the Connect using a modem option in the PPP area.

6. Execute one of the following operations:

WEB LCT ALCplus2 IDU - MN.00237.E - 006 21

Messages displayed at the start of WEB LCT

At the start of WEB LCT, the display of the message: